Fujifilm X-T5 Owner's Manual

Add to My manuals
432 Pages

advertisement

Fujifilm X-T5 Owner's Manual | Manualzz
FF220001
Owner’s Manual
BL00005204-200 EN
Introduction
Thank you for your purchase of this product. Be sure that
you have read this manual and understood its contents before using the camera. Keep the manual where it will be
read by all who use the product.
For the Latest Information
The latest versions of the manuals are available from:
https://fujifilm-dsc.com/en/manual/
The website can be accessed not only from
your computer but also from smartphones
and tablets. It also contains information on
the software license.
For information on firmware updates, visit:
https://fujifilm-x.com/support/download/firmware/cameras/
ii
P Chapter Index
Menu List
iv
1 Before You Begin
1
2 First Steps
33
3 Basic Photography and Playback
51
4 Movie Recording and Playback
61
5 Taking Photographs
71
6 The Shooting Menus
117
7 Playback and the Playback Menu
219
8 Network/USB Features and Settings
247
9 The Setup Menus
271
10 Shortcuts
311
11 Peripherals and Optional Accessories
333
12 Technical Notes
355
iii
Menu List
Camera menu options are listed below.
Menu List
Shooting Menus
Adjust settings when shooting photos or movies.
N See page 117 for details.
Photo Menus
N Items marked with both x and F icons are available in both the still
photography and movie shooting menus. Changes to these items in
either menu also apply to the item in the remaining menu.
H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING
IMAGE SIZE
IMAGE QUALITY
RAW RECORDING
SELECT JPEG/HEIF
1⁄4
FILM SIMULATION
MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
GRAIN EFFECT
COLOR CHROME EFFECT
COLOR CHROME FX BLUE
SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT
WHITE BALANCE
DYNAMIC RANGE
2⁄4
D RANGE PRIORITY
TONE CURVE
COLOR
SHARPNESS
iv
P H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING
HIGH ISO NR
118
CLARITY
119
LONG EXPOSURE NR
120
LENS MODULATION OPTIMIZER
121
3⁄4
COLOR SPACE
122
PIXEL MAPPING
124
124
x SELECT CUSTOM SETTING
125
x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING
125
AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING
4⁄4
125
xF MOUNT ADAPTOR SETTING
126
130
130
131
131
131
P
132
132
132
133
133
133
134
134
139
140
Menu List
P A SHOOTING SETTING
DRIVE SETTING
143
SPORTS FINDER MODE
143
144
PRE-SHOT sJ
148
SELF-TIMER
1⁄3
148
SAVE SELF-TIMER SETTING
SELF-TIMER LAMP
148
PHOTOMETRY
149
SHUTTER TYPE
149
INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING
150
INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING
151
EXPOSURE SMOOTHING
153
INTERVAL PRIORITY MODE
155
156 2⁄3 FLICKER REDUCTION
FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING
156
IS MODE
157
ISO AUTO SETTING
157
DIGITAL TELE-CONV.
157
MULTI EXPOSURE
158
159 3⁄3 PIXEL SHIFT MULTI SHOT
xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
160
F FLASH SETTING
FLASH FUNCTION SETTING
RED EYE REMOVAL
TTL-LOCK MODE
LED LIGHT SETTING
COMMANDER SETTING
CH SETTING
B MOVIE SETTING
MOVIE MODE
HIGH SPEED REC
MEDIA REC SETTING
F IS MODE
F IS MODE BOOST
AUDIO SETTING
F REC FRAME INDICATOR
P
162
167
168
168
169
169
169
170
171
172
173
173
174
174
175
175
176
177
179
P
180
180
181
181
182
182
P
183
183
183
184
184
184
186
v
Menu List
G AF/MF SETTING
FOCUS AREA
AF MODE
AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS
STORE AF MODE BY ORIENTATION
1⁄3
AF POINT DISPLAYyz
xF WRAP FOCUS POINT
NUMBER OF FOCUS POINTS
PRE-AF
xF AF ILLUMINATOR
g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING
SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING
AF+MF
2⁄3
MF ASSIST
FOCUS CHECK
INTERLOCK SPOT AE & FOCUS AREA
xF INSTANT AF SETTING
xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE
RELEASE/FOCUS PRIORITY
3⁄3
xF AF RANGE LIMITER
TOUCH SCREEN MODE
Movie Menus
N Items marked with both x and F icons are available in both the still
photography and movie shooting menus. Changes to these items in
either menu also apply to the item in the remaining menu.
Menu List
P
P H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING
B MOVIE SETTING
MOVIE SETTING LIST
187
201
F FILM SIMULATION
MOVIE MODE
188
201
F MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
HIGH SPEED REC
189
202
F WHITE BALANCE
190
F SELF-TIMER
202
F DYNAMIC RANGE
1⁄3
1⁄2
MEDIA REC SETTING
190
202
F TONE CURVE
HDMI OUTPUT SETTING
192
202
F COLOR
FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION
193
203
F SHARPNESS
F-Log/HLG RECORDING
194
203
F HIGH ISO NR
DATA LEVEL SETTING
195
INTERFRAME NR
203
195 2⁄2 F PERIPHERAL LIGHT CORRECTION 204
F PHOTOMETRY
195
F FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING
xF MOUNT ADAPTOR SETTING 204
196
F IS MODE
2⁄3
196
F IS MODE BOOST
ZEBRA SETTING
197
ZEBRA LEVEL
197
MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL 198
198
F REC FRAME INDICATOR
TALLY LIGHT
199
200
F SELECT CUSTOM SETTING
3⁄3
F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING 200
F AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING 200
xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION 200
vi
Menu List
P P AUDIO SETTING
P
INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
MIC JACK SETTING
MIC LEVEL LIMITER
WIND FILTER
LOW CUT FILTER
207
HEADPHONES VOLUME
207 XLR MIC ADAPTER SETTING
Q TIME CODE SETTING
207
TIME CODE DISPLAY
208
START TIME SETTING
208
COUNT UP SETTING
208
DROP FRAME
209 HDMI TIME CODE OUTPUT
209
210
212
213
213
214
214
214
214
214
215
205
205
206
206
207
P
216
216
217
217
218
vii
Menu List
G AF/MF SETTING
F FOCUS AREA
F AF MODE
F AF-C CUSTOM SETTING
xF WRAP FOCUS POINT
1⁄2 xF AF ILLUMINATOR
Fg FACE/EYE DETECTION
SETTING
F SUBJECT DETECTION
SETTING
F AF+MF
F MF ASSIST
F FOCUS CHECK
xF INSTANT AF SETTING
2⁄2 xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE
xF AF RANGE LIMITER
F TOUCH SCREEN MODE
FOCUS CHECK LOCK
The Playback Menu
Adjust playback settings.
N See page 225 for details.
Menu List
C PLAY BACK MENU
SWITCH SLOT
RAW CONVERSION
HEIF TO JPEG/TIFF CONVERSION
ERASE
1⁄3
SIMULTANEOUS DELETE
CROP
RESIZE
PROTECT
viii
P C PLAY BACK MENU
P
225
IMAGE ROTATE
235
226
VOICE MEMO SETTING
236
229
RATING
237
230
COPY
238
2⁄3
232
TRANSFER IMAGE TO SMARTPHONE 239
232
xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION 241
233
SLIDE SHOW
241
234
PHOTOBOOK ASSIST
242
PRINT ORDER (DPOF)
244
3⁄3 instax PRINTER PRINT
245
DISP ASPECT
246
Menu List
Setup Menus
Adjust basic camera settings.
N See page 271 for details.
P D SCREEN SETTING
P
VIEW MODE SETTING
282
272
EVF BRIGHTNESS
282
273
EVF COLOR
282
273
EVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT
283
274
1⁄4
LCD BRIGHTNESS
284
275
LCD COLOR
284
275
LCD COLOR ADJUSTMENT
284
275
IMAGE DISP.
285
276
AUTOROTATE DISPLAYS
285
276
PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE 286
277
NATURAL LIVE VIEW
286
277
F-Log VIEW ASSIST
287
P 2⁄4
D SOUND SETTING
ELECTRONIC LEVEL SETTING
287
AF BEEP VOL.
278
FRAMING GUIDELINE
288
SELF-TIMER BEEP VOL.
278
AUTOROTATE PB
289
OPERATION VOL.
279
FOCUS SCALE UNITS
289
279
F REC START/STOP VOLUME
APERTURE UNIT FOR CINEMA LENS 289
1⁄2 tt ELECTRONIC SHUTTER
279
DUAL DISPLAY SETTING
290
VOLUME
DISP. CUSTOM SETTING
290
tt ELECTRONIC SHUTTER
280
LARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF)
291
SOUND
3⁄4
LARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD)
291
s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME 280
LARGE
INDICATORS
DISP.
SETTING
292
s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND 280
INFORMATION CONTRAST ADJ.
292
PLAYBACK VOLUME
281
2⁄2
LOCATION
INFO
293
4ch AUDIO PLAYBACK
281
293
x Q MENU BACKGROUND
4⁄4
293
F Q MENU BACKGROUND
ix
Menu List
D USER SETTING
FORMAT
b AREA SETTING
DATE/TIME
TIME DIFFERENCE
1⁄2
Qa
x MY MENU SETTING
F MY MENU SETTING
SENSOR CLEANING
BATTERY AGE
2⁄2 RESET
REGULATORY
Menu List
Menu List
D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING
FOCUS LEVER SETTING
x EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU
F EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU
FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING
1⁄3 POWER ZOOM LENS FUNCTION
(Fn) SETTING
SELECTOR BUTTON SETTING
COMMAND DIAL SETTING
o S.S OPERATION
COMMAND DIAL DIRECTION
SHUTTER AF
SHUTTER AE
SHOOT WITHOUT LENS
2⁄3
SHOOT WITHOUT CARD
LENS ZOOM/FOCUS SETTING
AE/AF-LOCK MODE
AWB-LOCK MODE
APERTURE RING SETTING (A)
APERTURE SETTING
3⁄3 a Fn1 BUTTON SETTING
TOUCH SCREEN SETTING
LOCK
x
P D POWER MANAGEMENT
P
AUTO POWER OFF
PERFORMANCE
EVF/LCD BOOST SETTING
AUTO POWER OFF TEMP.
306
306
307
307
295 D SAVE DATA SETTING
FRAME NO.
295
EDIT FILE NAME
296
x CARD SLOT SETTING
297
SELECT SLOT(xSEQUENTIAL)
297
SELECT FOLDER
298
COPYRIGHT INFO
298
GEOTAGGING
299
299
300
302
302
303
303
303
304
305
P
294
295
295
295
308
309
309
309
310
310
310
Menu List
The Network/USB Settings Menu
Adjust settings for network and USB connections.
N See page 264 for details.
P
Menu List
I NETWORK/USB SETTING
Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING
AIRPLANE MODE
NETWORK SETTING
instax PRINTER CONNECTION
SETTING
CONNECTION MODE
USB POWER SUPPLY/
COMM SETTING
INFORMATION
RESET WIRELESS SETTING
264
267
267
267
268
270
270
270
xi
P Table of Contents
Introduction ..........................................................................................................ii
For the Latest Information .......................................................................................... ii
Menu List...............................................................................................................iv
Shooting Menus ..............................................................................................................iv
The Playback Menu......................................................................................................viii
Setup Menus ...................................................................................................................... ix
The Network/USB Settings Menu ......................................................................... xi
Supplied Accessories .................................................................................... xxv
About This Manual........................................................................................xxvi
Symbols and Conventions ...................................................................................xxvi
Terminology ..................................................................................................................xxvi
1 Before You Begin
1
Parts of the Camera ............................................................................................2
The Serial Number Plate ..............................................................................................4
The Focus Stick (Focus Lever) ...................................................................................4
The Selector.........................................................................................................................4
The Shutter Speed and Sensitivity Dials ............................................................5
STILL/MOVIE mode dial....................................................................................................5
The Exposure Compensation Dial .........................................................................6
The Drive Dial .....................................................................................................................6
The Command Dials.......................................................................................................7
The Indicator Lamp.........................................................................................................9
The LCD Monitor ........................................................................................................... 10
The Eye Cup...................................................................................................................... 11
Focusing the Viewfinder ........................................................................................... 11
Camera Displays ............................................................................................... 12
The Electronic Viewfinder ........................................................................................ 12
The LCD Monitor ........................................................................................................... 14
Choosing a Display Mode........................................................................................ 16
Adjusting Display Brightness ................................................................................. 18
Display Rotation ............................................................................................................. 18
The DISP/BACK Button............................................................................................... 19
The Dual Display ............................................................................................................ 20
xii
Table of Contents
Customizing the Standard Display..................................................................... 21
Virtual Horizon ................................................................................................................ 23
Using the Menus .............................................................................................. 24
The Menus......................................................................................................................... 24
Selecting a Menu Tab ................................................................................................. 25
Touch Screen Mode......................................................................................... 26
Shooting Touch Controls ......................................................................................... 26
Playback Touch Controls........................................................................................... 31
2 First Steps
33
3 Basic Photography and Playback
51
4 Movie Recording and Playback
61
Attaching the Strap ......................................................................................... 34
Attaching a Lens ............................................................................................... 35
Inserting the Battery ....................................................................................... 36
Inserting Memory Cards ................................................................................ 38
Using Two Cards ............................................................................................................ 40
Compatible Memory Cards .................................................................................... 41
Charging the Battery ...................................................................................... 42
Turning the Camera On and Off ................................................................. 46
Checking the Battery Level........................................................................... 47
Basic Setup ......................................................................................................... 48
Choosing a Different Language........................................................................... 50
Changing the Time and Date ................................................................................ 50
Taking Photographs (Mode P) ..................................................................... 52
Viewing Pictures ............................................................................................... 56
HDMI Output ................................................................................................................... 57
Deleting Pictures .............................................................................................. 59
Recording Movies ............................................................................................ 62
Recording Movies ......................................................................................................... 62
Adjusting Movie Settings ......................................................................................... 68
Viewing Movies................................................................................................. 69
xiii
5 Taking Photographs
71
P, S, A, and M Modes........................................................................................ 72
Mode P: Program AE ................................................................................................... 72
Mode S: Shutter-Priority AE..................................................................................... 74
Mode A: Aperture-Priority AE ................................................................................ 78
Mode M: Manual Exposure ..................................................................................... 80
Autofocus ............................................................................................................ 82
Focus Mode ...................................................................................................................... 83
Autofocus Options (AF Mode) .............................................................................. 85
Focus-Point Selection................................................................................................. 87
Manual Focus..................................................................................................... 91
Checking Focus .............................................................................................................. 93
Sensitivity............................................................................................................ 96
AUTO ..................................................................................................................................... 97
Metering .............................................................................................................. 98
Exposure Compensation ............................................................................... 99
C (Custom)...................................................................................................................... 100
Focus/Exposure Lock ....................................................................................101
Other Controls ............................................................................................................. 102
Bracketing .........................................................................................................103
O AE BKT ........................................................................................................................ 103
W ISO BKT ..................................................................................................................... 103
X FILM SIMULATION BKT.................................................................................... 104
V WHITE BALANCE BKT ....................................................................................... 104
Y DYNAMIC RANGE BKT ..................................................................................... 104
Z FOCUS BKT............................................................................................................. 104
Continuous Shooting (Burst Mode).........................................................105
HDR .....................................................................................................................107
Advanced Filters .............................................................................................109
Advanced Filter Options ........................................................................................ 110
Panoramas ........................................................................................................111
Multiple Exposures ........................................................................................114
xiv
Table of Contents
6 The Shooting Menus
117
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography) .....................................118
IMAGE SIZE ..................................................................................................................... 118
IMAGE QUALITY .......................................................................................................... 119
RAW RECORDING ....................................................................................................... 120
SELECT JPEG/HEIF...................................................................................................... 121
FILM SIMULATION ...................................................................................................... 122
MONOCHROMATIC COLOR.................................................................................. 124
GRAIN EFFECT .............................................................................................................. 124
COLOR CHROME EFFECT....................................................................................... 125
COLOR CHROME FX BLUE ..................................................................................... 125
SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT ............................................................................................ 125
WHITE BALANCE ......................................................................................................... 126
DYNAMIC RANGE ....................................................................................................... 130
D RANGE PRIORITY .................................................................................................... 130
TONE CURVE.................................................................................................................. 131
COLOR ............................................................................................................................... 131
SHARPNESS .................................................................................................................... 131
HIGH ISO NR .................................................................................................................. 132
CLARITY ............................................................................................................................ 132
LONG EXPOSURE NR ................................................................................................ 132
LENS MODULATION OPTIMIZER ....................................................................... 133
COLOR SPACE ............................................................................................................... 133
PIXEL MAPPING ........................................................................................................... 133
x SELECT CUSTOM SETTING ............................................................................ 134
x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING ..................................................................... 134
AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING.................................................................... 139
xF MOUNT ADAPTOR SETTING .................................................................. 140
AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography) ........................................................143
FOCUS AREA ................................................................................................................. 143
AF MODE ......................................................................................................................... 143
AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS ....................................................................................... 144
STORE AF MODE BY ORIENTATION .................................................................. 148
AF POINT DISPLAY yz ...................................................................................... 148
xF WRAP FOCUS POINT .................................................................................. 148
NUMBER OF FOCUS POINTS................................................................................ 149
xv
PRE-AF ............................................................................................................................... 149
xF AF ILLUMINATOR .......................................................................................... 150
g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING ................................................................. 151
SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING .......................................................................... 153
AF+MF .............................................................................................................................. 155
MF ASSIST ....................................................................................................................... 156
FOCUS CHECK .............................................................................................................. 156
INTERLOCK SPOT AE & FOCUS AREA.............................................................. 157
xF INSTANT AF SETTING ................................................................................. 157
xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE........................................................................... 157
RELEASE/FOCUS PRIORITY ................................................................................... 158
xF AF RANGE LIMITER....................................................................................... 159
TOUCH SCREEN MODE ........................................................................................... 160
SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)................................................162
DRIVE SETTING ............................................................................................................. 162
SPORTS FINDER MODE ........................................................................................... 167
PRE-SHOT sJ .......................................................................................................... 168
SELF-TIMER ..................................................................................................................... 168
SAVE SELF-TIMER SETTING.................................................................................... 169
SELF-TIMER LAMP....................................................................................................... 169
PHOTOMETRY ............................................................................................................... 169
SHUTTER TYPE.............................................................................................................. 170
INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING ................................................................................ 171
INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING EXPOSURE SMOOTHING........................ 172
INTERVAL PRIORITY MODE ................................................................................... 173
FLICKER REDUCTION ................................................................................................ 173
FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING ..................................................................................... 174
IS MODE ........................................................................................................................... 174
ISO AUTO SETTING .................................................................................................... 175
DIGITAL TELE-CONV. ................................................................................................. 175
MULTI EXPOSURE ....................................................................................................... 176
PIXEL SHIFT MULTI SHOT ....................................................................................... 177
xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION................................................................ 179
FLASH SETTING (Still Photography) ........................................................180
FLASH FUNCTION SETTING ................................................................................. 180
RED EYE REMOVAL..................................................................................................... 180
xvi
Table of Contents
TTL-LOCK MODE ......................................................................................................... 181
LED LIGHT SETTING .................................................................................................. 181
COMMANDER SETTING .......................................................................................... 182
CH SETTING ................................................................................................................... 182
MOVIE SETTING (Still Photography) ........................................................183
MOVIE MODE ................................................................................................................ 183
HIGH SPEED REC ......................................................................................................... 183
MEDIA REC SETTING................................................................................................. 183
F IS MODE .................................................................................................................... 184
F IS MODE BOOST................................................................................................... 184
AUDIO SETTING........................................................................................................... 184
F REC FRAME INDICATOR ................................................................................... 186
MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording) .........................................................187
MOVIE SETTING LIST................................................................................................. 187
MOVIE MODE ................................................................................................................ 188
HIGH SPEED REC ......................................................................................................... 189
F SELF-TIMER .............................................................................................................. 190
MEDIA REC SETTING................................................................................................. 190
HDMI OUTPUT SETTING......................................................................................... 192
FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION .................................................................. 193
F-Log/HLG RECORDING ......................................................................................... 194
DATA LEVEL SETTING ............................................................................................... 195
F PHOTOMETRY ....................................................................................................... 195
F FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING.............................................................................. 195
F IS MODE .................................................................................................................... 196
F IS MODE BOOST................................................................................................... 196
ZEBRA SETTING ........................................................................................................... 197
ZEBRA LEVEL ................................................................................................................. 197
MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL ................................................................ 198
F REC FRAME INDICATOR ................................................................................... 198
TALLY LIGHT ................................................................................................................... 199
F SELECT CUSTOM SETTING............................................................................. 200
F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING...................................................................... 200
F AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING ............................................................ 200
xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION................................................................ 200
xvii
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Movie Recording) ......................................201
F FILM SIMULATION............................................................................................... 201
F MONOCHROMATIC COLOR .......................................................................... 201
F WHITE BALANCE .................................................................................................. 202
F DYNAMIC RANGE ................................................................................................ 202
F TONE CURVE .......................................................................................................... 202
F COLOR........................................................................................................................ 202
F SHARPNESS............................................................................................................. 203
F HIGH ISO NR ........................................................................................................... 203
INTERFRAME NR .......................................................................................................... 203
F PERIPHERAL LIGHT CORRECTION ............................................................. 204
xF MOUNT ADAPTOR SETTING .................................................................. 204
AF/MF SETTING (Movie Recording) .........................................................205
F FOCUS AREA .......................................................................................................... 205
F AF MODE .................................................................................................................. 205
F AF-C CUSTOM SETTING .................................................................................. 206
xF WRAP FOCUS POINT .................................................................................. 206
xF AF ILLUMINATOR .......................................................................................... 207
Fg FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING .......................................................... 207
F SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING ................................................................... 207
F AF+MF ....................................................................................................................... 207
F MF ASSIST ................................................................................................................ 208
F FOCUS CHECK ....................................................................................................... 208
xF INSTANT AF SETTING ................................................................................. 208
xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE........................................................................... 209
xF AF RANGE LIMITER....................................................................................... 209
F TOUCH SCREEN MODE .................................................................................... 210
FOCUS CHECK LOCK ................................................................................................ 212
AUDIO SETTING (Movie Recording).........................................................213
INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT............................................................... 213
EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT.............................................................. 213
MIC JACK SETTING..................................................................................................... 214
MIC LEVEL LIMITER .................................................................................................... 214
WIND FILTER .................................................................................................................. 214
LOW CUT FILTER .......................................................................................................... 214
HEADPHONES VOLUME ......................................................................................... 214
XLR MIC ADAPTER SETTING................................................................................. 215
xviii
Table of Contents
TIME CODE SETTING (Movie Recording)................................................216
TIME CODE DISPLAY ................................................................................................. 216
START TIME SETTING ................................................................................................ 216
COUNT UP SETTING.................................................................................................. 217
DROP FRAME ................................................................................................................ 217
HDMI TIME CODE OUTPUT ................................................................................... 218
7 Playback and the Playback Menu
219
8 Network/USB Features and Settings
247
The Playback Display ....................................................................................220
The DISP/BACK Button............................................................................................ 221
Viewing Pictures .............................................................................................223
Playback Zoom ............................................................................................................ 224
Multi-Frame Playback .............................................................................................. 224
The Playback Menu .......................................................................................225
SWITCH SLOT ................................................................................................................ 225
RAW CONVERSION .................................................................................................... 226
HEIF TO JPEG/TIFF CONVERSION ...................................................................... 229
ERASE ................................................................................................................................. 230
SIMULTANEOUS DELETE......................................................................................... 232
CROP .................................................................................................................................. 232
RESIZE ................................................................................................................................ 233
PROTECT .......................................................................................................................... 234
IMAGE ROTATE ............................................................................................................. 235
VOICE MEMO SETTING............................................................................................ 236
RATING .............................................................................................................................. 237
COPY .................................................................................................................................. 238
TRANSFER IMAGE TO SMARTPHONE.............................................................. 239
xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION................................................................ 241
SLIDE SHOW .................................................................................................................. 241
PHOTOBOOK ASSIST ................................................................................................ 242
PRINT ORDER (DPOF) ............................................................................................... 244
instax PRINTER PRINT ............................................................................................... 245
DISP ASPECT.................................................................................................................. 246
Overview ...........................................................................................................248
Supported Features .................................................................................................. 248
xix
Connecting to Smartphones (Bluetooth)..............................................249
Installing Smartphone Apps ............................................................................... 249
Connecting to a Smartphone ............................................................................ 249
Using the Smartphone App ................................................................................ 251
Connecting to Smartphones (USB) .........................................................252
Copying Pictures to a Smartphone ................................................................ 252
Connecting the Camera and Computer ..................................................... 255
Using the Camera as a Webcam ...............................................................257
instax SHARE Printers ...................................................................................258
Establishing a Connection.................................................................................... 258
Printing Pictures .......................................................................................................... 259
Tethered Photography .................................................................................260
Tethered Photography via USB.......................................................................... 260
Tethered Photography via Wireless LAN ..................................................... 261
RAW Processing ..............................................................................................262
Saving and Loading Settings .....................................................................263
Saving and Loading Settings Using a Computer ................................... 263
Network/USB Setting Menus .....................................................................264
Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING ................................................................. 264
AIRPLANE MODE ........................................................................................................ 267
NETWORK SETTING .................................................................................................. 267
instax PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING........................................................ 267
CONNECTION MODE ............................................................................................... 268
USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING .......................................................... 270
INFORMATION .............................................................................................................. 270
RESET WIRELESS SETTING ..................................................................................... 270
9 The Setup Menus
271
USER SETTING .................................................................................................272
FORMAT............................................................................................................................ 272
b AREA SETTING..................................................................................................... 273
DATE/TIME ...................................................................................................................... 273
TIME DIFFERENCE....................................................................................................... 274
Qa ............................................................................................................... 275
x MY MENU SETTING............................................................................................ 275
F MY MENU SETTING ............................................................................................ 275
xx
Table of Contents
SENSOR CLEANING ................................................................................................... 276
BATTERY AGE ................................................................................................................ 276
RESET ................................................................................................................................. 277
REGULATORY................................................................................................................. 277
SOUND SETTING .............................................................................................278
AF BEEP VOL. ................................................................................................................. 278
SELF-TIMER BEEP VOL. ............................................................................................. 278
OPERATION VOL. ......................................................................................................... 279
F REC START/STOP VOLUME ............................................................................. 279
tt ELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME ........................................................ 279
tt ELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND .......................................................... 280
s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME ............................................................... 280
s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND ................................................................. 280
PLAYBACK VOLUME .................................................................................................. 281
4ch AUDIO PLAYBACK ............................................................................................. 281
SCREEN SETTING ............................................................................................282
VIEW MODE SETTING............................................................................................... 282
EVF BRIGHTNESS ......................................................................................................... 282
EVF COLOR ..................................................................................................................... 282
EVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT..................................................................................... 283
LCD BRIGHTNESS ........................................................................................................ 284
LCD COLOR .................................................................................................................... 284
LCD COLOR ADJUSTMENT.................................................................................... 284
IMAGE DISP. .................................................................................................................... 285
AUTOROTATE DISPLAYS .......................................................................................... 285
PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE ........................................................... 286
NATURAL LIVE VIEW .................................................................................................. 286
F-Log VIEW ASSIST ..................................................................................................... 287
ELECTRONIC LEVEL SETTING .............................................................................. 287
FRAMING GUIDELINE ............................................................................................... 288
AUTOROTATE PB.......................................................................................................... 289
FOCUS SCALE UNITS ................................................................................................ 289
APERTURE UNIT FOR CINEMA LENS................................................................ 289
DUAL DISPLAY SETTING ......................................................................................... 290
DISP. CUSTOM SETTING .......................................................................................... 290
xxi
LARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF) ....................................................................... 291
LARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD) ...................................................................... 291
LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING .................................................................. 292
INFORMATION CONTRAST ADJ.......................................................................... 292
LOCATION INFO........................................................................................................... 293
x Q MENU BACKGROUND ................................................................................. 293
F Q MENU BACKGROUND ................................................................................. 293
BUTTON/DIAL SETTING................................................................................294
FOCUS LEVER SETTING ........................................................................................... 294
x EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU ................................................................................ 295
F EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU ................................................................................ 295
FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING........................................................................................ 295
POWER ZOOM LENS FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING ........................................ 295
SELECTOR BUTTON SETTING .............................................................................. 295
COMMAND DIAL SETTING ................................................................................... 296
o S.S OPERATION .................................................................................................... 297
COMMAND DIAL DIRECTION.............................................................................. 297
SHUTTER AF................................................................................................................... 298
SHUTTER AE................................................................................................................... 298
SHOOT WITHOUT LENS .......................................................................................... 299
SHOOT WITHOUT CARD......................................................................................... 299
LENS ZOOM/FOCUS SETTING ............................................................................ 300
AE/AF-LOCK MODE ................................................................................................... 302
AWB-LOCK MODE ...................................................................................................... 302
APERTURE RING SETTING (A) .............................................................................. 303
APERTURE SETTING .................................................................................................. 303
a Fn1 BUTTON SETTING ..................................................................................... 303
TOUCH SCREEN SETTING ...................................................................................... 304
LOCK................................................................................................................................... 305
POWER MANAGEMENT ................................................................................306
AUTO POWER OFF ..................................................................................................... 306
PERFORMANCE ............................................................................................................ 306
EVF/LCD BOOST SETTING ..................................................................................... 307
AUTO POWER OFF TEMP. ....................................................................................... 307
xxii
Table of Contents
SAVE DATA SETTING ......................................................................................308
FRAME NO. ..................................................................................................................... 308
EDIT FILE NAME ........................................................................................................... 309
x CARD SLOT SETTING ......................................................................................... 309
SELECT SLOT(xSEQUENTIAL) ........................................................................... 309
SELECT FOLDER........................................................................................................... 310
COPYRIGHT INFO........................................................................................................ 310
GEOTAGGING ................................................................................................................ 310
10Shortcuts
311
11Peripherals and Optional Accessories
333
Shortcut Options ............................................................................................312
MY MENU ..........................................................................................................313
MY MENU SETTING ................................................................................................... 313
The Quick Menu .............................................................................................315
The Quick Menu Display........................................................................................ 315
Viewing and Changing Settings ....................................................................... 317
Editing the Quick Menu ......................................................................................... 318
Function Controls...........................................................................................321
The Function Buttons .............................................................................................. 321
Touch-Function Gestures ...................................................................................... 326
Lens Function Buttons ............................................................................................ 329
Lenses.................................................................................................................334
Lens Parts ........................................................................................................................ 334
Lens Care ......................................................................................................................... 335
Removing Lens Caps ............................................................................................... 335
Attaching Lens Hoods ............................................................................................ 336
Lenses with Aperture Rings................................................................................. 337
Lenses with No Aperture Rings ......................................................................... 338
Lenses with O.I.S. Switches ................................................................................... 338
Manual Focus Lenses ............................................................................................... 339
Power Zoom Lenses ................................................................................................. 340
xxiii
Table of Contents
External Flash Units .......................................................................................341
Flash Settings................................................................................................................ 342
EF-X8 .................................................................................................................................. 343
SYNC TERMINAL .......................................................................................................... 345
SHOE MOUNT FLASH............................................................................................... 346
COMMANDER(OPTICAL) ........................................................................................ 349
Handgrips .........................................................................................................353
12Technical Notes
355
Accessories from Fujifilm.............................................................................356
Software for Use with Your Camera .........................................................359
Smartphone Apps ..................................................................................................... 359
RAW FILE CONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIX..................................... 359
Capture One Express for Fujifilm ...................................................................... 360
Capture One for Fujifilm ........................................................................................ 360
FUJIFILM Tether Shooting Plug-in (Exclusively for Lightroom) ...... 360
FUJIFILM X Acquire ................................................................................................... 361
FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO ....................................................................................... 361
FUJIFILM Pixel Shift Combiner ........................................................................... 361
For Your Safety ................................................................................................362
Product Care ....................................................................................................373
Cleaning the Image Sensor ........................................................................374
Firmware Updates..........................................................................................375
Checking the Firmware Version ........................................................................ 375
Troubleshooting .............................................................................................376
Warning Messages and Displays ..............................................................389
Memory Card Capacity ................................................................................394
Specifications ..................................................................................................395
xxiv
Supplied Accessories
The following are included with the camera:
• NP-W235 rechargeable battery
O For reasons of safety, the battery is not charged at shipment.
The camera will not function if the battery is not charged; be
sure to charge the battery before use (P 42).
• AC-5VJ AC power adapter
• Plug adapter
• USB cable (approx. 0.6 m/2 ft.)
• Body cap (comes attached to camera)
• Shoulder strap
• Hot shoe cover (comes attached to hot shoe)
• Sync terminal cap (comes attached to camera)
• Headphone adapter
• Basic Manual
N • If you purchased a lens kit, check that a lens is included.
• The plug adapter supplied varies with the country or region.
• The headphone adapter converts the USB Type-C connector to a
⌀3.5 mm headphone jack.
• For information on compatible computer software, see “Software for
Use with Your Camera” (P 359).
xxv
About This Manual
This manual contains instructions for your FUJIFILM X-T5 digital camera. Be sure you have read and understood its contents before proceeding.
Symbols and Conventions
The following symbols are used in this manual:
O Information that should be read to prevent damage to the
product.
Additional
information that may be helpful when using the
N
product.
P Pages on which related information may be found.
Menus and other text in the displays are shown in bold. Illustrations
are for explanatory purposes only; drawings may be simplified,
while photographs are not necessarily taken with the model of
camera described in this manual.
Terminology
The optional SD, SDHC, and SDXC memory cards the camera
uses to store pictures are referred to as “memory cards”. The electronic viewfinder may be referred to as the “EVF” and the LCD
monitor as the “LCD”. Smartphones and tablets are referred to as
“smartphones”.
xxvi
Before You Begin
1
Parts of the Camera
1
Before You Begin
A Fn1 button .....................................................321 P Lens release button ........................................35
B Exposure compensation dial.................. 6, 99 Q Fn2 button .....................................................321
C Shutter button .................................................55 R AF-assist illuminator...................................150
Self-timer lamp ............................................168
D Shutter speed dial
.................................................5, 72, 74, 78, 80
Tally light ........................................................199
E Dial lock release ................................................5
F Hot shoe .........................................................342
G Microphone ......................................................62
H Diopter adjustment control (lockable)
S STILL/MOVIE mode dial..................... 5, 62, 72
T Front command dial...............................7, 296
U ON/OFF switch .................................................46
V Hot shoe cover ..............................................342
W Body cap............................................................35
X Microphone jack (⌀3.5 mm) .......................67
Y Remote release connector (⌀2.5 mm)
..........................................................................11
I Sensitivity dial............................................. 5, 96
J Drive dial .............................................................6
..........................................................................77
K Strap clip............................................................34
Z USB connector (Type-C) ...............................42
L Connector cover
M Sync terminal ................................................345 a HDMI Micro connector (Type D) ................57
N Focus mode selector ......................................83 b Speaker .................................................... 69, 281
O Lens signal contacts
2
Parts of the Camera
1
Before You Begin
c b (delete) button ...........................................59 p Selector buttons ................................................4
d a (playback) button ...................................56 q MENU/OK button .............................................24
r Battery-chamber cover latch ......................36
e Electronic viewfinder (EVF)
..................................................... 12, 16, 18, 26 s Battery-chamber cover .................................36
f Eye cup (lockable)...........................................11 t DISP (display)/BACK button ............... 19, 221
x(Bluetooth) button ..................................249
g VIEW MODE button .........................................16
h AFON button .........................................102, 321 u Tripod mount
i Rear command dial .......................7, 223, 296 v LCD monitor .......................................10, 14, 16
Touch screen .................................26, 160, 210
j Q (quick menu) button ...............................315
k Indicator lamp ..........................................9, 199 w Eye sensor..........................................................16
Tally light ........................................................199 x Memory card slot 2 ........................................38
l AEL (exposure lock) button ..............102, 321 y Memory card slot 1 ........................................38
m Focus stick (focus lever)...................4, 87, 294 z Battery chamber .............................................36
n Memory card slot cover latch......................38 0 Battery latch.....................................................37
o Memory card slot cover ................................38 1 Serial number plate..........................................4
3
The Serial Number Plate
Do not remove the serial number plate,
which provides the CMIIT ID, serial number, and other important information.
1
Before You Begin
Serial number plate
The Focus Stick (Focus Lever)
Tilt or press the focus stick to select the focus area. The focus stick can also be used
to navigate the menus.
N To choose the role played by the focus stick, press and hold the center of the stick or use D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > FOCUS LEVER
SETTING.
The Selector
Press the selector up, right, down, or left
to highlight items. The up, right, down,
and left buttons also double as function
buttons Fn3 through Fn6 (P 295, 321).
4
Parts of the Camera
The Shutter Speed and Sensitivity Dials
Press the dial lock release to release the
dial before rotating it to the desired setting. Press the release again to lock the
dial in place.
Shutter speed
1
Before You Begin
Sensitivity
STILL/MOVIE mode dial
Rotate the STILL/MOVIE mode dial to STILL
to take photos and to MOVIE to record
movies.
5
The Exposure Compensation Dial
Rotate the dial to choose an exposure
compensation amount.
1
Before You Begin
The Drive Dial
Rotate the dial to choose from the following the drive modes.
u
ADV.
BKT
CH
6
Mode
Panorama
Advanced filter
Bracketing
High-speed burst
P
Mode
111 CL Low-speed burst
109 S Single frame
103 h HDR
105
P
105
52
107
Parts of the Camera
The Command Dials
Rotate or press the command dials to:
Front command dial
Rear command dial
1
Rotate
through menus
• Adjust aperture 1, 2
2, 5
• Adjust exposure compensation
2, 3
• Adjust sensitivity
• View other pictures during
playback
• Switch back and forth between
Press
aperture and sensitivity 2, 3, 6
• Press and hold to choose the option selected for D BUTTON/
DIAL SETTING > COMMAND
DIAL SETTING in the D (setup)
menu
tion of shutter speed and aperture (program shift)
• Choose a shutter speed 2
• Adjust settings in the quick menu
• Choose the size of the focus frame
• Zoom in or out in full frame playback
• Zoom in or out in multi-frame
playback
• Perform the function assigned
to the DIAL function button
• Zoom in on the active focus point 4
• Press and hold to choose the4
manual focus mode focus display
• Zoom in on the active focus
point during playback
1 Lens not equipped with aperture ring; lens equipped with aperture ring and aperture set
to A (auto) and COMMAND selected for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > APERTURE
RING SETTING (A); or ON selected for MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL.
2 Can be changed using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > COMMAND DIAL SETTING.
3 Sensitivity dial rotated to C or ON selected for MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL.
7
Before You Begin
• Select menu tabs or page
• Highlight menu items
• Choose the desired combina-
4 Available only if FOCUS CHECK is assigned to a function button.
5 Exposure compensation dial rotated to C or ON selected for MOVIE OPTIMIZED
CONTROL oL.
6 Can be used to switch back and forth between aperture, sensitivity, and exposure compensation when exposure compensation dial is rotated to C or ON is selected for MOVIE
OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL.
1
N The rotation direction for the command dials can be selected using
D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > COMMAND DIAL DIRECTION.
Before You Begin
8
Parts of the Camera
The Indicator Lamp
Camera status is shown by the indicator
lamp.
1
Blinks green
Blinks green and
orange
Glows orange
Blinks orange
Blinks red
Camera status
Focus locked.
Focus or slow shutter speed warning. Pictures can be
taken.
• Camera on: Recording pictures, or picture displayed for
confirmation after being taken with option other than
OFF selected for D SCREEN SET-UP > IMAGE DISP.
(additional pictures can be taken).
off: Uploading pictures to a smartphone or tab• Camera
let. *
Recording pictures. No additional pictures can be taken
at this time.
Flash charging; flash will not fire when picture is taken.
Lens or memory error.
* Displayed only if pictures are selected for upload.
N • Warnings may also appear in the display.
• The indicator lamp remains off while your eye is to the viewfinder.
• The B MOVIE SETTING > TALLY LIGHT option can be used to
choose the lamp (indicator or AF-assist) that lights during movie recording and whether the lamp blinks or remains steady.
• The indicator lamp blinks green whenever the displays are off during
interval-timer photography.
9
Before You Begin
Indicator lamp
Glows green
The LCD Monitor
The LCD monitor can be tilted for easier viewing, but be careful not to touch
the wires or trap fingers or other objects
behind the monitor. Touching the wires
could cause camera malfunction.
1
Before You Begin
N The LCD monitor also functions as a touch screen that can be used for:
• Touch photography (P 27)
• Focus area selection (P 26)
• Function selection (P 29)
• Movie optimized control oL (P 28)
• Playback (P 31)
“Tall” (Portrait) Orientation
The display can also be tilted to take pictures from high or low angles when
the camera is rotated to take pictures in “tall” (portrait) orientation.
• Press the tilt lock release and tilt the display as shown in Figure 1.
• To take high-angle shots, hold the camera in the orientation shown in
Figure 2.
Figure 1
10
Figure 2
Parts of the Camera
The Eye Cup
To remove the eye cup, hold the buttons
on either side and slide eye cup up.
1
To focus the viewfinder:
A Lift the diopter adjustment control.
B Rotate the control to adjust viewfinder focus.
C Return the control to its original position and lock it in place.
O Lift the control before use. Failure to observe this precaution could
cause product malfunction.
11
Before You Begin
Focusing the Viewfinder
If the indicators displayed in the viewfinder are blurred, put your
eye to the viewfinder and rotate the diopter adjustment control
until the display is in sharp focus.
Camera Displays
This section lists the indicators that may be displayed
during shooting.
O For illustrative purposes, displays are shown with all indicators lit.
The Electronic Viewfinder
1
E
F LM N O P Q
Before You Begin
GHIJK
S T
X Y
U V W
R
a
b
5
4
3
2
1
0
c
d
z
e
y
x
w
f
rq
v ut s
12
Z
p o
nml
k
j
i hg
Camera Displays
elapsed recording time ..............................62
V Card slot options ................................... 40, 309
W Number of available frames 1...................394
X Image size ......................................................118
Y File format......................................................191
Z Image quality................................................119
a HEIF format ...................................................121
b Date and time..................................48, 50, 273
c Touch screen mode .............................. 26, 160
d Temperature warning ......................... 39, 393
e Control lock 3 .................................................305
f Boost mode ...................................................307
g Power supply....................................................44
h Histogram .........................................................22
i Battery level ......................................................47
j Sensitivity ..........................................................96
k Exposure compensation ...............................99
l Aperture...............................................73, 78, 80
m Distance indicator 2 ........................................93
n Shutter speed .....................................73, 74, 80
o TTL lock ..................................................181, 325
p AE lock....................................................102, 302
q Metering ............................................................98
r Shooting mode ...............................................72
s Focus mode 2 ....................................................83
t Focus indicator 2 ..............................................84
u Manual focus indicator 2 .......................83, 91
v AF lock....................................................102, 302
w Time code.......................................................216
x Microphone input channel..............186, 215
y Recording level 2 ...........................................213
z Exposure indicator...................................80, 99
0 Virtual horizon.................................................23
1 Focus frame ............................................ 87, 101
2 Bluetooth host ..............................................249
3 Location data download status..............310
4 Depth-of-field preview...........................79, 93
5 Focus check ............................................ 94, 156
1 Shows “9999” if there is space for over 9999 frames.
2 Not displayed when ON is selected for D SCREEN SET-UP > LARGE INDICATORS
MODE(EVF).
3 Displayed when controls have been locked by pressing and holding the MENU/OK button.
Control lock can be ended by pressing and holding the MENU/OK button again.
13
1
Before You Begin
A Crop factor .....................................................193
B IS mode 2 .........................................................174
C Flash (TTL) mode .........................................346
D Flash compensation ...................................346
E Movie compression .....................................191
F Digital teleconverter ...................................175
G Self-timer indicator ............................168, 190
H Continuous mode........................................105
I Shutter type ...................................................170
J AF+MF indicator 2 .......................................155
K Bluetooth ON/OFF
L White balance ..............................................126
M AWB lock ........................................................302
N Film simulation ............................................122
O F-Log/HLG recording ..................................194
P Dynamic range ............................................130
Q D-range priority ...........................................130
R Image transfer status ........................249, 264
S Movie mode ........................................... 62, 188
T High-speed recording indicator ..............189
U Recording time available/
The LCD Monitor
F
G
A B C DE
1
J
H I
K
L
M NO
Q R
P
ST
U
7
6
5
4
V
W
Before You Begin
X
Y
3
2
Z
a
1
b
c
d
0
z
y
e
ts
x w v u
14
rq
p
o
nm l k
j i
hg f
Camera Displays
elapsed recording time ..............................62
N Date and time..................................48, 50, 273
O Card slot options ................................... 40, 309
P Number of available frames 1 ...................394
Q Image size ......................................................118
R File format......................................................191
S Image quality................................................119
T HEIF format ...................................................121
U Touch screen mode 3 ............................ 26, 160
V AWB lock ........................................................302
W White balance ..............................................126
X Film simulation ............................................122
Y F-Log/HLG recording ..................................194
Z Dynamic range ............................................130
a D-range priority ...........................................130
b Movie optimized control 3.............................28
c Virtual horizon.................................................23
d Boost mode ...................................................307
e Touch zoom 3 ....................................................30
f Temperature warning ......................... 39, 393
g Control lock 4..................................................305
h Battery level ......................................................47
i Power supply....................................................44
j Sensitivity ..........................................................96
k Histogram .........................................................22
l Exposure compensation ...............................99
m Distance indicator 2 ........................................93
n Aperture...............................................73, 78, 80
o Time code.......................................................216
p Shutter speed .....................................73, 74, 80
q TTL lock ..................................................181, 325
r AE lock....................................................102, 302
s Metering ............................................................98
t Shooting mode ...............................................72
u Focus mode 2 ....................................................83
v Focus indicator 2 ..............................................84
w Manual focus indicator 2 .......................83, 91
x AF lock....................................................102, 302
y Microphone input channel..............186, 215
z AF+MF indicator 2 .......................................155
0 Shutter type ...................................................170
1 Recording level 2 ...........................................213
2 Continuous mode........................................105
3 Self-timer indicator ............................168, 190
4 Exposure indicator...................................80, 99
5 Flash (TTL) mode .........................................346
6 Flash compensation ...................................346
7 IS mode 2 .........................................................174
1 Shows “9999” if there is space for over 9999 frames.
2 Not displayed when ON is selected for D SCREEN SET-UP > LARGE INDICATORS
MODE(LCD).
3 Camera functions can also be accessed via touch controls.
4 Displayed when controls have been locked by pressing and holding the MENU/OK button.
Control lock can be ended by pressing and holding the MENU/OK button again.
15
1
Before You Begin
A Crop factor .....................................................193
B Location data download status..............310
C Focus check ............................................ 94, 156
D Depth-of-field preview...........................79, 93
E Image transfer status ........................249, 264
F Movie compression .....................................191
G Digital teleconverter ...................................175
H Bluetooth ON/OFF
I Bluetooth host ..............................................249
J Movie mode ........................................... 62, 188
K High-speed recording indicator ..............189
L Focus frame ............................................ 87, 101
M Recording time available/
Choosing a Display Mode
Press the VIEW MODE button to cycle
through the following display modes.
You can choose separate display modes
for shooting and playback.
1
Before You Begin
N Use D SCREEN SET-UP > VIEW MODE SETTING in the setup menu to
choose a display mode for the EVF and LCD monitor.
SHOOTING
Option
Description
Putting your eye to the viewfinder turns the viewfinder
on and the LCD monitor off ; taking your eye away turns
E EYE SENSOR
the viewfinder off and LCD monitor on.
LCD ONLY
LCD monitor on, viewfinder off.
EVF ONLY
Viewfinder on, LCD monitor off.
Putting your eye to the viewfinder turns the viewfinder
on; taking it away turns the viewfinder off. The LCD
EVF ONLY + E
monitor remains off.
Putting your eye to the viewfinder during shooting
turns the viewfinder on, but the LCD monitor is used for
E EYE SENSOR + LCD the display of images once you remove your eye from
the viewfinder after shooting. The options selected for
IMAGE DISP.
D SCREEN SET-UP > IMAGE DISP. apply to display
in the LCD monitor.
N Go to D SCREEN SET-UP > VIEW MODE SETTING in the setup menu
and press the Q button to choose the view modes available.
16
Camera Displays
PLAYBACK
Option
E EYE SENSOR
LCD ONLY
EVF ONLY
Description
Putting your eye to the viewfinder turns the viewfinder
on and the LCD monitor off ; taking your eye away turns
the viewfinder off and LCD monitor on.
LCD monitor on, viewfinder off.
Viewfinder on, LCD monitor off.
1
Before You Begin
The Eye Sensor
The eye sensor may respond to objects other
than your eye or to light shining directly on the
sensor.
Eye sensor
17
Adjusting Display Brightness
The brightness and saturation of the viewfinder and LCD monitor
can be adjusted using the items in the D SCREEN SET-UP menu.
Choose EVF BRIGHTNESS or EVF COLOR to adjust viewfinder
brightness or saturation, LCD BRIGHTNESS or LCD COLOR to do
the same for the LCD monitor.
1
Before You Begin
Display Rotation
When ON is selected for D SCREEN SET-UP > AUTOROTATE
DISPLAYS, the indicators in the viewfinder and LCD monitor automatically rotate to match camera orientation.
18
Camera Displays
The DISP/BACK Button
The DISP/BACK button controls the display
of indicators in the viewfinder and LCD
monitor.
N Indicators for the EVF and LCD must be
selected separately. To choose the EVF display, place your eye to the viewfinder while
using the DISP/BACK button.
1
Before You Begin
Viewfinder
Full screen
Standard indicators
Dual display
(manual focus mode only)
19
LCD Monitor
Standard indicators
1
No indicators
12800
Before You Begin
12800
Dual display
(manual focus mode only)
Info display
The Dual Display
The dual display consists of a large full-frame window and a
smaller close-up of the focus area.
20
Camera Displays
Customizing the Standard Display
To choose the items shown in the standard indicator display:
Display standard indicators.
Use the DISP/BACK button to display standard indicators.
2
Select DISP. CUSTOM SETTING.
Select D SCREEN SET-UP > DISP. CUSTOM SETTING in the
setup menu.
3
Choose items.
Highlight items and press MENU/OK to select or deselect.
Item
FRAMING GUIDELINE
FOCUS FRAME
FOCUS INDICATOR
AF DISTANCE INDICATOR
MF DISTANCE INDICATOR
HISTOGRAM
LIVE VIEW HIGHLIGHT ALERT
SHOOTING MODE
APERTURE/S-SPEED/ISO
INFORMATION BACKGROUND
Expo. Comp. (Digit)
Expo. Comp. (Scale)
FOCUS MODE
PHOTOMETRY
SHUTTER TYPE
FLASH
CONTINUOUS MODE
4
5
Default
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Item
DUAL IS MODE
TOUCH SCREEN MODE
WHITE BALANCE
FILM SIMULATION
DYNAMIC RANGE
BOOST MODE
FRAMES REMAINING
IMAGE SIZE/QUALITY
MOVIE MODE & REC. TIME
DIGITAL TELE-CONV.
COMMUNICATION STATUS
MIC LEVEL
GUIDANCE MESSAGE
NO MEMORY CARD WARNING
DATE/TIME
BATTERY LEVEL
FRAMING OUTLINE
Default
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Press DISP/BACK to save changes.
Press DISP/BACK as needed to exit the menus and return to the
shooting display.
21
1
Before You Begin
1
Framing Outline
Enable FRAMING OUTLINE to make the borders of the frame easier to see
against dark backgrounds.
Histograms
Histograms show the distribution of tones in the image. Brightness is
shown by the horizontal axis, the number of pixels by the vertical axis.
1
Number of pixels
Before You Begin
Shadows
Highlights
Pixel brightness
• Optimal exposure: Pixels are distributed in an even curve
throughout the tone range.
• Overexposed: Pixels are clustered on the right side of
the graph.
• Underexposed: Pixels are clustered on the left side of
the graph.
To view separate RGB histograms and a display showing areas of the frame that will be
overexposed at current settings superimposed
on the view through the lens, press the function button to which HISTOGRAM is assigned
(P 295, 321).
A Overexposed areas blink
B RGB histograms
22
A
B
Camera Displays
Virtual Horizon
Check whether the camera is level. The display type can be chosen using D SCREEN SET-UP > ELECTRONIC LEVEL SETTING.
Use the virtual horizon to level the camera when mounting it on
a tripod or the like.
2D
3D
1
Roll
• OFF: The virtual horizon is not displayed.
• 2D: A white line shows the amount the camera is tilted
left or right. The line turns green when the camera is level.
The line may vanish if the camera is tilted forward or back.
• 3D: The display shows whether the camera is tilted left or
right and forward or back.
N ELECTRONIC LEVEL SWITCH can be assigned to a function button
and the button then used to switch between the 2D and 3D displays.
23
Before You Begin
Pitch
Using the Menus
To display the menus, press MENU/OK.
1
Before You Begin
The Menus
Different menus are displayed during still photography, movie
recording, and playback.
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING
IMAGE SIZE
IMAGE QUALITY
RAW RECORDING
SELECT JPEG/HEIF
FILM SIMULATION
MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
GRAIN EFFECT
COLOR CHROME EFFECT
EXIT
Shooting
STILL/MOVIE mode dial
rotated to STILL
MOVIE SETTING
MOVIE SETTING LIST
MOVIE MODE
HIGH SPEED REC
FSELF-TIMER
MEDIA REC SETTING
HDMI OUTPUT SETTING
FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION
F-Log/HLG RECORDING
EXIT
STILL/MOVIE mode dial
rotated to MOVIE
PLAY BACK MENU
SWITCH SLOT
RAW CONVERSION
HEIF TO JPEG/TIFF CONVERSION
ERASE
SIMULTANEOUS DELETE
CROP
RESIZE
PROTECT
Playback
EXIT
During playback
24
Using the Menus
Selecting a Menu Tab
To navigate the menus:
1
Press MENU/OK to display the menus.
1
Before You Begin
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING
IMAGE SIZE
IMAGE QUALITY
RAW RECORDING
SELECT JPEG/HEIF
FILM SIMULATION
MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
GRAIN EFFECT
COLOR CHROME EFFECT
EXIT
2
Press the selector left to highlight the
tab for the current menu.
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING
IMAGE SIZE
IMAGE QUALITY
RAW RECORDING
SELECT JPEG/HEIF
FILM SIMULATION
MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
GRAIN EFFECT
COLOR CHROME EFFECT
EXIT
Tab
3
Press the selector up or down to highlight the tab containing
the desired item.
4
Press the selector right to place the cursor in the menu.
N Use the front command dial to select menu tabs or page through
menus and the rear command dial to highlight menu items.
25
Touch Screen Mode
The LCD monitor also functions as a touch screen.
1
Before You Begin
Shooting Touch Controls
To enable touch controls, select ON for
D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCH
SCREEN SETTING > x TOUCH SCREEN
SETTING.
TOUCH SCREEN SETTINGS
TOUCH SCREEN SETTING
DOUBLE TAP SETTING
ON
TOUCH FUNCTION
OFF
TOUCH ZOOM
TOUCH SCREEN SETTING
EVF TOUCH SCREEN AREA SETTINGS
EVF
The LCD monitor can be used to select the focus area while pictures are being framed in the electronic viewfinder (EVF). Use
D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCH SCREEN SETTING > EVF
TOUCH SCREEN AREA SETTINGS to choose the area of the monitor employed for touch controls.
N • When FACE DETECTION ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING >
g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING, you can choose the face used
for focus.
• You can choose the type of subject on which the camera preferentially focuses when SUBJECT DETECTION ON is selected for G AF/MF
SETTING > SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING.
26
Touch Screen Mode
LCD Monitor
The operation performed can be selected
by tapping the touch screen mode indicator in the display. Touch controls can be
used for the following operations:
Mode
1
Description
• In focus mode S (AF-S), the camera focuses when you tap your
AF
AF OFF
subject in the display. Focus locks at the current distance until
you tap the AF OFF icon.
• In focus mode C (AF-C), the camera initiates focus when you
tap your subject display. The camera will continue to adjust
focus for changes in the distance to the subject until you tap
the AF OFF icon.
• In manual focus mode (MF), you can tap the display to focus
on the selected subject using autofocus.
AREA
Tap to select a point for focus or zoom. The focus frame will
move to the selected point.
OFF
Touch screen mode off.
O • The behavior of the touch screen varies with the AF mode.
• Different touch controls are used during focus zoom (P 161).
27
Before You Begin
Tap your subject in the display to focus and release the shutter.
TOUCH
In burst mode, pictures will be taken while you keep your finger
SHOOTING
on the display.
N • To disable touch controls and hide the touch screen mode indica-
tor, select OFF for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCH SCREEN
SETTING > x TOUCH SCREEN SETTING.
• Touch control settings can be adjusted using G AF/MF SETTING >
TOUCH SCREEN MODE. For information on the touch controls
available during movie recording, see “Movie Recording (F TOUCH
SCREEN MODE; P 210)”.
1
Before You Begin
MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL
Selecting ON for B MOVIE SETTING >
MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL or
tapping the movie-optimized mode button in the shooting display optimizes the
command dials and touch controls for
movie recording. This can be used to prevent camera sounds being recorded with
movie footage.
• SHUTTER SPEED
• APERTURE
• EXPOSURE COMPENSATION
• ISO
• INTERNAL MIC LEVEL
ADJUSTMENT/EXTERNAL MIC
LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
Movie-optimized
mode button
• WIND FILTER
• HEADPHONES VOLUME
• F FILM SIMULATION
• F WHITE BALANCE
• F IS MODE
• F IS MODE BOOST
N • Enabling movie-optimized controls disables the aperture ring and
the shutter-speed, sensitivity, and exposure compensation dials.
• When movie-optimized control is enabled, the movie-optimized
mode button can be used to change shooting settings or disable
movie-optimized control.
28
Touch Screen Mode
Touch Function
Functions can be assigned to the following flick gestures in much the same way
as function buttons (P 321):
• Flick up: T-Fn1
• Flick left: T-Fn2
• Flick right: T-Fn3
• Flick down: T-Fn4
INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
L
tures display a menu; tap to select the
desired option.
R
0
-6
-12
-20
-40
-50
dB
SET
CANCEL
• Touch-function
gestures are disabled by default. To enable
touch-function gestures, select ON for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING >
TOUCH SCREEN SETTING > c TOUCH FUNCTION.
29
Before You Begin
N • In some cases, touch-function flick ges-
1
Touch Zoom
If the lens supports touch zoom, you can
zoom in and out by touching the display.
Tap the touch zoom button in the display
to enable touch zoom.
1
Before You Begin
Touch zoom is controlled using the buttons in the display.
Button
Touch zoom
Zoom in
Zoom out
Description
Enable touch zoom.
Zoom in or out. Touch and hold to zoom in or out at a constant
speed.
Rocker switch
The camera zooms in or out at a speed corresponding to the
position of the rocker switch.
Disable
Disable touch zoom.
N The rate at which the camera zooms in and out in response to the T
and W buttons can be selected using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING >
LENS ZOOM/FOCUS SETTING > CONSTANT SPEED ZOOM (Fn).
30
Touch Screen Mode
Playback Touch Controls
When ON is selected for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCH
SCREEN SETTING > a TOUCH SCREEN SETTING, touch controls
can be used for the following playback operations:
• Swipe: Swipe a finger across the display to
view other images.
1
Before You Begin
• Pinch-out: Place two fingers on the display
and spread them apart to zoom in.
• Pinch-in: Place two fingers on the display
and slide them together to zoom out.
N Pictures can be zoomed out until the entire image is visible but no
further.
• Double-tap: Tap the display twice to zoom in
on the focus point.
• Drag: View other areas of the image during
playback zoom.
31
MEMO
32
First Steps
33
Attaching the Strap
Attach the strap.
Attach the strap to the two strap clips as shown below.
2
First Steps
O To avoid dropping the camera, be sure the strap is correctly secured.
34
Attaching a Lens
The camera can be used with lenses for the FUJIFILM
X-mount.
Remove the body cap from the camera
and the rear cap from the lens. Place the
lens on mount, keeping the marks on the
lens and camera aligned (A), and then
rotate the lens until it clicks into place
(B).
2
Removing Lenses
To remove the lens, turn the camera off, then
press the lens release button (A) and rotate
the lens as shown (B).
O To prevent dust accumulating on the lens
or inside the camera, replace the lens caps
and camera body cap when the lens is not
attached.
Lenses and Other Optional Accessories
The camera can be used with lenses and accessories for the FUJIFILM
X-mount.
O Observe the following precautions when attaching or removing (exchanging) lenses.
• Check that the lenses are free of dust and other foreign matter.
• Do not change lenses in direct sunlight or under another bright light
source. Light focused into the interior of the camera could cause it to
malfunction.
• Attach the lens caps before exchanging lenses.
• See the manual provided with the lens for information on use.
35
First Steps
O • When attaching lenses, ensure that dust or other foreign matter does
not enter the camera.
• Be careful not to touch the camera’s internal parts.
• Rotate the lens until it clicks securely into place.
• Do not press the lens release button while attaching the lens.
Inserting the Battery
Insert the battery in the camera as described below.
1
Open the battery-chamber cover.
Slide the battery-chamber cover
latch as shown and open the battery-chamber cover.
O • Do
not open the battery-chamber
cover when the camera is on. Failure to observe this precaution could
damage image files or memory
cards.
• Do not use excessive force when
handling the battery-chamber cover.
2
First Steps
2
Insert the battery as shown.
O • Insert the battery in the orientation
shown. Do not use force or attempt
to insert the battery upside down or
backwards.
• Confirm that the battery is securely
latched.
36
Inserting the Battery
3
Close the battery-chamber cover.
Close and latch the cover.
O If the cover does not close, check that
the battery is in the correct orientation. Do not attempt to force the cover shut.
O The battery may become hot when used in high-temperature environments. Observe caution when removing the battery.
37
2
First Steps
Removing the Battery
Before removing the battery, turn the camera off and open the battery-chamber cover.
To remove the battery, press the battery latch
to the side, and slide the battery out of the
camera as shown.
Inserting Memory Cards
Pictures are stored on memory cards (sold separately).
N The camera can be used with two cards, one in each of its two slots.
1
Open the memory card slot cover.
Unlatch and open the cover.
2
First Steps
O Do not turn the camera off or remove the memory card while the
memory card is being formatted or data are being recorded to or deleted from the card. Failure to observe this precaution could damage the card.
2
Insert the memory card.
Holding the card in the orientation
shown, slide it in until it clicks into
place at the back of the slot. Close
and latch the memory card slot cover.
O Be sure card is in the correct orientation; do not insert at an angle
or use force.
38
Inserting Memory Cards
Removing Memory Cards
Turn the camera off and open the memory card
slot cover. Eject the card by pressing it in with a
finger and then slowly releasing it; the card can
then be removed by hand.
O • Press the center of the card.
• Suddenly removing your finger from the card could cause the card to
fall from the slot. Remove your finger slowly.
touch. Wait for the card to cool before removing it.
39
2
First Steps
• If the camera displays a p icon, the memory card may be hot to the
Using Two Cards
The camera can be used with two cards, one in each of its two
slots. At default settings, photos are saved to the card in the second slot only when the card in the first slot is full. This can be
changed using D SAVE DATA SET-UP > x CARD SLOT SETTING.
Option
2
First Steps
Description
The card in the second slot is used only when the card in
the first slot is full. If the second slot is selected for D SAVE
SEQUENTIAL DATA SET-UP > SELECT SLOT(xSEQUENTIAL),
(default) recording will start on the card in the second slot and
switch to the first slot when the card in the second slot
is full.
BACKUP
Display
Each picture is recorded twice, once to each card.
RAW pictures are recorded to the card in the first slot
and JPEG or HEIF pictures to the card in the second slot. RAW+JPEG
SEPARATE This setting takes effect only when FINE + RAW or
NORMAL + RAW is selected for H IMAGE QUALITY
SETTING > IMAGE QUALITY.
RAW+HEIF
The card used to store movies can be selected using B MOVIE
SETTING > MEDIA REC SETTING.
40
Inserting Memory Cards
Compatible Memory Cards
• The camera can be used with SD, SDHC, and SDXC memory
cards. Both the UHS-I and UHS-II bus interfaces are supported.
• UHS-II cards are recommended for high-speed burst photography.
• The types of memory cards suitable for movie recording vary
with the settings selected (P 68).
• A list of supported memory cards is available on the Fujifilm
website. For details, visit:
https://fujifilm-x.com/support/compatibility/cameras/.
ry card is being formatted or data are being recorded to or deleted from
the card. Failure to observe this precaution could damage the card.
• Memory cards can be locked, making it
impossible to format the card or to record
or delete images. Before inserting a memory card, slide the write-protect switch to
the unlocked position.
• Memory cards are small and can be swallowed; keep out of reach of
children. If a child swallows a memory card, seek medical assistance
immediately.
• miniSD or microSD adapters that are larger or smaller than memory
cards may not eject normally; if the card does not eject, take the camera to an authorized service representative. Do not forcibly remove
the card.
• Do not affix labels or other objects to memory cards. Peeling labels
can cause camera malfunction.
• Movie recording may be interrupted with some types of memory card.
• Formatting a memory card in the camera creates a folder in which
pictures are stored. Do not rename or delete this folder or use a computer or other device to edit, delete, or rename image files. Always
use the camera to delete pictures; before editing or renaming files,
copy them to a computer and edit or rename the copies, not the
originals. Renaming the files on the camera can cause problems
during playback.
41
2
First Steps
O • Do not turn the camera off or remove the memory card while the memo-
Charging the Battery
For reasons of safety, the battery is not charged at shipment. The camera will not function if the battery is not
charged; be sure to charge the battery before use. Before
charging the battery, turn the camera off.
O • An NP-W235 rechargeable battery is supplied with the camera.
• Charging takes about 180 minutes.
2
1
First Steps
Attach the plug adapter to the AC power adapter.
Attach the plug adapter as shown, making
sure that it is fully inserted and clicks into
place on the AC power adapter terminals.
O • The supplied plug adapter is for use exclu-
sively with the AC-5VJ AC power adapter.
Do not use it with other devices.
• The shape of the plug adapter varies with
the country of sale.
2
Charge the battery.
Connect the camera to the supplied AC power adapter using
the supplied USB cable. Then plug the AC power adapter into
an indoor power outlet.
O • Connect the cable to the camera’s USB connector (Type-C).
• Be sure the connectors are fully inserted.
42
Charging the Battery
Charge Status
The indicator lamp shows battery charge status
as follows:
Indicator lamp
Battery status
On
Battery charging
Off
Charging complete
Blinks
Charging error
2
First Steps
43
O • The supplied AC power adapter is compatible with power supplies of
100 to 240 V (a plug adapter may be needed for overseas use).
• Do not use the AC power adapter or USB cable with other devices, as
this could cause malfunction.
• Do not affix labels or other objects to the battery. Failure to observe
this precaution could make it impossible to remove the battery from
the camera.
• Do not short the battery terminals. The battery could overheat.
• Read the cautions in “The Battery and Power Supply”.
• Use only genuine Fujifilm rechargeable batteries designated for use
in this camera. Failure to observe this precaution could result in product malfunction.
• Do not remove the labels from the battery or attempt to split or peel
the outer casing.
• The battery gradually loses its charge when not in use. Charge the
battery one or two days before use.
• If the battery fails to hold a charge, it has reached the end of its
charging life and must be replaced.
• Unplug the AC power adapter from the power outlet when it is not
in use.
• If the battery is left for long periods without charging, you may find
that its quality degrades or that it no longer holds a charge. Charge
the battery regularly.
• Remove dirt from the battery terminals with a clean, dry cloth. Failure
to observe this precaution could prevent the battery from charging.
• Note that charging times increase at low or high temperatures.
• Selecting ON for Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING > Bluetooth
ON/OFF in the network/USB settings menu increases the drain on
the battery.
2
First Steps
N • If the camera is turned on during charging,
charging will end and the USB connection
will instead be used to power the camera.
The battery level will begin to gradually
decline (P 270).
• The camera will display a “power supply” icon when powered via USB.
44
Charging the Battery
Charging via Computer
The camera can be charged via USB. USB charging is available with computers with a manufacturer-approved operating system and USB interface.
2
First Steps
Leave the computer on during charging.
The
battery
will not charge while the camera is on.
O•
• Connect the supplied USB cable.
• Connect the camera directly to the computer; do not use a USB hub
or keyboard.
• Charging stops if the computer enters sleep mode. To resume
charging, activate the computer and disconnect and reconnect the
USB cable.
• Charging may not be supported depending on the model of computer, computer settings, and the computer’s current state.
• The battery takes about 600 minutes to charge with a charging input
of 5 V/500 mA.
45
Turning the Camera On and Off
Use the ON/OFF switch to turn the camera on and off.
Slide the switch to ON to turn the camera
on, or to OFF to turn the camera off.
2
O Fingerprints and other marks on the lens or viewfinder can affect pic-
First Steps
tures or the view through the viewfinder. Keep the lens and viewfinder
clean.
N • Pressing the a button during shooting starts playback.
• Press the shutter button halfway to return to shooting mode.
• The camera will turn off automatically if no operations are performed
for the length of time selected for D POWER MANAGEMENT >
AUTO POWER OFF. To reactivate the camera after it has turned off
automatically, press the shutter button halfway or turn the ON/OFF
switch to OFF and then back to ON.
46
Checking the Battery Level
After turning the camera on, check the battery level in the
display.
Battery level is shown as follows:
2
Description
Battery partially discharged.
Battery about 80% full.
Battery about 60% full.
Battery about 40% full.
Battery about 20% full.
First Steps
Indicator
e
f
g
h
i
i
(red)
j
(blinks red)
Low battery. Charge as soon as possible.
Battery exhausted. Turn camera off and recharge battery.
47
Basic Setup
When you turn the camera on for the first time, you can
choose a language and set the camera clock. Follow the
steps below when turning the camera on for the first time.
1
Turn the camera on.
A language-selection dialog will be
displayed.
2
Choose a language.
Highlight a language and press
MENU/OK.
3
Choose a time zone.
When prompted, choose a time zone
and turn daylight savings time on or
off using the selector, then highlight
SET and press MENU/OK.
2
First Steps
AREA SETTING
BERLIN/PARIS
AREA SETTING
DAYLIGHT SAVINGS
SET
GMT ±0:00
OFF
NO
N To skip this step, press DISP/BACK.
48
Basic Setup
4
Set the clock.
DATE/TIME
GMT +1:00 BERLIN/PARIS
2022 . 12 . 31 12 00 AM 12h
SET
5
2
First Steps
View information on the smartphone app.
APPLICATION
• The camera will display a QR code
you can scan with your smartphone
IMAGES CAN BE EASILY TRANSFERRED
TO THE SMARTPHONE.
to open a website where you can
download the smartphone app.
• Press MENU/OK to exit to the shooting display.
NO
SCAN QR CODE TO ACQUIRE THE APP.
SET
N Use the smartphone app to download pictures from the camera
or control the camera remotely (P 249).
6
Format the memory card (P 272).
O Format memory cards before first use, and be sure to reformat all
memory cards after using them in a computer or other device.
N If the battery is removed for an extended period, the camera clock will
be reset and the language-selection dialog will be displayed when the
camera is turned on.
49
Basic Setup
Choosing a Different Language
To change the language:
2
1
Display language options.
Select D USER SETTING > Qa.
2
Choose a language.
Highlight the desired option and press MENU/OK.
Changing the Time and Date
To set the camera clock:
First Steps
1
Display DATE/TIME options.
Select D USER SETTING > DATE/TIME.
2
Set the clock.
Press the selector left or right to highlight the year, month,
day, hour, or minute and press up or down to change. Press
MENU/OK to set the clock.
50
Basic Photography and
Playback
51
Taking Photographs (Mode P)
This section describes how to take pictures using program
AE (mode P). See pages 72–81 for information on S, A,
and M modes.
1
Rotate the STILL/MOVIE mode dial to
STILL.
3
2
Slide the lens aperture mode switch
to A.
Basic Photography and Playback
3
Rotate the shutter speed dial to A.
O To use the shutter speed dial, press the
dial lock release and rotate the dial to
the desired setting.
P will appear in the display.
52
Taking Photographs (Mode P)
4
Rotate the drive dial to S.
5
Rotate the sensitivity dial to A.
3
Basic Photography and Playback
6
Rotate the focus mode selector to S.
53
7
Ready the camera.
• Hold the camera steady with both
hands and brace your elbows
against your sides. Shaking or unsteady hands can blur your shots.
• To prevent pictures that are out of
focus or too dark (underexposed),
keep your fingers and other objects
away from the lens and AF-assist
illuminator.
3
Basic Photography and Playback
8
Frame the picture.
Lenses with Zoom Rings
Use the zoom ring to frame the picture in
the display. Rotate the ring left to zoom
out, right to zoom in.
A
54
Taking Photographs (Mode P)
9
Focus.
Press the shutter button halfway to
set focus and exposure.
Focus indicator
Focus frame
• If the camera is able to focus, the focus frame and focus indicator
will glow green.
• If the camera is unable to focus, the focus frame will turn red, s
will be displayed, and the focus indicator will blink white.
pressed halfway. Focus and exposure remain locked while the
button is kept in this position (AF/AE lock).
• The camera will focus on subjects at any distance in the macro
and standard focus ranges for the lens.
10
Shoot.
Smoothly press the shutter button the rest of the way down
to take the picture.
55
Basic Photography and Playback
N • If the subject is poorly lit, the AF-assist illuminator may light to
assist the focus operation.
• Focus and exposure will lock when the shutter button is
3
Viewing Pictures
Pictures can be viewed in the viewfinder or LCD monitor.
To view pictures full frame, press a.
100-0001
3
Basic Photography and Playback
Additional pictures can be viewed by pressing the selector left
or right or rotating the front command dial. Press the selector or
rotate the dial right to view pictures in the order recorded, left to
view pictures in reverse order. Keep the selector pressed to scroll
rapidly to the desired frame.
N Pictures taken using other cameras are marked with a m (“gift image”)
icon to warn that they may not display correctly and that playback
zoom may not be available.
Two Memory Cards
If two memory cards are inserted, you can press and hold the a button
to choose a card for playback. You can also select a card using the C PLAY
BACK MENU > SWITCH SLOT option.
56
Viewing Pictures
HDMI Output
Camera shooting and playback displays can be output to HDMI
devices.
Connecting to HDMI Devices
Connect the camera to TVs or other HDMI devices using a
third-party HDMI cable.
1
2
Turn the camera off.
Connect the cable as shown below.
3
Basic Photography and Playback
Insert into
HDMI connector
Insert into HDMI Micro
connector (Type D)
3
Configure the device for HDMI input as described in the documentation supplied with the device.
4
Turn the camera on. The contents of the camera display will
be shown on the HDMI device. The camera display turns off
in playback mode (P 58).
O • Making sure the connectors are fully inserted.
• Use an HDMI cable no more than 1.5 m (4.9 ft.) long.
57
Viewing Pictures
Shooting
Display live view or movie footage on a TV or save it to an external recorder that supports HDMI input.
Playback
To start playback, press the camera a button. The camera monitor turns off and pictures and movies are output to the HDMI
device. Note that the camera volume controls have no effect on
sounds played on the TV; use the television volume controls to
adjust the volume.
3
N Some televisions may briefly display a black screen when movie playback begins.
Basic Photography and Playback
58
Deleting Pictures
Use the b button to delete pictures.
O Deleted pictures cannot be recovered. Protect important pictures or
copy them to a computer or other storage device before proceeding.
1
With a picture displayed full frame, press the b button and
select FRAME.
ERASE
FRAME
SELECTED FRAMES
ALL FRAMES
3
Press the selector left or right to scroll through pictures and
press MENU/OK to delete (a confirmation dialog is not displayed). Repeat to delete additional pictures.
N • Protected pictures cannot be deleted. Remove protection from any
pictures you wish to delete (P 234).
• Pictures can also be deleted from the menus using the C PLAY BACK
MENU > ERASE option (P 230).
59
Basic Photography and Playback
2
MEMO
60
Movie Recording and
Playback
61
Recording Movies
Record movies with sound.
Recording Movies
Movies can be recorded by pressing the shutter button when the
STILL/MOVIE mode dial is rotated to MOVIE or by pressing a function
button to which MOVIE RECORDING RELEASE is assigned.
The STILL/MOVIE Mode Dial (MOVIE)
For access to a full range of camera settings when filming movies,
rotate the STILL/MOVIE mode dial to MOVIE and record movies by
pressing the shutter button.
4
1
Movie Recording and Playback
Rotate the STILL/MOVIE mode dial to
MOVIE.
2
Slide the lens aperture mode switch
to A.
62
Recording Movies
3
Rotate the shutter speed dial to A.
AUTO will appear in the display.
Rotate the sensitivity dial to A.
5
Rotate the focus mode selector to C.
4
Movie Recording and Playback
4
O To use the shutter speed and sensitivity dials, press the dial lock
release and rotate the dial to the desired setting.
N These settings can also be adjusted using touch controls (P 28).
63
6
Press the shutter button all the way
down.
Recording will start.
• A recording indicator (V) is displayed while recording is in progress.
• The borders of the display turn Recording time
red during movie recording, green
Time remaining
during high-speed recording.
• The time remaining is shown by a countdown display, while
another display counts up to show the recording time.
7
Press the button again to end recording. Recording ends
automatically when the maximum length is reached or the
memory card is full.
4
Movie Recording and Playback
64
Recording Movies
Using a Function Button (MOVIE RECORDING RELEASE)
Use the function button to which MOVIE RECORDING RELEASE
is assigned to quickly and easily record movies while in still photography mode.
camera automatically selects focus mode C (AF-C); exposure is
N The
adjusted automatically.
1
2
Time remaining
• The time remaining is shown by a countdown display, while
another display counts up to show the recording time.
3
Press the button again to end recording. Recording ends
automatically when the maximum length is reached or the
memory card is full.
65
4
Movie Recording and Playback
Assign MOVIE RECORDING RELEASE to a function button
(P 321).
Press the selected button to start recording.
• A recording indicator (V) is displayed while recording is in progress.
• The borders of the display turn
red during movie recording, green Recording time
during high-speed recording.
O • Sound is recorded via the built-in microphone or an optional external
microphone. Do not cover the microphone during recording.
• Note that the microphone may pick up lens noise and other sounds
made by the camera during recording.
• Vertical or horizontal streaks may appear in movies containing very
bright subjects. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction.
N • To monitor audio with headphones during recording, you will need
to convert the USB connector to an audio jack using the supplied
headphone adapter.
• The indicator lamp lights while recording is in progress (the B MOVIE
SETTING > TALLY LIGHT option can be used to choose the lamp—
indicator or AF-assist—that lights during movie recording and
whether the lamp blinks or remains steady). During recording, you
can change exposure compensation by up to ±2 EV and adjust zoom
using the zoom ring on the lens (if available).
• To prevent the borders of the display changing color during movie recording, select OFF for B MOVIE SETTING > F REC FRAME
INDICATOR.
• While recording is in progress, you can:
- Adjust sensitivity
- Refocus using any of the following methods:
• Press the shutter button halfway
• Press a function button to which AF-ON is assigned
• Use touch screen controls
- Display a histogram or artificial horizon by pressing the button to
which HISTOGRAM or ELECTRONIC LEVEL SWITCH has been assigned
• Recording may be unavailable at some settings, while in other cases
settings may not apply during recording.
• To choose the focus area for movie recording, select G AF/MF
SETTING > FOCUS AREA and use the focus stick (focus lever) and
rear command dial (P 87).
4
Movie Recording and Playback
66
Recording Movies
Temperature Warnings
The camera automatically turns off to protect itself when its temperature or
the temperature of the battery rises. If a temperature warning is displayed,
image noise may increase. Turn the camera off and wait for it to cool before
turning it on again.
Using an External Microphone
Sound can be recorded with external microphones that connect using jacks 3.5 mm in
diameter; microphones that require plug-in
power cannot be used. See the microphone
manual for details.
XLR Microphone Adapters
The camera can be used with TEAC TASCAM CA-XLR2d-F XLR microphone
adapters. For more information, visit the TASCAM website.
https://tascam.jp/int/product/ca-xlr2d/#CA-XLR2d_Website
4
Movie Recording and Playback
67
Recording Movies
4
Movie Recording and Playback
Adjusting Movie Settings
Movie settings can be adjusted from the movie menus or using
the B MOVIE SETTING item in the photo menus (P 24).
• Use the B MOVIE SETTING item in the photo menus to quickly
adjust settings when recording movies via a button to which
MOVIE RECORDING RELEASE has been assigned (P 183).
• The movie menus contain options for use when recording movies via the shutter button with the STILL/MOVIE mode dial rotated
to MOVIE (P 187).
• Settings such as frame rate and frame size can be adjusted using MOVIE MODE.
• Use MEDIA REC SETTING for such tasks as choosing the file
type, bit rate, and the destination card slot.
• Focus mode is selected using the focus mode selector. Regardless of the option selected, the camera will automatically switch
to C when FACE DETECTION ON or SUBJECT DETECTION ON
is chosen for G AF/MF SETTING > g FACE/EYE DETECTION
SETTING or SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING. Note, however, that choosing M when FACE DETECTION ON or SUBJECT
DETECTION ON is selected disables face and subject detection.
O • Changes made using the B MOVIE SETTING item in the photo
menus also apply to the movie menus. Changes made in one set of
menus automatically apply in the other.
• The type of memory card supported varies with the option select for
B MOVIE SETTING > MEDIA REC SETTING.
- Movies with a bit rate of 360 Mbps can be recorded to cards with a
Video Speed Class of V60 or better.
- Movies with a bit rate of 100 or 200 Mbps can be recorded to cards
with a UHS Speed Class of 3 or better.
Depth of Field
To soften backgrounds, set aperture as wide as possible. Aperture can be
adjusted manually at settings other than A.
68
Viewing Movies
View movies on the camera.
In full-frame playback, movies are identified by a W icon. Press the selector down
to start movie playback.
PLAY
AUDIO SET.
The following operations can be performed while a movie is displayed:
4
Full-frame playback
Down
View photo
information
Start playback
Pause playback
Left/right
View other pictures
Adjust speed
Up
Playback
paused (y
(y)
End playback
Start/resume playback
Single frame rewind/
advance
Progress is shown in the display during
playback.
29m59s
O Do not cover the speaker during playback.
STOP
PAUSE
N • Press MENU/OK to pause playback and display volume controls. Press
the selector up or down to adjust the volume; press MENU/OK again
to resume playback. Volume can also be adjusted using D SOUND
SET-UP > PLAYBACK VOLUME.
• To listen to audio with headphones, you will need to convert the USB
connector to an audio jack using the supplied headphone adapter.
• To view movies on a television connected via HDMI instead of in the
camera monitor, press the a button (P 57).
69
Movie Recording and Playback
Selector
Playback in
progress ((x
x)
Viewing Movies
Playback Speed
Press the selector left or right to adjust playback speed during playback. Speed is shown
by the number of arrows (M or N).
Arrows
4
Movie Recording and Playback
70
29m59s
Taking Photographs
71
P, S, A, and M Modes
P, S, A, and M modes give you varying degrees of control
over shutter speed and aperture.
Mode P: Program AE
Let the camera choose shutter speed and aperture for optimal
exposure. Other values that produce the same exposure can be
selected with program shift.
5
Taking Photographs
1
Rotate the STILL/MOVIE mode dial to
STILL.
2
Slide the lens aperture mode switch
to A.
3
Rotate the shutter speed dial to A.
P will appear in the display.
72
P, S, A, and M Modes
O • If the subject is outside the metering range of the camera, the shutter
speed and aperture displays will show “– – –”.
• To use the shutter speed dial, press the dial lock release and rotate the
dial to the desired setting.
• If the lens is not equipped with an aperture ring, select AUTO for
D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > APERTURE SETTING.
Program Shift
If desired, you can rotate the rear command dial
to select other combinations of shutter speed
and aperture without altering exposure (program shift).
Aperture
Shutter speed
O Program shift is not available in any of the following circumstances:
• When TTL is selected for F FLASH SETTING > FLASH FUNCTION
N To cancel program shift, turn the camera off.
73
5
Taking Photographs
SETTING
• When an auto option is selected for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING >
DYNAMIC RANGE
• In movie mode
Mode S: Shutter-Priority AE
Choose a shutter speed and let the camera adjust aperture for
optimal exposure.
5
Rotate the STILL/MOVIE mode dial to
STILL.
2
Slide the lens aperture mode switch
to A.
3
Rotate the shutter speed dial to select a shutter speed.
Taking Photographs
1
S will appear in the display.
74
P, S, A, and M Modes
O • If the correct exposure cannot be achieved at the selected shutter
speed, aperture will be displayed in red.
• If the subject is outside the metering range of the camera, the aperture display will show “– – –”.
• To use the shutter speed dial, press the dial lock release and rotate the
dial to the desired setting.
• If the lens is not equipped with an aperture ring, select AUTO for
D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > APERTURE SETTING.
N • Shutter speed can also be adjusted in increments of 1⁄3 EV by rotating
the rear command dial.
• Shutter speed can be adjusted while the AFON button is pressed or
the shutter button is pressed halfway.
• At shutter speeds slower than 1 second, a count-down timer will be
displayed while the exposure is in progress.
• To reduce “noise” (mottling) in long time-exposures, select ON for
H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > LONG EXPOSURE NR. Note that
this may increase the time needed to record images after shooting.
• The picture will go out of focus if the camera is moved during a long
time-exposure; use of a tripod is recommended.
1
Set shutter speed to T.
75
Taking Photographs
Time (T)
Choose a shutter speed of T (time) for long time-exposures.
Use of a tripod is recommended to prevent the camera moving
during the exposure.
5
2
Rotate the rear command dial to
choose a shutter speed.
3
Press the shutter button all the way down to take a picture
at the selected shutter speed. At speeds of 1 s or slower, a
count-down timer will be displayed while the exposure is in
progress.
N To reduce “noise” (mottling) in long time-exposures, select ON for
H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > LONG EXPOSURE NR. Note that this
may increase the time needed to record images after shooting.
5
Taking Photographs
Bulb (B)
Choose a shutter speed of B (bulb) for long time-exposures in
which you open and close the shutter manually. Use of a tripod
is recommended to prevent the camera moving during the exposure.
1
76
Set shutter speed to B.
P, S, A, and M Modes
2
Press the shutter button all the way down.
• The shutter will remain open for up to 60 minutes while the
shutter button is pressed.
• The display shows the time elapsed since the exposure
started.
• Releasing the shutter button closes the shutter, ending the
exposure. Processing will begin, and the camera will display
the processing time remaining.
O Bulb photography is not available in drive modes other than STILL
IMAGE or when the electronic shutter is selected for A SHOOTING
SETTING > SHUTTER TYPE.
N • Selecting an aperture of A fixes shutter speed at 30 s.
• To reduce “noise” (mottling) in long time-exposures, select ON for
H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > LONG EXPOSURE NR. Note that
this may increase the time needed to record images after shooting.
5
Taking Photographs
Using a Remote Release
A remote release can be used for long time-exposures. When using an optional RR-100 remote release or an electronic release from
third-party suppliers, connect it to the camera’s
remote release connector.
77
Mode A: Aperture-Priority AE
Choose an aperture and let the camera adjust shutter speed for
optimal exposure.
1
Rotate the STILL/MOVIE mode dial to
STILL.
2
Rotate the shutter speed dial to A.
3
Slide the lens aperture mode switch
to Z.
5
Taking Photographs
A will appear in the display.
4
78
Rotate the lens aperture ring to choose an aperture.
P, S, A, and M Modes
O • If the correct exposure cannot be achieved at the selected aperture,
shutter speed will be displayed in red.
• If the subject is outside the metering range of the camera, the shutter
speed display will show “– – –”.
• To use the shutter speed dial, press the dial lock release and rotate the
dial to the desired setting.
• If the lens is not equipped with an aperture ring, select MANUAL for
D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > APERTURE SETTING.
N Aperture can be adjusted even while the shutter button is pressed
halfway.
Previewing Depth of Field
When PREVIEW DEPTH OF FIELD is assigned
to a function button, pressing the button displays a L icon and stops aperture down to the
selected setting, allowing depth of field to be
previewed in the display.
5
Taking Photographs
79
Mode M: Manual Exposure
In manual mode, the user controls both shutter speed and aperture.
Shots can be deliberately overexposed (brighter) or underexposed
(darker), opening the door for a variety of individual creative expression. The amount the picture would be under- or over-exposed
at current settings is shown by the exposure indicator; adjust shutter speed and aperture until the desired exposure is reached.
1
Rotate the STILL/MOVIE mode dial to
STILL.
2
Slide the lens aperture mode switch
to Z.
3
Rotate the shutter speed dial to select a shutter speed other than A.
5
Taking Photographs
M will appear in the display.
80
P, S, A, and M Modes
4
Rotate the shutter speed dial to choose a shutter speed and
the lens aperture ring to choose an aperture.
N The manual exposure display includes an exposure indicator that
shows the amount the picture would be under- or over-exposed
at current settings.
O To use the shutter speed dial, press the dial lock release and rotate the
dial to the desired setting.
N Shutter speed can be adjusted in increments of 1⁄3 EV by rotating the
rear command dial.
Exposure Preview
To preview exposure in the LCD monitor, select PREVIEW EXP./WB for
D SCREEN SET-UP > PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE.
5
or on other occasions on which exposure may change when the picture is taken.
81
Taking Photographs
N Select an option other than PREVIEW EXP./WB when using the flash
Autofocus
Take pictures using autofocus.
1
Rotate the focus mode selector to S
or C (P 83).
2
3
Choose an AF mode (P 85).
4
Take pictures.
Choose the position and size of the
focus frame (P 87).
5
Taking Photographs
82
Autofocus
Focus Mode
Use the focus mode selector to choose
how the camera focuses.
Choose from the following options:
Mode
S
(AF-S)
C
(AF-C)
M
(manual)
Description
Single AF: Focus locks while the shutter button is pressed halfway.
Choose for stationary subjects.
Continuous AF: Focus is continually adjusted to reflect changes in
the distance to the subject while the shutter button is pressed
halfway. Use for subjects that are in motion.
Manual: Focus manually using the lens focus ring. Choose for manual control of focus or in situations in which the camera is unable
to focus using autofocus (P 91).
justed continuously in modes S and C even when the shutter button
is not pressed.
83
Taking Photographs
N • Regardless of the option selected, manual focus will be used when
the lens is in manual focus mode.
• If ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING > PRE-AF, focus will be ad-
5
The Focus Indicator
Focus status is shown by the focus indicator.
Focus indicator
Focus status
( )
Camera focusing.
Subject in focus; focus locked (focus
z (lights green)
mode S).
Subject in focus (focus mode C).
(z) (lights green) Focus is automatically adjusted for Focus indicator
changes in distance to subject.
A (blinks white) Camera unable to focus.
Manual focus (focus mode M).
j
5
Taking Photographs
84
Autofocus
Autofocus Options (AF Mode)
Focus can be adapted to a variety of subjects by changing the
combination of settings selected for focus and AF modes.
1
2
3
Press MENU/OK and go to the shooting menu.
Select G AF/MF SETTING > AF MODE.
Choose an AF mode.
How the camera focuses depends on the focus mode.
Focus Mode S (AF-S)
Option
Description
Sample image
Camera focuses on subject in
selected focus point. Use for pinSINGLE POINT point focus on selected subject.
r
5
z
WIDE
j
ALL
Taking Photographs
y
ZONE
Camera focuses on subject in selected focus zone. Focus zones include multiple focus points, making it easier to focus on subjects in
motion.
Camera focuses automatically on
high-contrast subjects; display
shows areas in focus.
Rotate the rear command dial in the focus-point selection display (P 87, 88) to cycle through AF modes in the following
order: r SINGLE POINT, y ZONE, and z WIDE.
85
Focus Mode C (AF-C)
Option
Description
Sample image
Focus tracks subject at selected focus point. Use for subjects moving
SINGLE POINT toward or away from camera.
r
y
ZONE
z
TRACKING
5
Taking Photographs
j
ALL
86
Camera tracks focus in selected focus zone. Use for subjects that are
moving fairly predictably.
Focus tracks subjects moving
through wide area of frame.
Rotate the rear command dial in the focus-point selection display (P 87, 88) to cycle through AF modes in the following
order: r SINGLE POINT, y ZONE, and z TRACKING.
Autofocus
Focus-Point Selection
Choose a focus point for autofocus.
Viewing the Focus-Point Display
1
2
3
Press MENU/OK and go to the shooting menu.
Select G AF/MF SETTING > FOCUS AREA to view the focus-point display.
Use the focus stick (focus lever) and rear command dial to
choose a focus area.
N The focus point can also be selected using touch controls (P 26).
Selecting a Focus Point
Use the focus stick (focus lever) to choose
the focus point and the rear command
dial to choose the size of the focus frame.
The procedure varies with the option selected for AF mode.
Taking Photographs
Focus stick
5
Rear command dial
AF mode
Tilt
Press
Select focus
point
Select center
focus point
r
y
z
Rotate
Press
Choose from 6
frame sizes Restore original
size
Choose from 3
frame sizes
—
87
N • Manual focus-point selection is not available when z WIDE/TRACKING
is selected in focus mode S.
• If j ALL is selected for AF mode, you can rotate the rear command
dial in the focus-point selection display to cycle through AF modes
in the following order: r SINGLE POINT (6 frame sizes), y ZONE
(3 frame sizes), and either z WIDE (focus mode S) or z TRACKING
(focus mode C).
The Focus-Point Display
The focus-point display varies with the option selected for AF
mode.
N Focus frames are shown by small squares (), focus zones by the large
squares.
r SINGLE POINT
AF mode
y ZONE
z WIDE/TRACKING
5
Taking Photographs
Number of
able can be
G AF/MF
NUMBER
POINTS.
88
points avail- Choose from zones with Position focus frame over
selected using 7 × 7, 5 × 5, or 3 × 3 focus subject you want to track
SETTING > points.
using continuous AF.
OF FOCUS
Autofocus
Autofocus
Although the camera boasts a high-precision autofocus system, it may be
unable to focus on the subjects listed below.
• Very shiny subjects such as mirrors or car bodies.
• Subjects photographed through a window or other reflective object.
• Dark subjects and subjects that absorb rather than reflect light, such as
hair or fur.
• Insubstantial subjects, such as smoke or flame.
• Subjects that show little contrast with the background.
• Subjects positioned in front of or behind a high-contrast object that is
also in the focus frame (for example, a subject photographed against a
backdrop of highly contrasting elements).
5
Taking Photographs
89
Autofocus
Checking Focus
To zoom in on the current focus area for precise
focus, press the center of the rear command
dial. Use the focus stick (focus lever) to choose
another focus area. Press the center of the rear
command dial again to cancel zoom.
Normal display
Focus zoom
N • In focus mode S, zoom can be adjusted by rotating the rear command
dial.
• The focus stick can be used to select the focus area while zoom is in
effect.
5
Taking Photographs
• In focus mode S, select r SINGLE POINT for AF MODE.
• Focus zoom is not available in focus mode C or when G AF/MF
SETTING > PRE-AF is on.
D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING to
change the function performed by the center of the rear command
dial. You can also assign its default function to other controls (P 321).
• Use
90
Manual Focus
Adjust focus manually.
1
Rotate the focus mode selector to M.
j will appear in the display.
2
Focus manually using the lens focus
ring. Rotate the ring left to reduce
the focus distance, right to increase.
5
Taking Photographs
A
3
Take pictures.
N • Use D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > LENS ZOOM/FOCUS SETTING to
reverse the direction of rotation of the focus ring.
• Regardless of the option selected, manual focus will be used when
the lens is in manual focus mode.
91
Quick Focus
• To use autofocus to focus on the subject in the selected focus area, press
the button to which focus lock or AF-ON has been assigned (the size of
the focus area can be chosen with the rear command dial).
• In manual focus mode, you can use this feature to quickly focus on a chosen subject using either single or continuous AF according to the option
chosen for G AF/MF SETTING > xF INSTANT AF SETTING.
5
Taking Photographs
92
Manual Focus
Checking Focus
A variety of options are available for checking focus in manual
focus mode.
The Manual Focus Indicator
The white line indicates the distance to the subject in the focus area (in meters or feet according to the option selected for
D SCREEN SET-UP > FOCUS SCALE UNITS in the setup menu),
the blue bar the depth of field, or in other words the distance in
front of and behind the subject that appears to be in focus.
Focus distance
(white line)
Depth of field
5
are selected in the D SCREEN SET-UP > DISP. CUSTOM SETTING
list, the manual focus indicator can also be viewed using the depthof-field indicator in the standard display. Use the DISP/BACK button to
display standard indicators.
• Use the G AF/MF SETTING > xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE option
to choose how depth of field is displayed. Choose FILM FORMAT
BASIS to help you make practical assessments of depth of field for
pictures that will be viewed as prints and the like, PIXEL BASIS to
help you assess depth of field for pictures that will be viewed at high
resolutions on computers or other electronic displays.
93
Taking Photographs
N • If both AF DISTANCE INDICATOR and MF DISTANCE INDICATOR
Focus Zoom
If ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING > FOCUS CHECK, the
camera will automatically zoom in on the selected focus area
when the focus ring is rotated. Press the center of the rear command dial to exit zoom.
N • Use the focus stick (focus lever) to choose another focus area.
• Zoom can be adjusted by rotating the rear command dial. Zoom can-
not, however, be adjusted when DIGITAL SPLIT IMAGE or DIGITAL
MICROPRISM is selected for MF assist.
MF Assist
Use G AF/MF SETTING > MF ASSIST (P 156) in the photo
menus or G AF/MF SETTING > F MF ASSIST (P 208) in the
movie menus to choose a focus check option.
5
N The focus check options for movies differ from those for still photography.
Taking Photographs
• DIGITAL SPLIT IMAGE: Displays a split image
in the center of the frame. Frame the
subject in the split-image area and rotate the focus ring until the four parts
of the split image are correctly aligned.
• DIGITAL MICROPRISM: A grid pattern that
emphasizes blur is displayed when the
subject is out of focus, disappearing to
be replaced by a sharp image when the
subject is in focus.
94
Manual Focus
• FOCUS PEAK HIGHLIGHT: Highlights high-con-
trast outlines. Rotate the focus ring until
the subject is highlighted.
• FOCUS METER: A meter is displayed below
the focus point indicating whether focus is in front of or behind the subject.
The needle swings left when focus is in
front of the subject and right when it is
behind the subject. Adjust focus so the
needle is pointing straight up.
N The display reverses when Y CCW is selected for D BUTTON/DIAL
SETTING > LENS ZOOM/FOCUS SETTING > FOCUS RING ROTATE.
5
Taking Photographs
95
Sensitivity
Adjust the camera’s sensitivity to light.
Press the sensitivity dial lock release, rotate the dial to the desired setting, and
press the release again to lock the dial in
place.
Option
A (auto)
5
C (command)
Taking Photographs
125–12800
Description
Sensitivity is automatically adjusted in response to shooting
conditions according to option chosen for A SHOOTING
SETTING > ISO AUTO SETTING. Choose from AUTO1,
AUTO2, and AUTO3.
Rotate the front command dial to choose from AUTO1,
AUTO2, AUTO3, and values of from 64 to 51200. This range
includes “extended” values of 64 to 100, 25600, and 51200.
Note that “extended” values may reduce dynamic range or
increase mottling.
Adjust sensitivity manually. Selected value is shown in
display.
Adjusting Sensitivity
High values can be used to reduce blur when lighting is poor, while lower
values allow slower shutter speeds or wider apertures in bright light; note,
however, that mottling may appear in pictures taken at high sensitivities.
96
Sensitivity
AUTO
Use A SHOOTING SETTING > ISO AUTO SETTING to choose
the base sensitivity, maximum sensitivity, and minimum shutter speed for the A position on the sensitivity dial. Settings for
AUTO1, AUTO2, and AUTO3 can be stored separately; the defaults are shown below.
Item
Options
DEFAULT SENSITIVITY
125–12800
MAX. SENSITIVITY
400–12800
MIN. SHUTTER SPEED ⁄–30 SEC, AUTO
AUTO1
800
Default
AUTO2
125
3200
AUTO
AUTO3
12800
The camera automatically chooses a sensitivity between the default and maximum values; sensitivity is only raised above the
default value if the shutter speed required for optimal exposure
would be slower than the value selected for MIN. SHUTTER SPEED.
97
5
Taking Photographs
N • If the value selected for DEFAULT SENSITIVITY is higher than that
selected for MAX. SENSITIVITY, DEFAULT SENSITIVITY will be set to
the value selected for MAX. SENSITIVITY.
• The camera may select shutter speeds slower than MIN. SHUTTER
SPEED if pictures would still be underexposed at the value selected
for MAX. SENSITIVITY.
• If AUTO is selected for MIN. SHUTTER SPEED, the camera will choose
the minimum shutter speed automatically. The minimum shutter
speed is not affected by the option selected for image stabilization.
Metering
Choose how the camera meters exposure.
A SHOOTING SETTING > PHOTOMETRY offers a choice of the
following metering options:
O The selected option will only take effect if OFF is selected for g FACE/
EYE DETECTION SETTING and SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING in the
G AF/MF SETTING menu.
Mode
o
MULTI
p
CENTERWEIGHTED
5
v
Taking Photographs
SPOT
w
AVERAGE
Description
The camera instantly determines exposure based on an analysis of composition, color, and brightness distribution. Recommended in most situations.
The camera meters the entire frame but assigns the greatest
weight to the area at the center.
The camera meters lighting conditions in an area equivalent
to 2% of the frame. Recommended with backlit subjects and
in other cases in which the background is much brighter or
darker than the main subject.
Exposure is set to the average for the entire frame. Provides
consistent exposure across multiple shots with the same lighting, and is particularly effective for landscapes and portraits of
subjects dressed in black or white.
N To meter the subject in the selected focus area, choose ON for G AF/
MF SETTING > INTERLOCK SPOT AE & FOCUS AREA (P 157).
98
Exposure Compensation
Adjust exposure.
Rotate the exposure compensation dial.
O • The amount of compensation available varies with the shooting mode.
• Exposure compensation can be previewed in the shooting display,
although the display may not accurately reflect its effects if:
the exposure compensation amount exceeds ±3 EV,
W 200% or X 400% is selected for DYNAMIC RANGE, or
STRONG or WEAK is selected for D RANGE PRIORITY.
Exposure compensation can still be previewed in the viewfinder or LCD
monitor by pressing the shutter button halfway. In movie mode, the
display may not accurately reflect the effects of exposure compensation during F-log recording or when W 200% or X 400% is selected
for DYNAMIC RANGE. An accurate preview can be obtained by selecting mode M and adjusting exposure directly.
-
Taking Photographs
99
5
Exposure Compensation
C (Custom)
When the exposure compensation dial is
rotated to C, exposure compensation can
be adjusted by rotating the front command dial.
N • The front command dial can be used to set exposure compensation
to values between −5 and +5 EV.
• The function assigned to the front command dial can be selected by
pressing the dial (P 296).
5
Taking Photographs
100
Focus/Exposure Lock
Focus and exposure lock when the shutter button is pressed
halfway.
1
Position the subject in the focus
frame and press the shutter button
halfway to lock focus and exposure.
Focus and exposure will remain
locked while the shutter button is
pressed halfway (AF/AE lock).
2
Press the button all the way down.
N Focus
and exposure lock via the shutter button is only available
when ON is selected for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > SHUTTER AF,
SHUTTER AE.
5
Taking Photographs
101
Focus/Exposure Lock
Other Controls
Focus and exposure can also be locked
using the AEL and AFON buttons. At default settings, you can use the AEL button
to lock exposure without locking focus.
If the AFON button is assigned AF LOCK
ONLY, it can similarly be used to lock focus without locking exposure.
AEL button
(exposure lock)
• While the assigned control is pressed,
5
pressing the shutter button halfway will
not end the lock.
• If AE&AF ON/OFF SWITCH is selected
for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > AE/
AF-LOCK MODE, the lock can only be
ended by pressing the control a second
time.
AFON button
Taking Photographs
N • The focus lever (focus stick) can be used to reposition the focus point
during exposure lock.
• The AEL and AFON buttons can be assigned other roles using
D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING. Exposure
and focus lock can also be assigned to other buttons (P 321).
102
Bracketing
Automatically vary settings over a series of pictures.
1
Rotate the drive dial to BKT.
2
Navigate to DRIVE SETTING > BKT SETTING in the
A SHOOTING SETTING menu (P 162).
N This feature can also be accessed via shortcuts (P 312).
3
Take photographs.
5
N Regardless of the bracketing amount, exposure will not exceed the
limits of the exposure metering system.
W ISO BKT
Select a bracketing amount (±1⁄3, ±2⁄3, or ±1). Each time the shutter is released, the camera will take a picture at the current sensitivity and process it to create two additional copies, one with
sensitivity raised and the other with sensitivity lowered by the
selected amount.
103
Taking Photographs
O AE BKT
Choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence and
the order in which the shots are taken. You can also choose the
amount exposure is varied with each shot and whether the shots
are taken one at a time or in a single burst.
Bracketing
X FILM SIMULATION BKT
Each time the shutter is released, the camera takes one shot and
processes it to create copies with different film simulation settings.
V WHITE BALANCE BKT
Select a bracketing amount (±1, ±2, or ±3). Each time the shutter
is released, the camera takes one shot and processes it to create
three copies: one at the current white balanced setting, one with
fine-tuning increased by the selected amount, and another with
fine-tuning decreased by the selected amount.
5
Y DYNAMIC RANGE BKT
Each time the shutter button is pressed, the camera takes three
shots with different dynamic ranges: 100% for the first, 200% for
the second, and 400% for the third.
Taking Photographs
N While dynamic range bracketing is in effect, sensitivity will be restricted
to a minimum of ISO 500; the sensitivity previously in effect is restored
when bracketing ends.
Z FOCUS BKT
Each time the shutter button is pressed, the camera takes a series
of photos, varying focus with each shot. The number of shots, the
amount focus changes with each shot, and the interval between
shots can be selected using A SHOOTING SETTING > DRIVE
SETTING > BKT SETTING > FOCUS BKT.
BKT SETTING
Settings for exposure, sensitivity, film simulation, white balance and focus
bracketing can be adjusted using A SHOOTING SETTING > DRIVE SETTING >
BKT SETTING.
104
Continuous Shooting (Burst Mode)
Capture motion in a series of pictures.
1
Rotate the drive dial to select CH (highspeed burst) or CL (low-speed burst).
2
Navigate to DRIVE SETTING in the A SHOOTING SETTING
menu and choose a frame advance rate.
N This feature can also be accessed via shortcuts (P 312).
3
N Shooting ends when the shutter button is released or the memory
card is full.
105
5
Taking Photographs
Press and hold the shutter button; the camera will continue
to take photos while the shutter button is pressed.
Continuous Shooting (Burst Mode)
file numbering reaches 9999 before shooting is complete, the reO • Ifmaining
pictures will be recorded to a new folder.
• Shooting ends when the memory card is full; the camera will record
all photos shot to that point. Burst shooting may not begin if the
space available on the memory card is insufficient.
• Frame rates may slow as more shots are taken.
• Frame rate varies with the scene, shutter speed, sensitivity, and focus
mode.
• Depending on shooting conditions, frame rates may slow or the flash
may not fire.
• Recording times may increase during burst shooting.
• The choice of burst modes varies with the option selected for
A SHOOTING SETTING > SHUTTER TYPE.
Focus and Exposure
• Select focus mode C to vary focus with shot.
• To vary exposure with each shot, select OFF
for D BUTTON/DIAL
SETTING > SHUTTER AE.
5
Taking Photographs
and focus tracking performance may vary with such factors
N Exposure
as aperture, sensitivity, and exposure compensation.
106
HDR
Each time the shutter button is pressed, the camera takes
three shots, varying exposure each time, and combines
them into a single picture. The resulting photograph preserves details in highlights and shadows.
1
Rotate the drive dial to HDR.
2
Navigate to DRIVE SETTING > HDR MODE in the A SHOOTING
SETTING menu and choose the amount the brightnesses of the
exposures vary (P 166).
AUTO
200%
400%
800%
800% +
3
Description
Dynamic range is automatically set to a value of from 200%
to 800%.
Dynamic range is set to 200%.
Dynamic range is set to 400%.
Dynamic range is set to 800%.
Camera settings are adjusted for maximum variation in dynamic range.
Take photographs.
The camera will create a combined image.
107
Taking Photographs
Option
5
HDR
O • Keep the camera steady.
• The desired results may not be achieved in the subject moves or the
composition or lighting changes during shooting.
• The picture will be cropped a very small amount and the resolution
will drop slightly.
• Mottling may appear in pictures taken at higher values. Choose a value according to the scene.
• “Extended” sensitivity values are not supported.
• Depending on the options selected for HDR and sensitivity, pictures
may not be taken at the selected shutter speed.
• The flash does not fire.
N HDR images are indicated by a t icon during playback.
5
Taking Photographs
108
Advanced Filters
Take photos with filter effects.
1
Rotate the drive dial to ADV..
2
Navigate to DRIVE SETTING > ADV. FILTER SETTING in the
A SHOOTING SETTING menu and choose a filter effect.
N This feature can also be accessed via shortcuts (P 312).
3
Take photographs.
5
Taking Photographs
109
Advanced Filters
Advanced Filter Options
Choose from the following filters:
Filter
G TOY CAMERA
H MINIATURE
I POP COLOR
J HIGH-KEY
Z LOW-KEY
K DYNAMIC TONE
X SOFT FOCUS
5
Description
Choose for a retro toy camera effect.
The tops and bottoms of pictures are blurred for a
diorama effect.
Create high-contrast images with saturated colors.
Create bright, low-contrast images.
Create uniformly dark tones with few areas of emphasized highlights.
Dynamic tone expression is used for a fantasy effect.
Create a look that is evenly soft throughout the
whole image.
Taking Photographs
u PARTIAL COLOR (RED)
v PARTIAL COLOR (ORANGE)
Areas of the image that are the selected color are
w PARTIAL COLOR (YELLOW)
recorded in that color. All other areas of the image
x PARTIAL COLOR (GREEN)
are recorded in black-and-white.
y PARTIAL COLOR (BLUE)
z PARTIAL COLOR (PURPLE)
N Depending on the subject and camera settings, images may in some
cases be grainy or vary in brightness or hue.
110
Panoramas
Follow an on-screen guide to create a panorama.
Rotate the drive dial to u.
2
To select the size of the angle through which you will pan the
camera while shooting, press the selector left. Highlight a
size and press MENU/OK.
3
Press the selector right to view a choice of pan directions.
Highlight a pan direction and press MENU/OK.
4
Press the shutter button all the way down to start recording.
There is no need to keep the shutter button pressed during
recording.
5
Pan the camera in the direction
shown by the arrow. Shooting ends
automatically when the camera is
panned to the end of the guides and
the panorama is complete.
Sweep camera along yellow
line in direction of
ANGLE
DIRECTION
111
5
Taking Photographs
1
For Best Results
• Move the camera slowly in a small circle at a steady speed
• Keep the camera parallel or at right angles to the horizon and be sure to
pan only in the direction shown by the guides
• Try panning at a different speed if the desired results are not achieved
• Prop your elbows against your sides
• Use a tripod
• For best results, use a lens with a focal length of 35 mm or less (50 mm or
less in 35 mm format).
O • If the shutter button is pressed all the way down before the panorama
is complete, shooting will end and no panorama may be recorded.
• The last part of the panorama may not be recorded if shooting ends
before the panorama is complete.
• Panoramas are created from multiple frames, and the camera may in
some cases be unable to stitch the frames together perfectly.
5
• Panoramas may be blurred if the subject is poorly lit.
• Shooting may be interrupted if the camera is panned too quickly or
Taking Photographs
too slowly. Panning the camera in a direction other than that shown
cancels shooting.
• The camera may in some cases record a greater or lesser angle than
selected.
• The desired results may not be achieved with:
- Moving subjects
- Subjects close to the camera
- Unvarying subjects such as the sky or a field of grass
- Subjects that are in constant motion, such as waves and waterfalls
- Subjects that undergo marked changes in brightness
• If ON is selected for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > SHUTTER AE, exposure for the entire panorama is determined by the first frame.
112
Panoramas
Viewing Panoramas
With the panorama displayed full frame, press the selector down to start
panorama playback. Vertical panoramas will scroll vertically, horizontal panoramas horizontally.
PLAY
STOP
PAUSE
• In full-frame playback, you can use the rear command dial to zoom panoramas in or out.
• Panorama playback is controlled using the multi selector.
Left/right
View other pictures
Panorama
Panorama
playback
playback paused
End playback
Pause playback
Resume playback
Choose pan
Scroll panorama
direction
manually
113
5
Taking Photographs
Up
Down
Full-frame
playback
—
Start playback
Selector
Multiple Exposures
Create a photograph that combines multiple exposures.
1
Select ON for A SHOOTING SETTING > MULTI EXPOSURE and
choose a blend mode (P 176).
2
3
Take the first shot.
5
Press MENU/OK. The first shot will be
shown superimposed on the view
through the lens and you will be
prompted to take the second shot.
NEXT
RETRY
EXIT
Taking Photographs
would like to retake the first shot, press the selector left.
N • IfToyou
• save the first shot and exit without creating a multiple exposure, press DISP/BACK.
4
Take the second shot, using the first
frame as a guide.
EXIT
114
Multiple Exposures
5
Press MENU/OK.
The combined exposures will be displayed as a guide to composing the
next shot.
RETRY
EXIT
would like to retake the second shot, press the selector left.
N • IfToyou
• end shooting and create a multiple exposure from the shots
taken to this point, press DISP/BACK.
6
Make additional exposures.
Each photograph can contain up to nine exposures.
7
Press DISP/BACK to end shooting.
The camera will create the combined image and multiple exposure shooting will end.
5
Taking Photographs
115
MEMO
116
The Shooting Menus
117
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)
Adjust image quality settings for still photography.
To display image quality settings, press
MENU/OK in the photo shooting display and
select the H (IMAGE QUALITY SETTING)
tab.
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING
IMAGE SIZE
IMAGE QUALITY
RAW RECORDING
SELECT JPEG/HEIF
FILM SIMULATION
MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
GRAIN EFFECT
COLOR CHROME EFFECT
EXIT
N The options available vary with the shooting mode selected.
IMAGE SIZE
Choose the size and aspect ratio at which still pictures are recorded.
6
The Shooting Menus
Option
O3:2
O 16 : 9
O1:1
Image size
7728 × 5152
7728 × 4344
5152 × 5152
Option
O4:3
O5:4
Image size
6864 × 5152
6432 × 5152
Option
P3:2
P 16 : 9
P1:1
Image size
5472 × 3648
5472 × 3080
3648 × 3648
Option
P4:3
P5:4
Image size
4864 × 3648
4560 × 3648
Option
Q3:2
Q 16 : 9
Q1:1
Image size
3888 × 2592
3888 × 2184
2592 × 2592
Option
Q4:3
Q5:4
Image size
3456 × 2592
3264 × 2592
The following options are available in SPORTS FINDER MODE
and when 1.29X CROP is selected in burst mode:
Option
P3:2
P 16 : 9
P1:1
Image size
6000 × 4000
6000 × 3376
4000 × 4000
Option
P4:3
P5:4
Image size
5328 × 4000
4992 × 4000
N IMAGE SIZE is not reset when the camera is turned off or another
shooting mode is selected.
118
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)
IMAGE QUALITY
Choose a file format and compression ratio.
Option
FINE
Description
Low compression ratios are used for higher-quality images.
Higher compression ratios are used to increase the number of
NORMAL
images that can be stored.
FINE + RAW
Record both RAW and fine-quality JPEG or HEIF images.
NORMAL + RAW Record both RAW and normal-quality JPEG or HEIF images.
RAW
Record RAW images only.
The Function Buttons
To toggle RAW image quality on or off for a single shot, assign RAW to a
function button (P 321). Press the button once to select the option in
the right column, again to return to the original setting (left column).
Option selected by pressing function
button to which RAW is assigned
FINE + RAW
NORMAL + RAW
FINE
NORMAL
FINE
119
6
The Shooting Menus
Option currently selected for
IMAGE QUALITY
FINE
NORMAL
FINE + RAW
NORMAL + RAW
RAW
RAW RECORDING
Choose whether to compress RAW images.
Option
UNCOMPRESSED
Description
RAW images are not compressed.
RAW images are compressed using a reversible algorithm
that reduces file size with no loss of image data. The images can be viewed in Capture One Express for Fujifilm 1,
Capture One for Fujifilm 1, Capture One 1, RAW FILE
LOSSLESS COMPRESSED CONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIX 2, FUJIFILM X RAW
STUDIO, or other software that supports “lossless” RAW
compression. Quality is the same as UNCOMPRESSED,
but the resulting files are anywhere from about 30 to 90
percent of their uncompressed size.
RAW images are compressed using a “lossy”, non-reversible
algorithm. Quality is about the same as UNCOMPRESSED,
COMPRESSED
but the resulting files are anywhere from about 25 to 35 percent of their uncompressed size.
6
The Shooting Menus
1 For information on when support will be available, visit:
https://www.captureone.com/
2 For information on when support will be available, visit:
https://fujifilm-x.com/support/compatibility/software/raw-file-converter-ex-poweredby-silkypix/
120
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)
SELECT JPEG/HEIF
Choose whether pictures are recorded in JPEG or HEIF.
Option
JPEG
HEIF
Description
Pictures are recorded in the widely-supported JPEG format.
Pictures are recorded in HEIF, a format with excellent compression but limited options for viewing and sharing.
O • JPEG is automatically selected in place of HEIF during filter-effect,
panorama, multiple-exposure, and HDR photography.
• Selecting HEIF disables CLARITY and sets COLOR SPACE to sRGB.
• HEIF pictures are stored on the memory card as files with the exten-
sion “.HIF”. Before the pictures can be viewed on a computer, the extension must be changed to “.HEIC”. This occurs automatically when
HEIF pictures are uploaded from the camera to a computer via USB.
6
The Shooting Menus
121
FILM SIMULATION
Simulate the effects of different kinds of film, including blackand-white (with or without color filters). Choose a palette according to your subject and creative intent.
Option
6
Description
The Shooting Menus
c PROVIA/STANDARD
Ideal for a wide range of subjects.
d Velvia/VIVID
Vibrant reproduction, ideal for landscape and nature.
e ASTIA/SOFT
Softer color and contrast for a more subdued look.
i CLASSIC CHROME
Soft color and enhanced shadow contrast for a calm look.
g PRO Neg. Hi
Ideal for portrait with slightly enhanced contrast.
h PRO Neg. Std
Ideal for portrait with soft gradations and skin tones.
g CLASSIC Neg.
Enhanced color with hard tonality to increase image
depth.
Amber tinted highlights and rich shadow tone for printed
photo look.
Soft color and rich shadow tone suitable for film look
movie.
Unique color with low saturation and high contrast. Suitable for still and movie.
Shoot in Black and White In rich details with sharpness.
Available with yellow (Ye), red (R), and green (G) filters,
which deepen shades of gray corresponding to hues
complementary to the selected color.
• d ACROS+Ye FILTER: Slightly enhances contrast and
darkens skies.
• c ACROS+R FILTER: Enhances contrast and darkens skies
considerably.
• b ACROS+G FILTER: Produces pleasing skin tones in portrait.
n NOSTALGIC Neg.
X ETERNA/CINEMA
N ETERNA BLEACH
BYPASS
a ACROS
122
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)
Option
b MONOCHROME
f SEPIA
Description
Shoots in black and white. Available with yellow (Ye), red
(R), and green (G) filters, which deepen shades of gray corresponding to hues complementary to the selected color.
• e MONOCHROME+Ye FILTER: Slightly enhances contrast
and darkens skies.
• d MONOCHROME+R FILTER: Enhances contrast and darkens skies considerably.
• f MONOCHROME+G FILTER: Produces pleasing skin tones
in portrait.
Shoots in sepia tone.
N • Film simulation options can be combined with tone and sharpness
settings.
• Film simulation settings can also be accessed via shortcuts (P 312).
• For more information, visit:
https://fujifilm-x.com/global/tag/the-world-of-film-simulation/?post_type=xstories
6
The Shooting Menus
123
MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
Add a reddish or bluish tinge (warm or
cool color cast) to the a ACROS and
b MONOCHROME monochrome film
simulations. Color can be adjusted on the
WARM–COOL and G (Green)–M (Magenta)
axes.
GRAIN EFFECT
Add a film grain effect.
ROUGHNESS
Option
STRONG
WEAK
OFF
6
Description
Choose for rougher grains.
Choose for smoother grains.
Turn the effect off.
SIZE
The Shooting Menus
Option
LARGE
SMALL
124
Description
Choose for coarser grains.
Choose for finer grains.
MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
SET
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)
COLOR CHROME EFFECT
Increase the range of tones available for rendering colors that
tend to be highly saturated, such as reds, yellows, and greens.
Option
STRONG
WEAK
OFF
Description
Choose for a strong effect.
Choose for a weak effect.
Turn the effect off.
COLOR CHROME FX BLUE
Increase the range of tones available for rendering blues.
Option
STRONG
WEAK
OFF
Description
Choose for a strong effect.
Choose for a weak effect.
Turn the effect off.
SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT
Smooth complexions.
6
Description
The Shooting Menus
Option
STRONG
WEAK
OFF
Choose for a strong effect.
Choose for a weak effect.
Turn the effect off.
125
WHITE BALANCE
For natural colors, choose a white balance option that matches
the light source.
6
The Shooting Menus
Option
WA WHITE
PRIORITY
AUTO
AA AMBIENCE
PRIORITY
k CUSTOM 1
l CUSTOM 2
m CUSTOM 3
k COLOR
TEMPERATURE
i DAYLIGHT
j SHADE
k FLUORESCENT
LIGHT-1
l FLUORESCENT
LIGHT-2
m FLUORESCENT
LIGHT-3
n INCANDESCENT
Description
White balance is adjusted automatically. Choose for whiter
whites in scenes lit by incandescent bulbs.
White balance is adjusted automatically.
White balance is adjusted automatically. Choose for warmer
whites in scenes lit by incandescent bulbs.
Measure a value for white balance.
Choose a color temperature.
For subjects in direct sunlight.
For subjects in the shade.
Use under “daylight” fluorescent lights.
Use under “warm white” fluorescent lights.
Use under “cool white” fluorescent lights.
Use under incandescent lighting.
Reduces the blue cast typically associated with underwater
g UNDERWATER
lighting.
N • In conditions in which AUTO fails to produce the desired results—for
example, under certain types of lighting or in close-ups of portrait
subjects—use custom white balance or choose a white balance option suited to the light source.
• White balance is adjusted for flash lighting only in AUTO, WA WHITE
PRIORITY, AA AMBIENCE PRIORITY, and g modes. Turn the
flash off using other white balance options.
• White balance options can also be accessed via shortcuts (P 312).
126
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)
Fine-Tuning White Balance
Pressing MENU/OK after selecting a white
balance option displays the dialog shown
at right; use the selector to fine-tune white
balance.
WB SHIFT
SET
N • To exit without fine-tuning white balance, press DISP/BACK after selecting a white balance option.
• You cannot tilt the focus stick diagonally when fine-tuning white balance.
6
The Shooting Menus
127
6
Custom White Balance
Choose k, l, or m to adjust white
CUSTOM 1
balance for unusual lighting conditions
using a white object as a reference (colored objects can also be used to lend
photos a color cast). A white balance tarSHUTTER : NEW WB
SHIFT
NOT CHANGE
get will be displayed; position and size
the target so that it is filled by the reference object and press the
shutter button all the way down to measure white balance (to
select the most recent custom value and exit without measuring
white balance, press DISP/BACK, or press MENU/OK to select the most
recent value and display the fine-tuning dialog).
• If “COMPLETED !” is displayed, press MENU/OK
COMPLETED !
to set white balance to the measured
value.
• If “UNDER” is displayed, raise exposure
compensation and try again.
SET
CANCEL
• If “OVER” is displayed, lower exposure compensation and try again.
The Shooting Menus
k: Color Temperature
Adjust white balance to match the color temperature of the light
source.
N Color temperature can be adjusted to make pictures “warmer” or “colder” or deliberately produce colors that differ radically from those in real
life.
128
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)
1
Select k in the white balance menu.
The option currently selected for color temperature will be displayed.
WHITE BALANCE
COLOR TEMPERATURE
R:0 B:0
SET
2
Edit the color temperature using the
selector and press MENU/OK.
A fine-tuning dialog will be displayed.
SHIFT
COLOR TEMPERATURE
SET
SHIFT
N • You can also adjust color temperature in increments of 10 K by
rotating the rear command dial.
• Choose from values of from 2500 to 10000 K.
• To exit without fine-tuning white balance, press DISP/BACK after
choosing a color temperature.
3
Color Temperature
Color temperature is an objective measure of the color of a light source, expressed in Kelvin (K). Light sources with a color temperature close to that of
direct sunlight appear white; light sources with a lower color temperature
have a yellow or red cast, while those with a higher color temperature are
tinged with blue.
129
6
The Shooting Menus
4
Press the selector up, down, left, or right to highlight a fine-tuning amount.
Press MENU/OK.
The changes will be applied. The selected color temperature will appear
in the display.
DYNAMIC RANGE
Adjust dynamic range. Wide dynamic ranges reduce loss of detail in highlights for more natural results with high-contrast or
backlit scenes.
Option
Description
V 100% Choose for increased contrast.
AUTO
W 200%
Reduce loss of detail in highlights.
X 400%
O Mottling may appear in pictures taken at higher values. Choose a value
according to the scene.
N • If AUTO is selected, the camera will automatically choose either
V 100% or W 200% according to the subject and shooting conditions. Shutter speed and aperture will be displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway.
• W 200% is available at sensitivities of from ISO 250 to ISO 12800,
X 400% at sensitivities of from ISO 500 to 12800.
6
The Shooting Menus
D RANGE PRIORITY
Reduce loss of detail in highlights and shadows for natural-looking results when photographing high-contrast scenes.
Option
AUTO
STRONG
WEAK
OFF
Description
Contrast is adjusted automatically in response to lighting conditions.
Adjust dynamic range by a large amount for very high-contrast
scenes.
Adjust dynamic range by a smaller amount for moderately
high-contrast scenes.
Contrast reduction off.
N • WEAK is available at sensitivities of from ISO 250 to ISO 12800,
STRONG at sensitivities of from ISO 500 to 12800.
• When an option other than OFF is selected, TONE CURVE, and
DYNAMIC RANGE will be adjusted automatically; if you wish to adjust these settings manually, choose OFF.
130
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)
TONE CURVE
With reference to a tone curve, adjust the
appearance of highlights or shadows,
making them harsher or softer. Choose
higher values to make shadows and
highlights harsher, lower values to make
them softer.
Option
HIGHLIGHTS
SHADOWS
TONE CURVE
HIGHLIGHTS
SHADOWS
SET
CANCEL
Description
-2 to +4
-2 to +4
COLOR
Adjust color density.
−4
−3
−2
−1
Options
0
+1
+2
+3
+4
SHARPNESS
Sharpen or soften outlines.
−3
−2
−1
Options
0
+1
+2
+3
+4
131
The Shooting Menus
−4
6
HIGH ISO NR
Reduce noise in pictures taken at high sensitivities. Choose higher values to reduce noise and smooth outlines, lower values to
leave outlines visible.
−4
−3
−2
−1
Options
0
+1
+2
+3
+4
CLARITY
Increase definition while altering tones in highlights and shadows as little as possible. Choose higher values for increased definition, lower values for a softer effect.
−5
−4
−3
−2
−1
Options
0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
O The additional processing required at settings other than 0 increases
the time need to save each shot.
6
LONG EXPOSURE NR
Select ON to reduce mottling in long time-exposures.
The Shooting Menus
Options
ON
OFF
O The additional processing required when ON is selected increases save
times.
132
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)
LENS MODULATION OPTIMIZER
Select ON to improve definition by adjusting for diffraction and
the slight loss of focus at the periphery of the lens.
Options
ON
OFF
COLOR SPACE
Choose the gamut of colors available for color reproduction.
Option
sRGB
Adobe RGB
Description
Recommended in most situations.
For commercial printing.
PIXEL MAPPING
Use this option if you notice bright spots in your pictures.
Press MENU/OK in the shooting display and select the H IMAGE
QUALITY SETTING tab.
2
Highlight PIXEL MAPPING and press MENU/OK to perform pixel mapping.
O • Results are not guaranteed.
• Be sure the battery is fully charged before beginning pixel mapping.
• Pixel mapping is not available when the camera temperature is elevated.
• Processing may take a few seconds.
133
6
The Shooting Menus
1
x SELECT CUSTOM SETTING
Recall settings saved to custom settings banks 1 through
7 (CUSTOM 1 through CUSTOM 7) using x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM
SETTING.
Banks
NOTHING SELECTED
CUSTOM 4
CUSTOM 1
CUSTOM 5
CUSTOM 2
CUSTOM 6
CUSTOM 3
CUSTOM 7
you would prefer not to recall saved settings, select NOTHING
N IfSELECTED.
x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING
Adjust settings as desired and save them to a custom settings
bank. Saved settings can be recalled using H IMAGE QUALITY
SETTING > x SELECT CUSTOM SETTING.
menu settings can be adjusted when the STILL/MOVIE mode dial
N Photo
is rotated to STILL.
6
Saving Custom Settings
Create a new custom settings bank.
The Shooting Menus
1
Select H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM
SETTING in the shooting menu and press MENU/OK.
2
Highlight a destination bank for
the new settings (CREATE NEW C1
through C7) and press MENU/OK.
A confirmation dialog will be displayed.
3
Highlight OK and press MENU/OK.
Current camera settings will be saved
to the selected bank.
EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW
CUSTOM 1
CREATE NEW OK?
OK
CANCEL
134
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)
Editing Custom Settings
Edit existing custom settings banks.
1
Select H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM
SETTING in the shooting menu and press MENU/OK.
N To
save settings for movie recording, navigate to B MOVIE
SETTING in the movie menus and select F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM
SETTING.
2
Highlight the desired custom settings bank and press MENU/OK.
3
Highlight EDIT/CHECK and press
MENU/OK.
EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING
CUSTOM 1
CUSTOM 2
CUSTOM 3
CUSTOM 4
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW
CUSTOM 1
EDIT/CHECK
SAVE THE CHANGES
RESET THE CHANGES
COPY
ERASE
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
6
The camera will display a list of shooting menu items; highlight an item you
wish to edit and press MENU/OK.
Adjust the selected item as desired.
CUSTOM 1 EDIT/CHECK
IMAGE SIZE
IMAGE QUALITY
RAW RECORDING
SELECT JPEG/HEIF
FILM SIMULATION
MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
GRAIN EFFECT
COLOR CHROME EFFECT
SAVE
5
EXIT
Press MENU/OK to save the changes and return to the shooting
menu list.
Adjust additional items as desired.
135
The Shooting Menus
4
N If DISABLE is selected for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > AUTO
UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING in the photo menu or for B MOVIE
SETTING > FAUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING in the movie menu, red dots will appear next to the edited items but the
changes will not be saved automatically.
• To save the changes for selected items, highlight the items in the
list and press Q.
• To save changes for all items, return to Step 3 and select SAVE THE
CHANGES. To cancel all changes and restore the previous settings,
select RESET THE CHANGES.
• If you copy an item marked by a red dot, the item will be copied with
the changes intact.
6
The Shooting Menus
136
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)
Copying Custom Settings
Copy custom settings from one bank to another, overwriting the
settings in the destination bank. If the source bank has been renamed, the name will also be copied to the destination bank.
1
Select H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM
SETTING in the shooting menu and press MENU/OK.
N To
save settings for movie recording, navigate to B MOVIE
SETTING in the movie menus and select F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM
SETTING.
2
Highlight the source bank and press
MENU/OK.
3
Highlight COPY and press MENU/OK.
CUSTOM 1
CUSTOM 2
CUSTOM 3
CUSTOM 4
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW
CUSTOM 1
EDIT/CHECK
SAVE THE CHANGES
RESET THE CHANGES
COPY
ERASE
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
Highlight the destination bank (C1
through C7) and press MENU/OK.
A confirmation dialog will be displayed.
6
The Shooting Menus
4
EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING
COPY TO
CUSTOM 1
CUSTOM 2
CUSTOM 3
CUSTOM 4
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW
changes to custom settings in the
N Any
destination bank will be overwritten.
5
Highlight OK and press MENU/OK.
The selected settings will be copied
to the destination bank, overwriting
any existing settings.
COPY
CUSTOM 1
CUSTOM 2
COPY OK?
OK
CANCEL
137
Deleting Custom Settings
Delete settings from selected custom settings banks.
1
Select H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM
SETTING in the shooting menu and press MENU/OK.
N To
save settings for movie recording, navigate to B MOVIE
SETTING in the movie menus and select F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM
SETTING.
2
Highlight the desired custom settings bank and press MENU/OK.
3
Highlight ERASE and press MENU/OK.
A confirmation dialog will be displayed.
4
Highlight OK and press MENU/OK.
Any custom settings saved to the selected bank will be deleted.
EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING
CUSTOM 1
CUSTOM 2
CUSTOM 3
CUSTOM 4
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW
CUSTOM 1
EDIT/CHECK
SAVE THE CHANGES
RESET THE CHANGES
COPY
ERASE
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
6
The Shooting Menus
ERASE
CUSTOM 1
ERASE OK?
OK
CANCEL
138
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)
Renaming Custom Settings Banks
Rename selected custom settings banks.
1
Select H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM
SETTING in the shooting menu and press MENU/OK.
N To
save settings for movie recording, navigate to B MOVIE
SETTING in the movie menus and select F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM
SETTING.
2
Highlight the desired custom settings bank and press MENU/OK.
3
Highlight EDIT CUSTOM NAME and
press MENU/OK.
EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING
CUSTOM 1
CUSTOM 2
CUSTOM 3
CUSTOM 4
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW
CUSTOM 1
EDIT/CHECK
SAVE THE CHANGES
RESET THE CHANGES
COPY
ERASE
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
6
Enter a new name for the custom settings bank and select
SET.
The selected bank will be renamed.
AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING
Choose whether changes to saved custom settings apply automatically.
Option
ENABLE
DISABLE
Description
Changes to custom settings banks CUSTOM 1 through
CUSTOM 7 apply automatically.
Changes do not apply automatically. Any changes to custom
settings must be applied manually (P 135).
139
The Shooting Menus
4
xF MOUNT ADAPTOR SETTING
Adjust settings for lenses attached via a mount adapter. The
camera can store settings for multiple lenses (LENS 1 through
LENS 6).
N • DISTORTION CORRECTION, COLOR SHADING CORRECTION, and
PERIPHERAL ILLUMINATION CORRECTION are available with lenses connected via an M mount adapter.
• Any changes made using this item also apply in movie mode
(P 204).
FOCAL LENGTH SETTING
Enter the lens’s true focal length.
LENS 5
INPUT FOCAL LENGTH
SET
6
The Shooting Menus
DISTORTION CORRECTION
Choose from STRONG, MEDIUM, or
WEAK options to correct BARREL or
PINCUSHION distortion.
140
LENS5 DISTORTION CORRECTION
BARREL STRONG
BARREL MEDIUM
BARREL WEAK
OFF
PINCUSHION WEAK
PINCUSHION MEDIUM
PINCUSHION STRONG
CANCEL
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)
COLOR SHADING CORRECTION
Color (shading) variations between the
center and edges of the frame can be adjusted separately for each corner.
To use color shading correction, follow the
steps below.
NEXT
SET
1
Rotate the rear command dial to choose a corner. The selected corner is indicated by a triangle.
2
Use the selector to adjust shading until there is no visible difference in color between the selected corner and the center
of the image.
• Press the selector left or right to adjust colors on the cyan–
red axis.
• Press the selector up or down to adjust colors on the blue–
yellow axis.
N To determine the amount required, adjust color shading correction
while taking photos of blue sky or a sheet of gray paper.
6
The Shooting Menus
141
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)
PERIPHERAL ILLUMINATION CORRECTION
Choose from values between –5 and
+5. Choosing positive values increases
peripheral illumination, while choosing
negative values reduces peripheral illumination. Positive values are recomSET
CANCEL
mended for vintage lenses, negative values to create the effect of images taken with an antique lens or a
pinhole camera.
N To determine the amount required, adjust peripheral illumination correction while taking photos of blue sky or a sheet of gray paper.
EDIT LENS NAME
Change the lens name.
6
The Shooting Menus
142
AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)
Adjust focus settings for still photography.
To display AF/MF settings, press MENU/OK
in the photo shooting display and select
the G (AF/MF SETTING) tab.
AF/MF SETTING
FOCUS AREA
AF MODE
AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS
STORE AF MODE BY ORIENTATION
AF POINT DISPLAY
xF WRAP FOCUS POINT
NUMBER OF FOCUS POINTS
PRE-AF
EXIT
N The options available vary with the shooting mode selected.
FOCUS AREA
Choose the focus area for autofocus, manual focus, and focus
zoom (P 87).
AF MODE
Choose the AF mode for focus modes S and C (P 85).
6
The Shooting Menus
143
AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS
Select focus-tracking options for focus
mode C. Choose from Sets 1–5 according
to your subject or select Set 6 for custom
focus-tracking options.
AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS
SET 1 MULTI PURPOSE
TRACKING SENSITIVITY
SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITY
ZONE AREA SWITCHING
AUTO
OK
Option
6
The Shooting Menus
Description
A standard tracking option that works well with
SET 1 MULTI PURPOSE
the typical range of moving subjects.
The focus system attempts to track the chosen
SET 2 IGNORE OBSTACLES & subject. Choose with subjects that are hard to
CONTINUE TO TRACK SUBJECT keep in the focus area or if other objects are likely
to enter the focus area with the subject.
The focus system attempts to compensate for
SET 3 FOR ACCELERATING/
subject acceleration or deceleration. Choose for
DECELERATING SUBJECT
subjects prone to rapid changes in velocity.
The focus system attempts to focus quickly on
SET 4 FOR SUDDENLY APPEARING subjects entering the focus area. Choose for subSUBJECT
jects that appear abruptly or when rapidly switching subjects.
Choose for hard-to-track subjects prone not only
SET 5 FOR ERRATICALLY MOVING
to sudden changes in velocity but also to large
& ACCEL./DECEL. SUBJECT
movements front to back and left to right.
Adjust TRACKING SENSITIVITY, SPEED
TRACKING SENSITIVITY, and ZONE AREA
SET 6 CUSTOM
SWITCHING to suit your preferences based on
the values for Sets 1–5 (P 145, 147).
144
AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)
Focus Tracking Options
The individual parameters that are part of a focus tracking set are
described below.
TRACKING SENSITIVITY
This parameter determines how long the
camera waits to switch focus when an
object enters the focus area behind or in
front of the current subject. The higher
the value, the longer the camera will wait.
TRACKING SENSITIVITY
QUICK
LOCKED ON
SETS THE TRACKING
SENSITIVITY ON THE SUBJECT
ADJUST
0
1
Options
2
3
SWITCH
4
O • The higher the value, the longer it takes the camera to refocus when
you attempt to switch subjects.
• The lower the value, the more likely the camera is to switch focus
from your subject to other objects in the focus area.
0
Options
1
6
SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITY
STEADY
ACCEL./DECEL.
SETS THE SPEED TRACKING
SENSITIVITY FOR MOVING SUBJECT
ADJUST
SWITCH
2
O The higher the value, the more difficulty the camera will have focusing
in situations in which autofocus does not perform well, such as when
the subject is highly reflective or low in contrast.
145
The Shooting Menus
SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITY
This parameter determines how sensitive the tracking system is to changes in
subject velocity. The higher the value,
the greater the precision with which the
system attempts to respond to sudden
movement.
ZONE AREA SWITCHING
This parameter determines the focus
area given priority in zone AF.
ZONE AREA SWITCHING
CENTER AUTO
FRONT
SETS THE SWITCHING SENSITIVITY
OF FOCUS FRAME IN ZONE AREA
ADJUST
Option
FRONT
AUTO
CENTER
SWITCH
Description
Zone AF assigns priority to the subjects closest to the camera.
The camera locks focus on the subject at the center of the zone
and then switches focus areas as necessary to track it.
Zone AF assigns priority to subjects in the center of the zone.
O This option takes effect only when y ZONE is selected for AF mode.
Set Values
Parameter values for the different sets are listed below.
6
The Shooting Menus
SET 1
SET 2
SET 3
SET 4
SET 5
146
TRACKING
SENSITIVITY
2
3
2
0
3
SPEED TRACKING
SENSITIVITY
0
0
2
1
2
ZONE AREA
SWITCHING
AUTO
CENTER
AUTO
FRONT
AUTO
AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)
Custom Focus Tracking Options
Follow the steps below to adjust settings for Set 6.
1
Select AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS >
SET 6 CUSTOM.
AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS
SET 6 CUSTOM
TRACKING SENSITIVITY
SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITY
ZONE AREA SWITCHING
ADJUST
AUTO
SET DETAIL
RESET
2
Press the selector up or down to highlight items and rotate
the front command dial to change. To reset settings to their
original values, press b.
3
Press DISP/BACK when settings are complete.
6
The Shooting Menus
147
STORE AF MODE BY ORIENTATION
Choose whether the AF mode used when the camera is in portrait orientation is stored separately from that used when the
camera is in landscape orientation.
Option
Description
OFF
The same settings are used in both orientations.
FOCUS AREA ONLY The focus area for each orientation can be selected separately.
ON
The focus mode and focus area can be selected separately.
AF POINT DISPLAY yz
Choose whether individual focus frames are displayed when
ZONE or WIDE/TRACKING is selected for G AF/MF SETTING >
AF MODE.
Options
ON
6
OFF
The Shooting Menus
xF WRAP FOCUS POINT
Choose whether focus-area selection is bounded by the borders
of the display or “wraps around” from one edge of the display to
another.
Option
ENABLE
DISABLE
148
Description
Focus-area selection “wraps around” from one edge of the display
to another.
Focus-area selection is bounded by the borders of the display.
AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)
NUMBER OF FOCUS POINTS
Choose the number of focus points available for focus-point selection in manual focus mode or when SINGLE POINT is selected
for AF MODE.
Option
Description
Choose from 117 focus points arranged in a 9- by 13-point
117 POINTS (9 × 13)
grid.
Choose from 425 focus points arranged in a 17- by 25-point
425 POINTS (17 × 25)
grid.
PRE-AF
If ON is selected, the camera will continue to adjust focus even
when the shutter button is not pressed halfway. The camera
adjusts focus continuously, allowing it to focus faster when the
shutter button is pressed halfway. Choosing this option helps
prevent missed shots.
Options
ON
OFF
6
The Shooting Menus
O Choosing ON increases the drain on the battery.
149
xF AF ILLUMINATOR
If ON is selected, the AF-assist illuminator will light to assist
autofocus.
Options
ON
OFF
O • The camera may be unable to focus using the AF-assist illuminator
in some cases.
• If the camera is unable to focus, try increasing the distance to the
subject.
• Avoid shining the AF-assist illuminator directly into your subject’s
eyes.
N Any changes made using this item also apply in movie mode (P 207).
6
The Shooting Menus
150
AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)
g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING
If the camera detects human faces, it will
assign them priority over the background
and adjust settings appropriately for portraits when setting focus and exposure.
You can also choose whether the camera
focuses on the left or right eye when face
detection is on.
Option
O • If the subject moves as the shutter button is pressed, the face may
not be in the area indicated by the green border when the picture
is taken.
• In some modes, the camera may set exposure for the frame as a
whole rather than the portrait subject.
• Enabling Intelligent Face Detection via FACE DETECTION ON automatically selects OFF for SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING.
151
6
The Shooting Menus
Description
Adjust settings for Intelligent Face Detection. You can also adjust
eye detection settings.
• g EYE OFF: Intelligent Face Detection only.
• u EYE AUTO: The camera automatically chooses which eye
to focus on when a face is detected.
FACE DETECTION
w RIGHT EYE PRIORITY: The camera focuses preferential•
ON
ly on the right eye of subjects detected using Intelligent Face
Detection.
• v LEFT EYE PRIORITY: The camera focuses preferentially on the left eye of subjects detected using Intelligent Face
Detection.
OFF
Intelligent Face Detection and eye priority off.
N • A single face detected in or near the focus area will be marked with
a white frame.
• If multiple faces are detected in the focus area, the camera will select
one automatically.
• You can choose a different subject by tapping the display to repo-
6
The Shooting Menus
sition the focus area. The focus stick (focus lever) can also be used if
z WIDE is selected for AF MODE.
• When DIRECT AF POINT SELECTION or EDIT FOCUS AREA is chosen for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > FOCUS LEVER SETTING >
TILT o, you can also switch subjects using the focus stick (focus lever)
or (during viewfinder photography) touch controls (P 26).
• When the camera is focused on an eye, you can switch from one
eye to the other using a function button to which RIGHT/LEFT EYE
SWITCH has been assigned.
• If the selected subject leaves the frame, the camera will wait a set
time for its return and consequently the white frame may sometimes
appear in locations where no face is seen.
• Depending on shooting conditions, face selection may be suspended at the close of burst shooting.
• Faces can be detected with the camera in vertical or horizontal orientation.
• If the camera is unable to detect the subject’s eyes because they are
hidden by hair, glasses, or other objects, the camera will instead focus
on faces.
• Face/eye detection options can also be accessed via shortcuts
(P 312).
152
AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)
SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING
Choose whether the camera prioritizes subjects of a selected
type, such as animals or vehicles, when setting focus.
Option
Description
Select one of the subject types listed below to enable subject
detection.
• E ANIMAL: The camera detects and tracks focus on dogs and
cats.
• F BIRD: The camera detects and tracks focus on birds.
• G AUTOMOBILE: The camera detects and tracks focus on
the body or front ends of cars, primarily those of types used
SUBJECT
DETECTION ON for motor sports.
• H MOTORCYCLE&BIKE: The camera detects and tracks
focus on the riders of motorcycles and bicycles.
• I AIRPLANE: The camera detects and tracks focus on the
cockpits, noses, or bodies of airplanes.
• J TRAIN: The camera detects and tracks focus on the driver
compartments or front ends of trains.
OFF
Subject detection off.
ly selects OFF for g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING.
153
6
The Shooting Menus
O Enabling subject detection via SUBJECT DETECTION ON automatical-
N • A single subject of the chosen type detected in or near the focus area
will be marked with a white frame.
• If multiple subjects are detected in the focus area, the camera will
select one automatically.
• You can choose a different subject by tapping the display to reposition the focus area. The focus stick (focus lever) can also be used if
z WIDE is selected for AF MODE.
• When DIRECT AF POINT SELECTION or EDIT FOCUS AREA is chosen for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > FOCUS LEVER SETTING >
TILT o, you can also switch subjects using the focus stick (focus lever)
or (during viewfinder photography) touch controls (P 26).
• If the selected subject leaves the frame, the camera will wait a set
time for its return and consequently the white frame may sometimes
appear in locations where no subject of the chosen type is seen.
• Depending on shooting conditions, subject detection may be suspended at the close of burst shooting.
• Subjects can be detected with the camera in vertical or horizontal
orientation.
• Subject detection options can also be accessed via shortcuts
(P 312).
6
The Shooting Menus
154
AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)
AF+MF
If ON is selected and focus has been locked (whether by pressing
the shutter button halfway or by other means), focus lock can be
ended and focus adjusted manually by rotating the focus ring.
Options
ON
OFF
O • Lenses with a focus distance indicator must be set to manual focus
mode (MF) before this option can be used. Selecting MF disables the
focus distance indicator.
• If the lens is equipped with a focus distance indicator, set the focus
ring to the center, as the camera may fail to focus if the ring is set to
infinity or the minimum focus distance.
N • The previously-selected focus mode will be restored if no operations
are performed for a set period after the focus ring is rotated.
• DIGITAL SPLIT IMAGE and DIGITAL MICROPRISM focus assist options selected via MF ASSIST cannot be used.
155
6
The Shooting Menus
AF + MF Focus Zoom
Selecting ON for G AF/MF SETTING > FOCUS CHECK when SINGLE
POINT is chosen for AF MODE lets you zoom in on the current focus area
by rotating the focus ring. The zoom ratio can be selected using the rear
command dial.
MF ASSIST
Choose how focus is displayed in manual focus mode (P 94).
Option
Description
Displays a black-and-white (MONOCHROME) or color (COLOR)
DIGITAL SPLIT split image in the center of the frame. Frame the subject in the
IMAGE
split-image area and rotate the focus ring until the four parts of
the split image are correctly aligned.
A grid pattern that emphasizes blur is displayed when the subject
DIGITAL
is out of focus, disappearing to be replaced by a sharp image when
MICROPRISM
the subject is in focus.
FOCUS PEAK The camera heightens high-contrast outlines. Choose a color and
HIGHLIGHT peaking level.
Focus is displayed normally (focus peaking, digital split image, and
OFF
digital microprism are not available).
6
FOCUS CHECK
If ON is selected, the display will automatically zoom in on the
selected focus area when the focus ring is rotated in manual focus mode.
The Shooting Menus
Options
ON
OFF
N • Pressing the center of the rear command dial cancels focus zoom.
• The zoom position is centered on the current focus area and changes
when the focus area is changed.
156
AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)
INTERLOCK SPOT AE & FOCUS AREA
Choose ON to meter the current focus frame when SPOT or
MULTI metering is selected.
Options
ON
OFF
xF INSTANT AF SETTING
Choose whether the camera focuses using single AF (AF-S) or
continuous AF (AF-C) when a button to which focus lock or
AF-ON is assigned is pressed in manual focus mode.
Option
AF-S
AF-C
Description
The camera focuses when the button is pressed.
The camera focuses while the button is pressed.
N Any changes made using this item also apply in movie mode (P 208).
xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE
Choose the basis for the depth-of-field scale.
6
Description
Provides a precision reference for use when assessing depth of field
PIXEL BASIS for pictures that will be viewed at high resolutions on computers
or other electronic displays.
Provides a practical reference for use when assessing depth of field
FILM FORMAT
for pictures that will be viewed at lower resolutions, for example
BASIS
as prints.
N Any changes made using this item also apply in movie mode (P 209).
157
The Shooting Menus
Option
RELEASE/FOCUS PRIORITY
Choose how the camera focuses in focus mode AF-S or AF-C.
Option
RELEASE
FOCUS
Description
Shutter response is prioritized over focus. Pictures can be taken
when the camera is not in focus.
Focus is prioritized over shutter response. Pictures can be only
taken when the camera is in focus.
O Regardless of the option selected, pictures can still be taken when the
camera is not in focus if ON is selected for AF+MF.
6
The Shooting Menus
158
AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)
xF AF RANGE LIMITER
Limit the range of available focus distances for increased focus
speed.
Option
OFF
CUSTOM
PRESET1
PRESET2
Description
Focus limiter disabled.
Limit focus to a range of distances defined by a minimum and
maximum.
• OK: Limit focus to the selected range.
• SET: Choose two objects and limit focus to the distance between them.
Limit focus to a preset range.
O • Choosing a focus range that includes distances shorter than the minimum focus distance of the lens disables the focus limiter.
• The values listed and displayed for the focus limiter may differ from
the actual focus distance.
• Focus range can be set independently on lenses equipped with focus range selectors. Be sure that the option selected in the camera
menus overlaps with that chosen with the lens.
-
range.
Instead of tapping an object in the display, you set the maximum
focus distance to infinity by rotating the focus ring.
• Any changes made using this item also apply in movie mode (P 209).
159
The Shooting Menus
N • The following additional operations can be performed when CUSTOM
is selected:
- You can tap objects in the touch screen display to choose the focus
6
TOUCH SCREEN MODE
Choose the shooting operations performed using touch controls.
Mode
Description
Tap your subject in the display to focus and release the shutter.
TOUCH
In burst mode, pictures will be taken while you keep your finger
SHOOTING on the display.
• In focus mode S (AF-S), the camera focuses when you tap your
AF
AF OFF
subject in the display. Focus locks at the current distance until
you tap the AF OFF icon.
• In focus mode C (AF-C), the camera initiates focus when you
tap your subject display. The camera will continue to adjust
focus for changes in the distance to the subject until you tap
the AF OFF icon.
• In manual focus mode (MF), you can tap the display to focus
on the selected subject using autofocus.
AREA
Tap to select a point for focus or zoom. The focus frame will
move to the selected point.
OFF
Touch screen mode off.
6
The Shooting Menus
N • The behavior of the touch screen varies with the AF mode.
• To disable touch controls and hide the touch screen mode indicator, select OFF for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCH SCREEN
SETTING > x TOUCH SCREEN SETTING.
160
AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)
Touch Controls for Focus Zoom
Different touch controls are used during focus zoom (focus check enabled).
Central Area
Tapping the center of the display performs the
operations below.
Mode
TOUCH SHOOTING
AF
AREA
OFF
Still Photography
AF-S/MF: Take a picture
AF-S: AF
MF: Instant AF
AF-S: AF
MF: Instant AF
AF-S/MF: OFF
Other Areas
Tapping other areas simply scrolls the display,
whether during still photography or movie recording and regardless of the option selected
for touch screen mode.
6
The Shooting Menus
161
SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)
Adjust shooting options for still photography.
To display shooting settings, press MENU/OK
in the photo shooting display and select
the A (SHOOTING SETTING) tab.
N The options available vary with the shooting mode selected.
SHOOTING SETTING
DRIVE SETTING
SPORTS FINDER MODE
PRE-SHOT
SELF-TIMER
SAVE SELF-TIMER SETTING
SELF-TIMER LAMP
PHOTOMETRY
SHUTTER TYPE
EXIT
DRIVE SETTING
Adjust settings for the various drive modes.
BKT SETTING
Choose the bracketing type and adjust bracketing options for
the BKT drive mode.
6
BKT SELECT
The following options are available when BKT is selected for drive
mode.
The Shooting Menus
O AE BKT
W ISO BKT
X FILM SIMULATION BKT
162
Bracketing type
V WHITE BALANCE BKT
Y DYNAMIC RANGE BKT
Z FOCUS BKT
SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)
AE BKT
The following options are available when O AE BKT is chosen
for BKT SELECT.
Option
FRAMES/STEP SETTING
1 FRAME/CONTINUOUS
SEQUENCE SETTING
Description
Choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence
and the amount exposure is varied with each shot.
• FRAMES: Choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence.
• STEP: Choose the amount exposure is varied with
each shot.
• 1 FRAME: The shots in the bracketing sequence are
taken one at a time.
• CONTINUOUS: The shots in the bracketing sequence are
taken in a single burst.
Choose the order in which the shots are taken.
ISO BKT
The following options are available when W ISO BKT is chosen
for BKT SELECT.
Options
±2⁄3
6
±1
FILM SIMULATION BKT
Choose the three film simulation types used for film simulation
bracketing (P 122).
WHITE BALANCE BKT
The following options are available when V WHITE BALANCE
BKT is chosen for BKT SELECT.
±1
Options
±2
±3
163
The Shooting Menus
±1⁄3
FOCUS BKT SETTING
Choose from AUTO and MANUAL focus bracketing modes.
• MANUAL: In MANUAL mode, you choose the following.
Option
FRAMES
STEP
INTERVAL
Description
Choose the number of shots.
Choose the amount focus changes with each shot.
Choose the interval between shots.
Focus and FRAMES/STEP
The relation between focus and the options chosen for FRAMES and
STEP is shown in the illustration.
Step
Frames
6
1
2
3
4
5
Starting focus position
The Shooting Menus
• Focus proceeds from the starting position toward infinity.
• Small STEP values translate to small changes in focus, larger values to larger
changes.
• Regardless of the option chosen for FRAMES, shooting ends when focus
reaches infinity.
164
SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)
• AUTO: In AUTO mode, the camera calculates FRAMES and STEP
automatically.
1
Navigate to A SHOOTING SETTING > DRIVE SETTING >
BKT SETTING in the photo menus, highlight FOCUS BKT,
and press MENU/OK.
2
Select AUTO and choose an INTERVAL.
The view through the lens will be displayed.
3
Focus on the nearest end of the
subject and press MENU/OK.
The selected focus distance appears as A on the focus distance
indicator.
FOCUS BKT SETTING
SET POINT A
CONTROL THE FOCUS RING
SET POINT B
SET
same focus range can be chosen by focusing on the farthest
N The
end of the subject first.
4
FOCUS BKT SETTING
SET POINT B
CONTROL THE FOCUS RING
SET POINT A
6
SET
of pressing the DISP/BACK button, you can press MENU/OK
N Instead
and select A again.
5
Take photographs.
The camera will calculate values for
FRAMES and STEP automatically.
The number of frames will appear
in the display.
NO
165
The Shooting Menus
Focus on the farthest end of the
subject and press DISP/BACK.
The selected focus distance (B) and
focus range (A to B) appear on the
focus distance indicator.
CH HIGH SPEED BURST
Select the frame rate used when the drive dial is rotated to
CH (continuous high speed). The display frame rate when the
electronic shutter is used is 40 fps, or 60 fps in 1.29× crop mode.
20fps(1.29X CROP) R 1
15fps 2
Options
13fps(1.29X CROP) R 1
10fps 3
10fps(1.29X CROP) R 1
1 Available with electronic shutter only.
2 13 fps with electronic shutter.
3 8.9 fps with electronic shutter.
CL LOW SPEED BURST
Select the frame rate used when the drive dial is rotated to
CL (continuous low speed).
7.0fps *
Options
5.0fps
3.0fps
* 6.7 fps with electronic shutter.
6
The Shooting Menus
HDR MODE
Each time the shutter button is pressed, the camera takes three
shots, varying exposure each time, and combines them into a
single picture. The resulting photograph preserves details in
highlights and shadows (P 107).
ADV. FILTER SETTING
Choose the filter used when the drive dial is rotated to ADV. (P 110).
166
SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)
SPORTS FINDER MODE
Take pictures using the crop in the center
of the display. Choose this option for pictures of athletes, birds, and other moving
subjects.
Option
ON
OFF
Description
Pictures are taken using a 1.29× crop, reducing the picture angle by an
amount equivalent to increasing lens focal length by 1.29×; the crop
is shown by a frame in the display.
The 1.29× crop is disabled.
N • The H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > IMAGE SIZE item in the shooting menu is fixed at P.
• The sports finder is not available in modes that offer an electronic
shutter.
6
The Shooting Menus
167
PRE-SHOT sJ
To reduce the lag between your pressing the shutter button all the
way down and the resulting picture being recorded to the memory
card, the camera starts shooting with the electronic shutter when the
shutter button is pressed halfway and saves a series shots starting
just before the shutter button is pressed the rest of the way down.
Options
ON
OFF
N • Pre-shot photography is available only when s ELECTRONIC
SHUTTER is selected in CH (high speed burst) drive mode (P 170).
• Flash photography is disabled.
SELF-TIMER
Choose a shutter release delay.
Option
6
The Shooting Menus
Description
The shutter is released two seconds after the shutter button is pressed.
Use to reduce blur caused by the camera moving when the shutter
R 2 SEC
button is pressed. The self-timer lamp blinks as the timer counts
down.
The shutter is released ten seconds after the shutter button is pressed.
S 10 SEC Use for photographs in which you wish to appear yourself. The
self-timer lamp blinks immediately before the picture is taken.
OFF
Self-timer off.
If an option other than OFF is selected, the
timer will start when the shutter button is
pressed all the way down. The display shows
the number of seconds remaining until the
shutter is released. To stop the timer before
the picture is taken, press DISP/BACK.
9
O • Stand behind the camera when using the shutter button. Standing in
front of the lens can interfere with focus and exposure.
• The self-timer turns off automatically when the camera is turned off.
168
SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)
SAVE SELF-TIMER SETTING
If ON is selected, the chosen self-timer setting will remain in effect after a picture is taken or the camera is turned off.
Options
ON
OFF
SELF-TIMER LAMP
If ON is selected, the self-timer lamp will light during self-timer
photography. Select OFF when shooting night scenes or in other
situations in which you would prefer that the lamp remain unlit.
Options
ON
OFF
PHOTOMETRY
Choose how the camera meters exposure (P 98).
6
The Shooting Menus
169
SHUTTER TYPE
Choose the shutter type. Choose the electronic shutter to mute
the shutter sound.
Option
t MECHANICAL SHUTTER
s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER
t E-FRONT CURTAIN
SHUTTER
u MECHANICAL +
ELECTRONIC
v E-FRONT +
MECHANICAL
Description
Take pictures with the mechanical shutter.
Take pictures with the electronic shutter.
Take pictures with the electronic front curtain shutter.
The camera chooses the mechanical or electronic
shutter according to shooting conditions.
The camera chooses the mechanical or electronic
front curtain shutter according to shooting conditions.
The camera chooses the mechanical, electronic, or
w E-FRONT +
electronic front curtain shutter according to shooting
MECHANICAL + ELECTRONIC
conditions.
6
If s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER, u MECHANICAL + ELECTRONIC,
or w E-FRONT + MECHANICAL + ELECTRONIC is selected, shutter speeds faster than 1⁄8000 s can be chosen by rotating the shutter speed dial to 8000 and then rotating the rear command dial.
The Shooting Menus
O • When using the electronic shutter, note the following:
- Distortion may be visible in shots of moving subjects.
- Distortion may also be visible in hand-held shots taken at high
shutter speeds; use of a tripod is recommended.
Banding and fog may occur in shots taken under fluorescent lights
or other flickering or erratic illumination.
- When taking pictures with the shutter muted (P 279), respect
your subjects’ image rights and right to privacy.
• When using the electronic front-curtain shutter, note the following:
- Faster shutter speeds are more likely to result in uneven exposure
and loss of resolution in out-of-focus areas of the frame.
-
N The following restrictions apply when the electronic shutter is used:
• Sensitivity is restricted to values of ISO 12800–125
• Long exposure noise reduction has no effect
• The flash will not fire unless pixel-shift multi-shot is enabled.
170
SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)
INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING
Configure the camera to take photos automatically at a preset
interval.
1
2
Highlight INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING
in the A (SHOOTING SETTING) tab
and press MENU/OK.
INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING
Highlight WITH IN-CAMERA TIMER
and press MENU/OK.
Interval-timer settings will be displayed.
INTERVAL/NUMBER OF TIMES
WITH IN-CAMERA TIMER
WITH EXTERNAL TIMER
INTERVAL
NUMBER OF TIMES
END
CANCEL
you are using a remote release with its own timer, select WITH
N IfEXTERNAL
TIMER. You will be returned to the shooting display,
where you can start interval-timer photography using the remote
release.
Use the selector to choose the interval
and number of shots. Press MENU/OK to
proceed.
START WAITING TIME
LATER
ESTIMATED START TIME
START
4
PM
CANCEL
Use the selector to choose the starting time and then press MENU/OK.
Shooting will start automatically.
CANCEL
O Interval timer photography cannot be used at a shutter speed of
“bulb” or with multiple exposure photography. In burst mode, only
one picture will be taken each time the shutter is released.
171
The Shooting Menus
3
6
N • Use of a tripod is recommended.
• We recommend using an AC-5VJ AC power adapter.
• To view the pictures taken so far, press the a button during inter-
val-timer photography. To return to the shooting display, press the
a button again or wait until the start of the next interval.
• The display turns off between shots and lights a few seconds before
the next shot is taken.
• The display can be activated at any time by pressing the shutter button.
• The indicator lamp blinks green whenever the displays are off during
interval-timer photography.
• To continue shooting until the number of shots taken equals the
number of exposures remaining at the time interval-timer photography started, set the number of shots to ∞.
INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING EXPOSURE SMOOTHING
Select ON to automatically adjust exposure during interval-timer
photography to prevent it changing dramatically between shots.
Options
ON
6
OFF
The Shooting Menus
O • Large changes in subject brightness may make exposure appear er-
ratic. We recommend that you choose shorter values for INTERVAL
TIMER SHOOTING > INTERVAL with subjects that brighten or dim
dramatically during shooting.
• In manual mode (mode M), exposure smoothing is only available if an
A (auto) option is selected for sensitivity.
172
INTERVAL PRIORITY MODE
If ON is selected, the camera will adjust shutter speed during interval-timer photography to ensure that exposures are not longer than the interval between photographs.
Options
ON
OFF
O This option takes effect only when shutter speed is set to A (auto).
FLICKER REDUCTION
Reduce flicker in pictures and the display when shooting under
fluorescent lighting and other similar light sources.
Option
ALL FRAMES
FIRST FRAME
OFF
Description
Flicker reduction is applied to all frames continuous
shooting frame rate reduces.
Flicker measurement is taken prior to the first frame only
and the same reduction amount is applied to all subsequent frames that flicker may occur.
Flicker reduction disabled.
ter is used.
• Flicker reduction is not available during movie recording.
173
The Shooting Menus
O • Flicker reduction increases the time needed to record pictures.
• OFF is selected for FLICKER REDUCTION when the electronic shut-
6
FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING
Select ON to allow shutter speed to be fine-tuned to reduce flicker caused by LED lighting and the like.
Options
ON
OFF
N This option takes effect only in modes S and M.
IS MODE
Turn image stabilization on or off.
Option
CONTINUOUS
SHOOTING ONLY
OFF
6
Description
Image stabilization on.
Image stabilization enabled only when the shutter button
is pressed halfway (focus mode C) or the shutter is released.
Image stabilization off ; x appears in the display.
N • The setting selected with the lens image stabilization switch, if any,
takes priority over the setting chosen with IS MODE.
• Note that vibration or camera sounds may be noticeable as image
stabilization takes effect.
The Shooting Menus
174
SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)
ISO AUTO SETTING
Choose the base sensitivity, maximum sensitivity, and minimum
shutter speed for use when ISO sensitivity is set to A (auto). Settings for AUTO1, AUTO2, and AUTO3 can be stored separately
(P 97).
DIGITAL TELE-CONV.
Zoom in on your subject during shooting using ultra-high-resolution digital zoom.
Option
2.0x
1.4x
OFF
Description
Take pictures using 2× zoom. O- and P-size pictures
are automatically cropped to size Q.
Take pictures using 1.4× zoom. O-size pictures are automatically cropped to size P.
Digital teleconverter off.
O Image quality may drop when the digital teleconverter is used.
N The digital teleconverter cannot be used when a 1.29× crop is selected
175
6
The Shooting Menus
during burst photography or when ON is selected for SPORTS FINDER
MODE.
MULTI EXPOSURE
Choose how the camera combines shots to create a multiple exposure.
Option
ON
6
The Shooting Menus
OFF
Description
Adjust multiple exposure settings and record multiple exposures.
• ADDITIVE: The camera adds the exposures together. You may
need to lower exposure compensation depending on the
number of shots.
• AVERAGE: The camera automatically optimizes exposure for the
final picture. The background in series shot without changing
the composition will be optimally exposed.
• BRIGHT: The camera compares the exposures and chooses only
the brightest pixel at each location. Colors may be mixed depending on their brightness and hue.
• DARK: The camera compares the exposures and chooses only
the darkest pixel at each location. Colors may be mixed depending on their brightness and hue.
Multiple exposure mode disabled.
N The camera can combine up to nine exposures.
176
SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)
PIXEL SHIFT MULTI SHOT
The camera takes a series of 20 shots, using in-body image stabilization to move the image sensor by half a pixel with each
shot and recording each frame in RAW format. Using specialized
computer software, the frames can then be combined to create a
high-resolution RAW picture.
1
Navigate to A SHOOTING SETTING in the photo menus,
highlight PIXEL SHIFT MULTI SHOT, and press MENU/OK.
2
Choose a value for INTERVAL.
• We recommend setting INTERVAL to SHORTEST.
• If you intend to use the flash with every shot, choose a value for INTERVAL long enough to allow the flash to charge
between shots.
3
Press the shutter button to start shooting.
• The shots are recorded to the memory card in RAW format.
• To minimize vibration, use the self-timer or a remote release.
Combine the shots on a computer.
• The shots can be combined using FUJIFILM Pixel Shift Combiner.
• To save high-resolution RAW pictures in other formats, use
Capture One Express for Fujifilm, Capture One for Fujifilm,
or Capture One Pro, available from Capture One A/S. FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO and RAW FILE CONVERTER EX powered
by SILKYPIX cannot be used for this purpose.
177
The Shooting Menus
4
6
N • Visit the websites below to learn more about or download the following computer software:
-
FUJIFILM Pixel Shift Combiner:
https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/pixel-shift-combiner/
Capture One Express for Fujifilm:
https://www.captureone.com/products-plans/capture-one-express/fujifilm
Capture One for Fujifilm:
https://www.captureone.com/explore-features/fujifilm
Capture One Pro:
https://www.captureone.com/explore-features
• Pixel-shift multi-shot photography can be performed via tethered
shooting. For this purpose, use FUJIFILM Pixel Shift Combiner.
• The flash will synchronize with the shutter at shutter speeds of ½5 s
or slower.
• The following limitations apply to the use of the pixel-shift multi-shot
option:
-
-
6
The Shooting Menus
-
Pixel-shift multi-shot photography can only be performed using the electronic shutter.
Sensitivity is restricted to a maximum of ISO 1600. Choosing higher values
or a setting of AUTO results in a sensitivity of ISO 1600, while lower values
remain unchanged.
The only option available for RAW RECORDING is LOSSLESS COMPRESSED.
Pictures taken with C (AF-C) selected for focus mode will be shot in focus
mode S (AF-S). Pictures taken with S (AF-S) or M (manual) selected are shot
in the chosen focus mode.
If the subject or camera moves during shooting, the desired results may
not be achieved when the shots are combined.
A SHOOTING SETTING > FLICKER REDUCTION is automatically set to OFF.
The value selected for exposure compensation applies to all 20 shots.
Playback
Pictures taken using the pixel-shift multi-shot
option are indicated by a pixel-shift multi-shot
icon in full-frame playback (P 220).
178
SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)
xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
Connect to smartphones running the latest version of apps. The
smartphone can then be used to:
• Control the camera and take pictures remotely
• Receive pictures uploaded from the camera
• Browse the pictures on the camera and download selected pictures
• Upload location data to the camera
N For more information, visit:
https://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/
6
The Shooting Menus
179
FLASH SETTING (Still Photography)
Adjust flash-related settings for still photography.
To display flash settings, press MENU/OK
in the photo shooting display and select
the F (FLASH SETTING) tab.
FLASH SETTING
FLASH FUNCTION SETTING
RED EYE REMOVAL
TTL-LOCK MODE
LED LIGHT SETTING
COMMANDER SETTING
CH SETTING
EXIT
FLASH FUNCTION SETTING
Choose a flash control mode, flash mode,
or sync mode or adjust the flash level.
The options available vary with the flash.
N For more information on flash settings, see
“External Flash Units” (P 341) in “Peripherals and Optional Accessories”.
6
MODE
EF-X8
ADJUST
RED EYE REMOVAL
Remove red-eye effects caused by the flash.
The Shooting Menus
Option
FLASH
OFF
Description
Flash red-eye reduction only.
Flash red-eye reduction and digital red-eye removal off.
N Flash red-eye reduction can be used in TTL flash control mode.
180
END
FLASH SETTING (Still Photography)
TTL-LOCK MODE
Instead of adjusting flash level with each shot, TTL flash control
can be locked for consistent results across a series of photographs.
Option
Description
Flash output is locked at the value metered for the most
LOCK WITH LAST FLASH
recent photo.
LOCK WITH METERING The camera emits a series of pre-flashes and locks flash
FLASH
output at the metered value.
N • To use TTL lock, assign TTL-LOCK to a camera control and then use
the control to enable or disable TTL lock (P 321).
• Flash compensation can be adjusted while TTL lock is in effect.
• Selecting LOCK WITH LAST FLASH displays an error message if no
previously metered value exists.
LED LIGHT SETTING
Choose whether to use the flash unit’s LED video light (if available) as a catchlight or AF-assist illuminator when taking photos.
Role of LED video light in still photography
Catchlight
AF-assist illuminator
AF-assist illuminator and catchlight
None
N In some cases, this option can also be accessed via the FLASH FUNCTION
SETTING menu.
181
The Shooting Menus
Option
CATCHLIGHT
AF ASSIST
AF ASSIST+CATCHLIGHT
OFF
6
FLASH SETTING (Still Photography)
COMMANDER SETTING
Choose groups when using the camera flash unit as a commander for Fujifilm optical wireless remote flash control. This option is
available when the camera is used with clip-on flash units that
support Fujifilm optical wireless flash control.
Options
Gr A
Gr B
Gr C
OFF
N In some cases, this option can also be accessed via the FLASH FUNCTION
SETTING menu.
CH SETTING
Choose the channel used for communication between the commander and remote flash units. Separate channels can be used
for different flash systems or to prevent interference when multiple systems are operating in close proximity.
Options
6
CH1
The Shooting Menus
182
CH2
CH3
CH4
MOVIE SETTING (Still Photography)
Adjust options for movies shot during still photography
using function buttons that have been assigned MOVIE
RECORDING RELEASE.
To display movie settings, press MENU/OK
in the photo shooting display and select
the B (MOVIE SETTING) tab.
N The options available vary with the shooting mode selected.
MOVIE SETTING
MOVIE MODE
HIGH SPEED REC
MEDIA REC SETTING
F IS MODE
F IS MODE BOOST
AUDIO SETTING
FREC FRAME INDICATOR
EXIT
MOVIE MODE
This item is also found in the movie menus (P 188). Changes
here also apply to the item in the movie menus.
HIGH SPEED REC
This item is also found in the movie menus (P 189). Changes
here also apply to the item in the movie menus.
183
The Shooting Menus
MEDIA REC SETTING
This item is also found in the movie menus (P 190). Changes
here also apply to the item in the movie menus.
6
F IS MODE
This item is also found in the movie menus (P 196). Changes
here also apply to the item in the movie menus.
F IS MODE BOOST
This item is also found in the movie menus (P 196). Changes
here also apply to the item in the movie menus.
AUDIO SETTING
Adjust audio-related settings for movie recording.
INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the recording level for the built-in microphone.
Option
AUTO
MANUAL
OFF
6
Description
The camera adjusts the recording level automatically.
Adjust the recording level manually. Choose from 25 recording
levels.
Turn the built-in microphone off.
The Shooting Menus
EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the recording level for external microphones.
Option
AUTO
MANUAL
OFF
184
Description
The camera adjusts the recording level automatically.
Adjust the recording level manually. Choose from 25 recording
levels.
Disable recording using external microphones.
MOVIE SETTING (Still Photography)
MIC JACK SETTING
Specify the type of hardware connected to the microphone jack.
Option
MIC
LINE
Description
Choose this option for direct connection to an external microphone.
Choose this option for external audio devices connected via
line output.
MIC LEVEL LIMITER
Reduces distortion caused by input that exceeds the limits of the
microphone’s audio circuits.
Options
ON
OFF
WIND FILTER
Choose whether to enable wind noise reduction during movie
recording.
6
Options
OFF
LOW CUT FILTER
Choose whether to enable the low-cut filter, reducing low-frequency noise during movie recording.
Options
ON
OFF
HEADPHONES VOLUME
Adjust the headphone volume.
Option
0
1—10
Description
Mute output to the headphones.
Choose a volume of from 1 to 10.
185
The Shooting Menus
ON
MOVIE SETTING (Still Photography)
XLR MIC ADAPTER SETTING
Adjust microphone input channel settings and the like for use
with XLR microphone adapters.
Option
6
The Shooting Menus
Description
Record four-channel (quadraphonic) sound with the
help of the camera’s built-in microphone, or two-channel
(stereo) sound using only a microphone connected via the
XLR microphone adapter.
MIC INPUT CHANNEL • 4ch XLR+CAMERA: Record four-channel sound with
the help of the camera’s built-in microphone.
• 2ch XLR ONLY: Record two-channel sound using
only an external microphone connected via the XLR
microphone adapter.
Choose the source of sound output to headphones or
other audio monitors during movie recording.
XLR: Monitor sound from external microphones con•
4ch AUDIO MONITORING
nected via the XLR microphone adapter.
• CAMERA: Monitor sound from camera’s built-in microphone.
Choose source of audio output to the HDMI connector.
• XLR: Audio from external microphones connected via
HDMI 4ch AUDIO
the XLR microphone adapter is output to the HDMI conOUTPUT
nector.
• CAMERA: Audio from camera’s built-in microphone is
output to the HDMI connector.
N • If an external microphone is connected to the camera’s microphone
jack, audio will be recorded not via the camera’s built-in microphone
but via the external microphone instead.
• Four-channel recording is available only when MOV is selected for
movie file format.
F REC FRAME INDICATOR
This item is also found in the movie menus (P 198). Changes
here also apply to the item in the movie menus.
186
MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)
Adjust movie-recording options.
To display options for movie recording,
press MENU/OK in the movie shooting display and select the B (MOVIE SETTING)
tab.
MOVIE SETTING
MOVIE SETTING LIST
MOVIE MODE
HIGH SPEED REC
FSELF-TIMER
MEDIA REC SETTING
HDMI OUTPUT SETTING
FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION
F-Log/HLG RECORDING
EXIT
MOVIE SETTING LIST
View current movie recording settings.
N These options can also be viewed by pressing the DISP/BACK button while
the movie quick menu is displayed.
6
The Shooting Menus
187
MOVIE MODE
Before shooting movies, choose the
frame rate and the frame size and aspect
ratio.
MOVIE MODE
HIGH QUALITY 4K MOVIE
WITH 6.2K OVERSAMPLING
CANNOT USE S.S. SLOWER THAN FRAMERATE
END
CANCEL
1
In the shooting menu, select B MOVIE SETTING, then highlight MOVIE MODE and press MENU/OK.
2
Press the selector up or down to highlight the desired frame
size and aspect ratio (A) and press the selector right.
• Choose J16 : 9 for 6.2 K movies with an aspect ratio of
16 : 9.
• Choose T16:9 or W17:9 for high-quality 4 K movies
with aspect ratios of 16 or 17 to 9.
• Choose V16 : 9 or d17 : 9 for 4K movies with aspect ratios of 16 or 17 to 9.
• Choose W16 : 9 or W17 : 9 for Full HD movies with aspect
ratios of 16 or 17 to 9.
3
Highlight a frame rate (B) and press MENU/OK.
6
The Shooting Menus
23.98P
24P
25P
Options
29.97P
50P
N The choice of frame rates varies with the movie mode.
188
59.94P
MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)
HIGH SPEED REC
Record high-frame-rate movies. High-frame-rate movies can be
played back in slow motion, giving you time to view fast-moving
subjects or details too fleeting for the naked eye. Select ON to
choose the recording and playback rates separately.
N Choose ON HDMI ONLY to record footage only to external recorders
connected via HDMI. Note that this option does not support playback
frame-rate selection.
Frame Size
Options
W16 : 9
W17 : 9
Playback
23.98P
24P
25P
Options
29.97P
50P
59.94P
6
Recording
120P
200P
240P
N • High-speed movies are recorded with no sound.
• The footage recorded to the memory card is compressed with the
goal of maintaining the selected bit rate.
• The options available for playback rate vary with the option selected
for rate of recording.
189
The Shooting Menus
Options
100P
F SELF-TIMER
Choose the delay between the shutter button being pressed all
the way down and the start of recording.
• The display shows the number of seconds remaining before recording begins.
• To stop the timer before recording begins, press DISP/BACK.
Options
3 SEC
5 SEC
10 SEC
OFF
MEDIA REC SETTING
Choose movie file settings, including destination, file type, compression, and bit rate.
6
MEDIA REC SETTING
Choose movie file settings, including destination, file type, and
compression.
The Shooting Menus
Destination
Choose save options and save and output destinations for movies.
Option
x
y
z
U
Description
Footage is recorded to the memory card in Slot 1 until the card
fills. Any additional footage will then automatically be recorded to the card in Slot 2.
Footage is recorded to the memory card in Slot 2 until the card
fills. Any additional footage will then automatically be recorded to the card in Slot 1.
Each movie is recorded twice, once to each card.
Movies are recorded only to devices connected via HDMI.
O The current movie mode applies to both copies; settings for backup
copies cannot be adjusted separately.
190
MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)
File Type and Compression
Choose the movie file type and compression.
Option
H.264 ALL-I 420
MOV
H.264 LongGOP 420
MOV
H.264 LongGOP 420
MP4
H.265 ALL-I 420
MOV
H.265 LongGOP 420
MOV
H.265 ALL-I 422
MOV
N • 4 : 2 : 2 chroma sub-sampling is used for footage output to external
devices connected via HDMI; H.264 footage is output at a bit depth of
8 bits and footage in other formats at a depth of 10 bits.
• All-I compresses each frame separately. Files are larger, but the fact
that the data for each frame are saved separately makes this a good
choice for footage that will be further processed.
• Long GOP balances good image quality with high compression. Files
are smaller, making it a good choice for longer movies.
• The options available for file type and compression vary with the options selected for MOVIE MODE, HIGH SPEED REC, and F-Log/HLG
RECORDING.
191
6
The Shooting Menus
H.265 LongGOP 422
MOV
Description
A highly-portable compressed format. Footage is recorded
at a depth of 8 bits using All-I interframe compression and
4 : 2 : 0 chroma sub-sampling.
A highly-portable compressed format. Footage is recorded
at a depth of 8 bits using Long GOP interframe compression
and 4 : 2 : 0 chroma sub-sampling.
A format suitable for movies that will be uploaded to the
web.
A format with a higher compression ratio than H.264. Footage is recorded at a depth of 10 bits using All-I interframe
compression and 4 : 2 : 0 chroma sub-sampling.
A format with a higher compression ratio than H.264. Footage is recorded at a depth of 10 bits using Long GOP interframe compression and 4 : 2 : 0 chroma sub-sampling.
A format with a higher compression ratio than H.264. Footage is recorded at a depth of 10 bits using All-I interframe
compression and 4 : 2 : 2 chroma sub-sampling.
A format with a higher compression ratio than H.264. Footage is recorded at a depth of 10 bits using Long GOP interframe compression and 4 : 2 : 2 chroma sub-sampling.
Bit Rate
Choose the movie bit rate.
Options
50Mbps
100Mbps
200Mbps
360Mbps
N The options available for bit rate vary with the settings chosen for high-
speed movie recording and compression. The actual bit rate may be
slower than the selected value depending on the subject.
HDMI OUTPUT SETTING
Adjust settings for use when the shooting display is output to an
HDMI device.
HDMI OUTPUT INFO DISPLAY
If ON is selected, HDMI devices to which the camera is connected
will mirror the information in the camera display.
Options
ON
6
OFF
The Shooting Menus
HDMI REC CONTROL
Choose whether the camera sends movie start and stop signals
to the HDMI device when the shutter button is pressed to start
and stop movie recording.
Options
ON
192
OFF
MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)
RAW OUTPUT SETTING
Choose whether to output RAW footage to external recorders
connected via HDMI.
Option
Description
RAW OUTPUT
Output RAW footage to ATOMOS video recorders.
SETTING ATOMOS
RAW OUTPUT
Output RAW footage to Blackmagic Design video recorders.
SETTING Blackmagic
OFF
Do not output RAW footage to external recorders.
N • Movie frame size automatically changes to 6.2K.
• RAW footage output to external devices is not saved to the memory
cards inserted in the camera.
• In-camera image enhancements are not applied to the RAW output.
• ISO sensitivity is restricted to values between ISO 800 and ISO 12800.
• Footage output to external devices is generated from the original
FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION
Fix the movie crop ratio at 1.25∶1. This makes it easier to match
crops after changing movie settings.
Options
ON
OFF
193
6
The Shooting Menus
RAW data and its quality, which varies with device specifications, may
not be equal to that achieved as the end result of post-production
or the like.
• Focus zoom is not available when RAW is selected for HDMI output.
• RAW footage output via HDMI to incompatible devices will not display correctly but will instead will display as a mosaic.
• RAW output is disabled in some movie and high-speed recording
modes.
F-Log/HLG RECORDING
Choose the destination for F‐Log and HLG (Hybrid Log-Gamma)
movies shot while the camera is connected to an HDMI device.
Option
Description
The footage is processed using film simulation and both
cPYP
saved to the memory card and output to the HDMI device.
The footage is recorded to the memory card and output to
c F-Log Y F-Log
the HDMI device in F-Log format.
The footage is recorded to the memory card and output to
c FLog2 Y FLog2
the HDMI device in F-Log2 format.
The footage is recorded to the memory card and output to
c HLG Y HLG
the HDMI device in HLG format.
N • F-Log and FLog2 offer gentle gamma curves with wide gamuts suit-
6
The Shooting Menus
able for further processing post-production. Sensitivity is restricted to
values between ISO 500 and ISO 12800 (F-Log) or between ISO 1000
and ISO 12800 (FLog2).
• The HLG (Hybrid Log-Gamma) recording format conforms to the international ITU-R BT2100 standard. When viewed on HLG-compatible
displays, high-quality HLG footage faithfully captures high-contrast
scenes and vivid colors. Sensitivity is restricted to values between
ISO 800 and ISO 12800.
• Film simulation (P) footage is recorded using the option selected
for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > F FILM SIMULATION in the
shooting menu.
194
MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)
DATA LEVEL SETTING
Choose a signal range for movie recording.
Option
VIDEO RANGE
FULL RANGE
Description
The signal range for 8-bit movies is limited to 16–235 and that
for 10-bit movies to 64–940.
The signal ranges for 8-bit and 10-bit movies are respectively
0–255 and 0–1023.
F PHOTOMETRY
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 98).
F FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 174).
Options
ON
OFF
6
The Shooting Menus
195
F IS MODE
Turn image stabilization on or off.
Option
IBIS/OIS
IBIS/OIS + DIS
OFF
Description
Enable in-body (IBIS) and optical (OIS) image stabilization.
IBIS is used with lenses that do not support OIS.
Enable in-body (IBIS), optical (OIS), and digital (DIS) image
stabilization. The crop is adjusted according to the option
selected for MOVIE MODE.
Image stabilization off ; x appears in the display.
N • The setting selected with the lens image stabilization switch, if any,
takes priority over the setting chosen with the IS mode.
• Note that vibration or camera sounds may be noticeable as image
stabilization takes effect.
F IS MODE BOOST
Choose the image stabilization level.
Option
ON
OFF
6
Description
Suitable for hand-held shooting with no panning.
Suitable for hand-held shooting with panning.
The Shooting Menus
N Assigning IS MODE BOOST to a function button allows the image stabilization level to be changed while recording is in progress (P 321).
196
MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)
ZEBRA SETTING
Highlights that may be overexposed are shown by zebra stripes
in the movie mode display.
Option
ZEBRA RIGHT
ZEBRA LEFT
OFF
Description
Right-slanting stripes.
Left-slanting stripes.
Stripes off.
ZEBRA LEVEL
Choose the brightness threshold for the zebra stripe display.
50
55
60
65
70
Options
75
80
85
90
95
100
6
The Shooting Menus
197
MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL
Select ON to allow movie settings to be adjusted using only the
command dials and touch-screen controls. You may find this
helpful in preventing the sounds of camera controls being recorded with movies (P 28).
Options
ON
OFF
F REC FRAME INDICATOR
If ON is selected, the borders of the display will turn red during
movie recording.
Options
ON
OFF
N The borders are displayed in green during high-speed movie recording.
6
The Shooting Menus
198
MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)
TALLY LIGHT
Choose the lamp (indicator or AF-assist) that lights during movie
recording and whether the lamp blinks or remains steady.
Indicator lamp
Description
The indicator lamp lights during movie recording.
The indicator lamp blinks during movie recording.
The indicator and AF-assist lamps light during movie recording.
The AF-assist lamp lights during movie recording.
6
The indicator and AF-assist lamps blink during movie recording.
The AF-assist lamp blinks during movie recording.
The indicator and AF-assist lamps remain off during movie recording.
199
The Shooting Menus
Option
FRONT OFF
REAR z
FRONT OFF
REAR y
FRONT z
REAR z
FRONT z
REAR OFF
FRONT y
REAR y
FRONT y
REAR OFF
FRONT OFF
REAR OFF
AF-assist illuminator
MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)
F SELECT CUSTOM SETTING
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 134).
F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 134).
F AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 139).
xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 179).
6
The Shooting Menus
200
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Movie Recording)
Adjust image quality settings for movies.
To display image quality settings, press
MENU/OK in the movie shooting display and
select the H (IMAGE QUALITY SETTING)
tab.
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING
FFILM SIMULATION
FMONOCHROMATIC COLOR
FWHITE BALANCE
FDYNAMIC RANGE
FTONE CURVE
FCOLOR
FSHARPNESS
FHIGH ISO NR
EXIT
N The options available vary with the shooting mode selected.
F FILM SIMULATION
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 122).
F MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 124).
6
The Shooting Menus
201
F WHITE BALANCE
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 126).
F DYNAMIC RANGE
Choose a dynamic range for movie recording.
Option
V100%
W200%
X400%
Description
See “DYNAMIC RANGE” (P 130).
N • AUTO (automatic dynamic range control) is not available during
movie recording.
• W200% is available at sensitivities of from ISO 250 to ISO 12800,
X400% at sensitivities of from ISO 500 to 12800.
item is available when cPYP is selected for B MOVIE
SETTING > F-Log/HLG RECORDING.
• This
6
The Shooting Menus
F TONE CURVE
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 131).
F COLOR
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 131).
202
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Movie Recording)
F SHARPNESS
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 131).
F HIGH ISO NR
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 132).
INTERFRAME NR
Select AUTO to automatically adjust interframe noise reduction
according to shooting conditions.
Options
AUTO
OFF
N “Ghosting” may occur with moving subjects or if the camera is moved
during shooting.
6
The Shooting Menus
203
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Movie Recording)
F PERIPHERAL LIGHT CORRECTION
Select ON to enable peripheral illumination correction during
movie recording.
Options
ON
OFF
N • If ON is selected when a lens that does not transmit data to the camera
is attached, peripheral illumination will be adjusted according to the
option selected for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > xF MOUNT
ADAPTER SETTING > PERIPHERAL ILLUMINATION CORRECTION
in the shooting menu (P 142).
• Select OFF if you notice banding in movies recorded using this option.
xF MOUNT ADAPTOR SETTING
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 140). Changes to
one apply to the other.
6
The Shooting Menus
204
AF/MF SETTING (Movie Recording)
Adjust focus settings for movies.
To display AF/MF settings, press MENU/OK
in the movie shooting display and select
the G (AF/MF SETTING) tab.
AF/MF SETTING
FFOCUS AREA
F AF MODE
FAF-C CUSTOM SETTING
xFWRAP FOCUS POINT
xFAF ILLUMINATOR
Fg FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING
FSUBJECT DETECTION SETTING
FAF+MF
EXIT
N The options available vary with the shooting mode selected.
F FOCUS AREA
Choose the focus area for autofocus, manual focus, and focus
zoom (P 87).
O The focus area cannot be resized while recording is in progress.
F AF MODE
Choose how the camera selects the focus point for movie recording.
Description
The camera selects the focus area automatically.
The camera focuses on the subject in the selected focus area.
205
6
The Shooting Menus
Option
MULTI
AREA
F AF-C CUSTOM SETTING
Select focus-tracking options when recording movies in focus
mode C.
TRACKING SENSITIVITY
Choose how long the camera waits to switch focus when an object enters the focus area behind or in front of the current subject. See “TRACKING SENSITIVITY” (P 145).
0
Options
2
1
3
4
O • The higher the value, the longer it takes the camera to refocus when
you attempt to switch subjects.
• The lower the value, the more likely the camera is to switch focus
from your subject to other objects in the focus area.
6
AF SPEED
Adjust the autofocus response speed. Choose higher values for
faster response times, lower values for slower response times.
The Shooting Menus
−5
−4
−3
−2
−1
Options
0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
xF WRAP FOCUS POINT
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 148). Changes to
one apply to the other.
206
AF/MF SETTING (Movie Recording)
xF AF ILLUMINATOR
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 150). Changes to
one apply to the other.
Fg FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING
Enable or disable Intelligent Face Detection when recording
movies.
Option
FACE DETECTION ON
OFF
Description
See “g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING” (P 151).
Intelligent Face Detection and eye priority off.
O When Intelligent Face Detection is enabled, the camera will focus using continuous AF even when single AF (S) is chosen with the focus
mode selector. Intelligent Face Detection is not available in manual
focus mode.
F SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 153).
DETECTION ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING > F SUBJECT
DETECTION SETTING, even if the focus mode selector is rotated to S.
Subject detection is not available in manual focus mode.
F AF+MF
Select ON to enable manual focus in focus modes S and C. Manual
focus can be suspended by pressing the AFON button.
Options
ON
OFF
207
The Shooting Menus
O The camera automatically switches to continuous AF when SUBJECT
6
F MF ASSIST
Choose how focus is displayed in manual focus mode (P 94).
Option
Description
The camera heightens high-contrast outlines. Choose a
FOCUS PEAK HIGHLIGHT
color and peaking level.
A needle indicates whether focus is in front of or behind
FOCUS METER
the subject.
FOCUS METER + PEAK
Focus is indicated by both a meter and peak highlights.
HIGHLIGHT
Focus is displayed normally (focus peaking and the focus
OFF
meter are not available).
F FOCUS CHECK
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 156).
6
xF INSTANT AF SETTING
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 157). Changes to
one apply to the other.
The Shooting Menus
N Instant AF is disabled during movie recording. Use instant AF to focus
before recording begins.
208
AF/MF SETTING (Movie Recording)
xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 157). Changes to
one apply to the other.
xF AF RANGE LIMITER
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 159). Changes to
one apply to the other.
6
The Shooting Menus
209
F TOUCH SCREEN MODE
Choose the shooting operations performed using touch controls.
Mode
AF
AREA
6
The Shooting Menus
OFF
Description
Tapping the display focuses the camera on the selected point.
Use the shutter button to start and stop recording.
• In focus mode S (AF-S), you can refocus at any time by tapping
your subject in the display.
• In focus mode C (AF-C), the camera will continuously adjust
focus for changes in the distance to the subject at point selected by tapping the display.
• When shooting movies in focus mode M (MF), you can tap the
display before recording begins to focus on the selected point
using Instant AF, and tap the display during recording to position the focus point.
Tap to position the focus area. Use the shutter button to start
and stop recording.
• In focus mode S (AF-S), you can reposition the focus area at
any time by tapping your subject in the display. To focus, use
the button to which AF-ON is assigned.
• In focus mode C (AF-C), the camera will continuously adjust
focus for changes in the distance to the subject at point selected by tapping the display.
• In manual focus mode (MF), you can tap the display to position the focus area over your subject.
Touch screen mode off.
N • The behavior of the touch screen varies with the AF mode.
• To disable touch controls and hide the touch screen mode indicator, select OFF for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCH SCREEN
SETTING > x TOUCH SCREEN SETTING.
210
AF/MF SETTING (Movie Recording)
Touch Controls for Focus Zoom
Different touch controls are used during focus zoom (focus check enabled).
Central Area
Tapping the center of the display performs the
operations below.
Mode
AF
AREA
OFF
Movie Recording
AF-S: AF
MF: Instant AF
AF-S: AF
MF: Instant AF
AF-S/MF: OFF
Other Areas
Tapping other areas simply scrolls the display,
whether during still photography or movie recording and regardless of the option selected
for touch screen mode.
6
The Shooting Menus
211
AF/MF SETTING (Movie Recording)
FOCUS CHECK LOCK
Choose whether focus zoom remains in effect once movie recording begins.
Options
ON
6
The Shooting Menus
212
OFF
AUDIO SETTING (Movie Recording)
Adjust settings for audio recorded during filming.
To display audio settings, press MENU/OK
in the movie shooting display and select
the P (AUDIO SETTING) tab.
AUDIO SETTING
INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
MIC JACK SETTING
MIC LEVEL LIMITER
WIND FILTER
LOW CUT FILTER
HEADPHONES VOLUME
XLR MIC ADAPTER SETTING
EXIT
INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the recording level for the built-in microphone.
Option
AUTO
MANUAL
OFF
Description
The camera adjusts the recording level automatically.
Adjust the recording level manually. Choose from 25 recording
levels.
Turn the built-in microphone off.
EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the recording level for external microphones.
MANUAL
OFF
Description
The camera adjusts the recording level automatically.
Adjust the recording level manually. Choose from 25 recording
levels.
Disable recording using external microphones.
213
The Shooting Menus
Option
AUTO
6
MIC JACK SETTING
Specify the type of hardware connected to the microphone jack.
Option
MIC
LINE
Description
Choose this option for direct connection to an external microphone.
Choose this option for external audio devices connected via
line output.
MIC LEVEL LIMITER
Reduces distortion caused by input that exceeds the limits of the
microphone’s audio circuits.
Options
ON
OFF
WIND FILTER
Choose whether to enable wind noise reduction during movie
recording.
6
Options
The Shooting Menus
ON
OFF
LOW CUT FILTER
Choose whether to enable the low-cut filter, reducing low-frequency noise during movie recording.
Options
ON
HEADPHONES VOLUME
Adjust the headphone volume.
Option
0
1—10
214
Description
Mute output to the headphones.
Choose a volume of from 1 to 10.
OFF
AUDIO SETTING (Movie Recording)
XLR MIC ADAPTER SETTING
Adjust microphone input channel settings and the like for use
with XLR microphone adapters.
Option
N • If an external microphone is connected to the camera’s microphone
jack, audio will be recorded not via the camera’s built-in microphone
but via the external microphone instead.
• Four-channel recording is available only when MOV is selected for
movie file format.
215
6
The Shooting Menus
Description
Record four-channel (quadraphonic) sound with the
help of the camera’s built-in microphone, or two-channel
(stereo) sound using only a microphone connected via the
XLR microphone adapter.
MIC INPUT CHANNEL • 4ch XLR+CAMERA: Record four-channel sound with
the help of the camera’s built-in microphone.
• 2ch XLR ONLY: Record two-channel sound using
only an external microphone connected via the XLR
microphone adapter.
Choose the source of sound output to headphones or
other audio monitors during movie recording.
XLR: Monitor sound from external microphones con•
4ch AUDIO MONITORING
nected via the XLR microphone adapter.
• CAMERA: Monitor sound from camera’s built-in microphone.
Choose source of audio output to the HDMI connector.
• XLR: Audio from external microphones connected via
HDMI 4ch AUDIO
the XLR microphone adapter is output to the HDMI conOUTPUT
nector.
• CAMERA: Audio from camera’s built-in microphone is
output to the HDMI connector.
TIME CODE SETTING (Movie Recording)
Adjust time code (hour, minute, second, and frame number) display settings for movie recording.
To display time code settings, press
MENU/OK in the movie shooting display
and select the Q (TIME CODE SETTING)
tab.
TIME CODE SETTING
TIME CODE DISPLAY
START TIME SETTING
COUNT UP SETTING
DROP FRAME
HDMI TIME CODE OUTPUT
EXIT
TIME CODE DISPLAY
Select ON to display time codes during movie recording and
playback.
Options
ON
6
START TIME SETTING
Choose the time code starting time.
The Shooting Menus
Option
Description
MANUAL INPUT Choose a start time manually.
CURRENT TIME Set the start time to the current time.
RESET
Set the start time to 00:00:00.
216
OFF
TIME CODE SETTING (Movie Recording)
COUNT UP SETTING
Choose whether time is clocked continuously or only during
movie recording.
Option
REC RUN
FREE RUN
Description
Time is clocked only during movie recording.
Time is clocked continuously.
DROP FRAME
At frame rates of 59.94P, and 29.97P, a discrepancy will gradually develop between the time code (measured in seconds) and
the actual recording time (measured in fractions of a second).
Choose whether the camera drops frames as necessary to match
the recording time to the time code.
Option
ON
OFF
Description
The camera drops frames as necessary to maintain a strict
match between the time code and the actual recording time.
Frames are not dropped.
N • The time code display varies with the option selected.
6
The Shooting Menus
ON
OFF
• Selecting a frame rate of 23.98P disables frame drop.
217
TIME CODE SETTING (Movie Recording)
HDMI TIME CODE OUTPUT
Choose whether time codes are output to HDMI devices.
Options
ON
6
The Shooting Menus
218
OFF
Playback and the Playback
Menu
219
The Playback Display
This section lists the indicators that may be displayed during
playback.
O For illustrative purposes, displays are shown with all indicators lit.
A
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
n
m
l
k
j
i
h
B CD E FG H I
J
12/31/2022 1/999
K
L
g
f
e
d
M
c
b
a
Z Y
X
A Date and time..................................48, 50, 273
B Frame-number display
C Location data................................................310
D Bluetooth ON/OFF
E Image transfer order
F Image transfer status
G Number of frames selected for upload
H Protected image ...........................................234
I Card slot..........................................................225
J Frame number..............................................308
K Bluetooth host ..............................................249
L Pixel-shift multi-shot ..................................177
M Low battery ......................................................47
N Image quality................................................119
O Movie mode ..................................................188
P HEIF ..................................................................121
Q Image size ......................................................118
R Film format ....................................................191
S Film simulation ............................................122
T Dynamic range ............................................130
U HDR ..................................................................107
220
W V U T S RQ
P O N
V White balance ..............................................126
W Sensitivity ..........................................................96
X Exposure compensation ...............................99
Y Aperture...............................................73, 78, 80
Z Time code.......................................................216
a Shutter speed .....................................73, 74, 80
b Playback mode indicator .............................56
c Movie icon ........................................................69
d Four-channel (quadrophonic) audio
..............................................................186, 215
e HDR image ....................................................107
f Red-eye removal indicator........................180
g Advanced filter..............................................109
h Face detection indicator ............................151
i Digital teleconverter ...................................175
j Photobook assist indicator .......................242
k DPOF print indicator ...................................244
l Rating..............................................................237
m Voice memo ..................................................236
n Gift image .........................................................56
The Playback Display
The DISP/BACK Button
The DISP/BACK button controls the display
of indicators during playback.
Standard
Information off
2022.12.31 1/999
1/999
12/31/2022
Playback and the Playback Menu
12/31/2022 1/999
NEXT
Info display
7
221
The Playback Display
Viewing Photo Information
The photo information display changes each
time the selector is pressed up.
Basic data
Info display 1
2022.12.31 1/999
1/999
12/31/2022
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
12/31/2022 1/999
NEXT
LENS
FOCAL LENGTH
COLOR SPACE
LENS MODULATION OPT.
S.S
F
23.0mm
F5.6
23.0mm
sRGB
ON
1/999
12/31/2022 12:10 AM
ISO
BACK
Info display 3
NEXT
Info display 2
Zooming in on the Focus Point
Press the center of the rear command dial to zoom in on the focus point.
Press again to return to full-frame playback.
222
Viewing Pictures
Read this section for information on playback zoom and
multi-frame playback.
Use the rear command dial to go from
full-frame playback to playback zoom or
multi-frame playback.
Full-frame playback
DISP/BACK
MENU/OK
Nine-frame view
Medium zoom
Playback and the Playback Menu
Playback
zoom
Multi-frame
playback
7
Hundred- frame view
Maximum zoom
223
Viewing Pictures
Playback Zoom
Rotate the rear command dial right to zoom in on the current
picture, left to zoom out. To exit zoom, press DISP/BACK, MENU/OK,
or the center of the rear command dial.
N The maximum zoom ratio varies with the option selected for H IMAGE
QUALITY SETTING > IMAGE SIZE.
Scroll
When the picture is zoomed in, the selector can
be used to view areas of the image not currently
visible in the display.
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
Navigation window
Multi-Frame Playback
To change the number of images displayed, rotate the rear command dial left when a picture is displayed full frame.
N • Use the selector to highlight images and press MENU/OK to view the
highlighted image full frame.
• In the nine- and hundred-frame displays, press the selector up or
down to view more pictures.
224
The Playback Menu
Adjust playback settings.
The playback menu is displayed when
you press MENU/OK in playback mode.
PLAY BACK MENU
SWITCH SLOT
RAW CONVERSION
HEIF TO JPEG/TIFF CONVERSION
ERASE
SIMULTANEOUS DELETE
CROP
RESIZE
PROTECT
EXIT
N If two memory cards are inserted, you can press and hold the a button to choose a card for playback.
Playback and the Playback Menu
SWITCH SLOT
Choose the card from which images will be played back.
7
225
RAW CONVERSION
Even if you don’t have a computer, you can use the camera to
modify RAW pictures and save them in other formats.
Saving RAW Pictures in Another Format
1
2
3
Display a RAW picture.
Highlight RAW CONVERSION in the playback menu.
Press MENU/OK.
A list of settings will be displayed.
RAW CONVERSION
Playback and the Playback Menu
REFLECT SHOOTING COND.
FILE TYPE
IMAGE SIZE
IMAGE QUALITY
PUSH/PULL PROCESSING
DYNAMIC RANGE
CREATE
4
5
CANCEL
Press the selector up or down to highlight a setting.
Press the selector right to display opRAW CONVERSION
tions.
100%
200%
400%
7
6
7
Press the selector up or down to highlight the desired option.
8
Press the Q button.
A preview of the copy will be displayed.
9
Press MENU/OK.
The copy will be saved.
Press MENU/OK to select the highlighted option. The settings
list shown in Step 3 will be displayed. Repeat Steps 4 to 7 to
adjust additional settings.
N RAW conversion options can also be displayed by pressing the Q button when a RAW pictures is displayed during playback.
226
The Playback Menu
The settings that can be adjusted when converting pictures from
RAW to another format are:
Setting
REFLECT SHOOTING COND.
FILE TYPE
IMAGE SIZE
IMAGE QUALITY
PUSH/PULL PROCESSING
DYNAMIC RANGE
FILM SIMULATION
MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
GRAIN EFFECT
COLOR CHROME EFFECT
COLOR CHROME FX BLUE
SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT
WHITE BALANCE
WB SHIFT
TONE CURVE
COLOR
SHARPNESS
227
Playback and the Playback Menu
D RANGE PRIORITY
Description
Create a copy using the settings in effect at the time the
photo was taken.
Choose a file format.
Choose an image size.
Adjust image quality.
Adjust exposure.
Enhance details in highlights for natural contrast.
Reduce loss of detail in highlights and shadows for natural-looking results when photographing high-contrast
scenes.
Simulate the effects of different types of film.
Choose a monochrome tint for photographs taken using FILM SIMULATION > a ACROS and
b MONOCHROME.
Add a film grain effect.
Increase the range of tones available for rendering colors that tend to be highly saturated, such as reds, yellows, and greens.
Increase the range of tones available for rendering blues.
Smooth complexions.
Adjust white balance.
Fine-tune white balance.
Adjust highlights and shadows.
Adjust color density.
Sharpen or soften outlines.
7
Setting
HIGH ISO NR
CLARITY
Description
Process the copy to reduce mottling.
Increase definition.
Improve definition by adjusting for diffraction and the
LENS MODULATION OPTIMIZER
slight loss of focus at the periphery of the lens.
COLOR SPACE
Choose the color space used for color reproduction.
HDR MODE
Reduce loss of detail in highlights and shadows.
DIGITAL TELE-CONV.
Switch to the crop in effect when the photo was taken.
O Some settings may be unavailable depending on the options chosen
when the picture was taken.
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
228
The Playback Menu
HEIF TO JPEG/TIFF CONVERSION
Convert HEIF pictures to JPEG or TIFF.
SELECT IMAGES
Select HEIF pictures for conversion.
FILE FORMAT
Choose a format for the converted pictures.
JPEG
TIFF 16bit
SELECT SLOT TO RECORD
Choose the memory card to which the converted pictures will
be saved.
Options
SLOT 1
SLOT 2
Playback and the Playback Menu
Options
TIFF 8bit
7
229
ERASE
Delete individual pictures, multiple selected pictures, or all pictures.
O Deleted pictures cannot be recovered. Protect important pictures or
copy them to a computer or other storage device before proceeding.
Option
FRAME
SELECTED FRAMES
ALL FRAMES
Description
Delete pictures one at a time.
Delete multiple selected pictures.
Delete all unprotected pictures.
Playback and the Playback Menu
FRAME
1 Select FRAME for ERASE in the playback menu.
2
Press the selector left or right to scroll through pictures and
press MENU/OK to delete.
N • A confirmation dialog is not displayed before pictures are deleted; be
sure the correct picture is selected before pressing MENU/OK.
• Additional pictures can be deleted by pressing MENU/OK. Press
the multi selector left or right to scroll through pictures and press
MENU/OK to delete.
7
230
The Playback Menu
SELECTED FRAMES
1 Select SELECTED FRAMES for ERASE in the playback menu.
Highlight pictures and press MENU/OK to select.
• Selected pictures are indicated by check marks (R).
• To deselect a highlighted picture, press MENU/OK again.
3
When the operation is complete, press DISP/BACK to display a
confirmation dialog.
4
Highlight OK and press MENU/OK to delete the selected pictures.
N Pictures in photobooks or printer orders are shown by S.
ALL FRAMES
1 Select ALL FRAMES for ERASE in the playback menu.
2
A confirmation dialog will be displayed; highlight OK and
press MENU/OK to delete all unprotected pictures.
N • Pressing DISP/BACK cancels deletion; note that any pictures deleted
before the button was pressed cannot be recovered.
• If a message appears stating that the selected images are part of a
DPOF print order, press MENU/OK to delete the pictures.
231
Playback and the Playback Menu
2
7
SIMULTANEOUS DELETE
Taking photos with SEPARATE selected for D SAVE DATA
SET-UP > x CARD SLOT SETTING creates two copies. Choose
whether deleting the RAW image will also delete the JPEG or
HEIF copy.
Option
ON
OFF
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
Description
Deleting the RAW image from the card in Slot 1 also deletes the
JPEG or HEIF copy from the card in Slot 2.
Deleting the RAW image from the card in Slot 1 does not delete
the JPEG or HEIF copy from the card in Slot 2.
CROP
Create a cropped copy of the current picture.
1
2
3
Display the desired picture.
4
5
Press MENU/OK to display a confirmation dialog.
Select CROP in the playback menu.
Use the rear command dial to zoom in and out and press the
selector up, down, left, or right to scroll the picture until the
desired portion is displayed.
Press MENU/OK again to save the cropped copy to a separate
file.
N • The higher the zoom ratio, the smaller the number of pixels in the
cropped copy.
• If the size of the final copy will be a, YES will be displayed in yellow.
• All copies have an aspect ratio of 3∶2.
232
The Playback Menu
RESIZE
Create a small copy of the current picture.
1
2
3
Display the desired picture.
4
Press MENU/OK again to save the resized copy to a separate
file.
Select RESIZE in the playback menu.
Highlight a size and press MENU/OK to display a confirmation
dialog.
Playback and the Playback Menu
N The sizes available vary with the size of the original image.
7
233
PROTECT
Protect pictures from accidental deletion. Highlight one of the
following options and press MENU/OK.
Option
FRAME
SET ALL
RESET ALL
Description
Protect selected pictures. Press the selector left or right to view
pictures and press MENU/OK to select or deselect. Press DISP/BACK
when the operation is complete.
Protect all pictures.
Remove protection from all pictures.
Playback and the Playback Menu
O Protected pictures will be deleted when the memory card is formatted.
N • Protecting images currently selected for upload to paired smartphones or tablets removes upload marking.
• Protection can also be added or removed by pressing the AFON button during playback.
7
234
The Playback Menu
IMAGE ROTATE
Rotate pictures.
1
2
3
4
Select ON for D SCREEN SET-UP > AUTOROTATE PB.
5
Press MENU/OK. The picture will automatically be displayed in
the selected orientation whenever it is played back on the
camera.
Display the desired picture.
Select IMAGE ROTATE in the playback menu.
Press the selector down to rotate the picture 90° clockwise,
up to rotate it 90° counterclockwise.
devices. Pictures rotated on the camera will not be rotated when
viewed on a computer or on other cameras.
• Pictures taken with D SCREEN SET-UP > AUTOROTATE PB are automatically displayed in the correct orientation during playback.
Playback and the Playback Menu
N • Protected pictures cannot be rotated. Remove protection before rotating pictures.
• The camera may not be able to rotate pictures created with other
7
235
VOICE MEMO SETTING
Add a voice memo to the current photograph.
1
2
3
Select ON for VOICE MEMO SETTING in the playback menu.
Display a photo to which you wish to add a voice memo.
Press and hold the center of the front command dial to record the memo. Recording ends after 30 s or when you release the dial.
Playback and the Playback Menu
N • The new memo will be recorded over any existing memos.
• Voice memos cannot be added to protected pictures.
• Deleting the picture also deletes the memo.
Playing Voice Memos
Pictures with voice memos are indicated by q icons during playback.
• To play a memo, select the picture and press the center of the front command dial.
• A progress bar will be displayed while the memo plays back.
• Volume can be adjusted by pressing MENU/OK to pause playback and display volume controls. Press the selector up or down to adjust the volume
and press MENU/OK again to resume playback. Volume can also be adjusted using D SOUND SET-UP > PLAYBACK VOLUME.
7
236
The Playback Menu
RATING
Rate pictures using stars.
1
2
Select RATING in the playback menu.
Rotate the front command dial to choose a picture and the
rear command dial to choose a rating of from 0 to 5 stars
(“I”).
single-frame, nine-frame, or hundred-frame playback.
• Use touch controls to zoom in or out.
• Ratings cannot be applied to:
- Protected pictures
- Movies
- “Gift” pictures (pictures taken with other cameras)
Playback and the Playback Menu
N • The selector can be used in place of the front command dial to
choose a picture.
• The rating dialog can also be displayed by pressing the AEL button in
7
237
COPY
Copy pictures between the cards in the first and second slots.
1
2
Select COPY in the playback menu.
Highlight one of the following options.
Option
Description
Copy pictures from the card in the first slot to the card in
SLOT1 y SLOT2
the second slot.
Copy pictures from the card in the second slot to the card
SLOT2 y SLOT1
in the first slot.
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
3
4
Press the selector right.
Highlight one of the following options and press MENU/OK.
Option
FRAME
ALL FRAMES
Description
Copy selected pictures. Press the selector left or right to
view pictures and press MENU/OK to copy the current picture.
Copy all pictures.
O • Copying ends when the destination is full.
• If you attempt to copy a file over 4 GB in size to a memory card with
a capacity of 32 GB or less, copying will end and the file will not be
copied.
238
The Playback Menu
TRANSFER IMAGE TO SMARTPHONE
Select photos for upload to a paired smartphone or tablet via
Bluetooth (P 249).
1
Select TRANSFER IMAGE TO SMARTPHONE > SELECT FRAMES.
N Select RESET to remove “upload to smartphone” marking from all
pictures before proceeding.
2
Press DISP/BACK and select START
TRANSFER.
The selected pictures will be uploaded.
SELECT IMAGE
FRAME
SELECT ALL
SELECT RANGE
SELECT
FINISH/SETTING
Playback and the Playback Menu
3
Mark pictures for upload.
Highlight pictures and press MENU/OK
to mark them for upload.
• To switch to the memory card in the
other slot or display only pictures
that meet selected criteria, press
DISP/BACK before marking begins.
• To select all pictures, press the Q button.
• Selecting any two pictures with the
AEL button also selects all pictures
between them.
7
SELECT FRAMES
START TRANSFER
FILTERING
SWITCH MEMORY CARD SLOT
FINISH IMAGE SELECT AND
START TRANSFER
239
Filtering Pictures/Choosing a Slot
To switch to the memory card in the other slot or display only pictures that
meet selected criteria, press DISP/BACK in the picture-selection dialog.
• To display only pictures that meet selected cri- SELECT FRAMES
teria, choose FILTERING.
START TRANSFER
FILTERING
• To switch to the memory card in the other slot,
SWITCH MEMORY CARD SLOT
choose SWITCH MEMORY CARD SLOT.
FILTERING THE IMAGE
WITH CONDITIONS
O Switching slots or changing the filter criteria removes any existing upPlayback and the Playback Menu
7
load marking.
N • Image transfer orders can contain a maximum of 999 pictures.
• The following cannot be selected for upload:
- Protected pictures
- Movies
- RAW images
- “Gift” pictures (pictures taken with other cameras)
• If ON is selected for both IMAGE TRANSFER WHILE POWER OFF
and Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING > Bluetooth ON/OFF in
the network/USB settings menu, upload to the paired device will
continue even while the camera is off.
• When a SMARTPHONE TRANSFER ORDER is selected for
D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > a Fn1 BUTTON SETTING, the picture-selection dialog can be displayed by pressing the Fn1 button.
240
The Playback Menu
xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
Connect to smartphones running the latest apps. The smartphone
can then be used to:
• Control the camera and take pictures remotely
• Receive pictures uploaded from the camera
• Browse the pictures on the camera and download selected pictures
• Upload location data to the camera
for D BUTTON/
DIAL SETTING > a Fn1 BUTTON SETTING, you can connect to the
smartphone using the Fn1 button.
SLIDE SHOW
View pictures in an automated slide show. Press MENU/OK to start
and press the selector right or left to skip ahead or back. Press
DISP/BACK at any time during the show to view on-screen help.
The show can be ended at any time by pressing MENU/OK.
N The camera will not turn off automatically while a slide show is in progress.
241
Playback and the Playback Menu
N • For downloads and other information, visit:
https://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/
• If r WIRELESS COMMUNICATION is selected
7
PHOTOBOOK ASSIST
Create books from your favorite photos.
Creating a Photobook
1 Select NEW BOOK for C PLAY BACK MENU > PHOTOBOOK
ASSIST.
2
Scroll through the images and press the selector up to select
or deselect. Press MENU/OK to exit when the book is complete.
Playback and the Playback Menu
N • Neither photographs a or smaller nor movies can be selected
for photobooks.
• The first picture selected becomes the cover image. Press the focus stick down to select the current image for the cover instead.
3
Highlight COMPLETE PHOTOBOOK and press MENU/OK (to select all photos for the book, choose SELECT ALL). The new
book will be added to the list in the photobook assist menu.
N • Books can contain up to 300 pictures.
• Books that contain no photos are automatically deleted.
7
242
The Playback Menu
Viewing Photobooks
Highlight a book in the photobook assist menu and press MENU/OK
to display the book, then press the selector left or right to scroll
through the pictures.
Playback and the Playback Menu
Editing and Deleting Photobooks
Display the photobook and press MENU/OK. The following options
will be displayed; select the desired option and follow the onscreen instructions.
• EDIT: Edit the book as described in “Creating a Photobook”.
• ERASE: Delete the book.
7
243
PRINT ORDER (DPOF)
Create a digital “print order” for DPOF-compatible printers.
Playback and the Playback Menu
1
2
Select C PLAY BACK MENU > PRINT ORDER (DPOF).
3
Display a picture you wish to include in or remove from the
print order.
4
Press the selector up or down to
choose the number of copies (up to
99).
Select WITH DATE s to print the date of recording on pictures, WITHOUT DATE to print pictures without dates, or
RESET ALL to remove all pictures from the print order before
proceeding.
N To remove a picture from the order,
press the selector down until the number of copies is 0.
7
PRINT ORDER (DPOF)
DPOF: 00001
01 SHEETS
FRAME
SET
Total number
of prints
Number of copies
N Repeat steps 3–4 to complete the print order.
5
The total number of prints is displayed in the monitor. Press
MENU/OK to exit.
N • The pictures in the current print order are indicated by a u icon
during playback.
• Print orders can contain a maximum of 999 pictures from a single
memory card.
• If a memory card is inserted containing a print order created by an-
other camera, you will need to delete the order before creating as
described above.
244
The Playback Menu
instax PRINTER PRINT
To print pictures to optional Fujifilm instax SHARE printers, first
select instax PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING in the network/
USB settings menu and enter the instax SHARE printer name
(SSID) and password, then follow the steps below.
1
2
Turn the printer on.
Select C PLAY BACK MENU > instax
PRINTER PRINT. The camera will connect to the printer.
PRINTER PRINT
instax-12345678
CONNECTING
CANCEL
3
Use the selector to display the picture you want to print, then press
MENU/OK. The picture will be sent to
the printer and printing will start.
PRINTER PRINT
100-0020
SET
instax-12345678
CANCEL
N • Pictures taken with other cameras cannot be printed.
• The area printed is smaller than the area visible in the LCD
monitor.
• The displays may vary depending on the printer connected.
245
Playback and the Playback Menu
FUJIFILM-CAMERA-1234
7
DISP ASPECT
Choose the aspect ratio used for the display of still pictures on
High Definition (HD) devices (this option is available only when
an HDMI cable is connected).
Options
Playback and the Playback Menu
16 : 9
3:2
N Choose 16 : 9 to display photos with an aspect ratio of 3 : 2 full screen.
The pictures will be displayed full screen with tops and bottoms
cropped out.
7
246
Network/USB Features and
Settings
247
Overview
This chapter outlines features that can among other things
be used to upload pictures to, or control the camera and
take pictures remotely from, a smartphone or computer.
Supported Features
This camera supports the following features:
Feature
Network/USB Features and Settings
8
Description
Connect to smartphones via Bluetooth® and upload
Connecting to the
pictures or control the camera remotely while the
smartphone app
smartphone displays the view through the lens.
Connect a card reader to a computer or smartphone
USB card readers
via USB and copy pictures from memory cards.
Connect the camera to a computer via USB for use
Web camera
as a webcam.
instax printers
Print pictures on connected instax printers.
Take pictures from a computer to which the camera
Tethered photography
is connected (“tethered”) via wireless LAN or USB.
Harness the power of the camera’s image
RAW processing
processing engine when processing RAW pictures
on a computer.
Saving and Loading Save camera settings to, or load existing settings
Settings
from, a computer or smartphone.
248
P
249
252
257
258
260
262
263
Connecting to Smartphones (Bluetooth)
Connect the camera with a smartphone via Bluetooth® to
copy pictures to the smartphone or control the camera remotely while previewing the view through the lens in the
smartphone display.
N The camera automatically switches to a wireless LAN connection when
copying pictures to the smartphone.
https://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/
N The apps available vary with the smartphone operating system.
Connecting to a Smartphone
Pair the camera with the smartphone and connect via Bluetooth®.
Network/USB Features and Settings
Installing Smartphone Apps
Before establishing a connection between the smartphone and
camera, you will need to install at least one dedicated smartphone app. Visit the following website and install the desired
apps on your phone.
8
1
Press the x(Bluetooth) button when
the camera is in shooting mode.
N You can also proceed directly to Step 3 by holding the x button
during playback.
249
2
Highlight Bluetooth and press MENU/OK.
Bluetooth & FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING
X-T5123456
Bluetooth
Fn1
Fn2
Fn3
Fn4
Fn5
Fn6
T-Fn1
3
Highlight PAIRING and press MENU/OK.
Bluetooth
PAIRING
Bluetooth ON/OFF
Network/USB Features and Settings
8
4
Launch the app on the smartphone and pair the smartphone
with the camera.
More information is available at the following website:
https://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/
When pairing is complete, the camera and smartphone will automatically connect via Bluetooth. A smartphone icon and a white Bluetooth
icon will appear in the camera display
when a connection is established.
N • Once the devices have been paired, the smartphone will automatically connect to the camera when the app is launched.
• Disabling Bluetooth when the camera is not connected to a smartphone reduces the drain on the battery.
250
Connecting to Smartphones (Bluetooth)
Using the Smartphone App
Read this section for information on the options available for
downloading pictures to your smartphone using the smartphone app.
N Before
proceeding, select ON for Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE
SETTING > Bluetooth ON/OFF.
Selecting and Downloading Pictures Using the Smartphone App
You can download selected pictures to a smartphone using the
smartphone app.
https://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/
Uploading Pictures as They Are Taken
Pictures taken with ON selected for Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE
SETTING > AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER in the network/USB
setting menu will automatically be uploaded to the paired device.
N • If ON is selected for both IMAGE TRANSFER WHILE POWER OFF
and Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING > Bluetooth ON/OFF in
the network/USB settings menu, upload to the paired device will
continue even while the camera is off.
• Selecting ON for Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING > RESIZE
IMAGE FOR SMARTPHONE in the network/USB setting menu enables compression, reducing file size for upload (P 266).
• Pictures are uploaded in the format chosen for Bluetooth/
SMARTPHONE SETTING > SELECT FILE TYPE in the network/USB
setting menu.
Selecting Pictures for Upload in the Playback Menu
Use TRANSFER IMAGE TO SMARTPHONE > SELECT FRAMES to
select pictures for upload to a paired smartphone or tablet via
Bluetooth® (P 239).
251
Network/USB Features and Settings
N More information is available from the following website:
8
Connecting to Smartphones (USB)
Connect to smartphones and computers via USB to upload
pictures from the camera.
Copying Pictures to a Smartphone
Before connecting to the smartphone to upload pictures via USB,
select either AUTO or POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for USB
POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB setting
menu.
Network/USB Features and Settings
For Customers Using Android Devices
How you will connect the camera depends on the type of USB
connector with which your smartphone is equipped.
Type-C
Use the supplied USB cable.
Supplied USB cable
Type-C connector (male)
8
252
Type-C connector (male)
Connecting to Smartphones (USB)
Micro-B
Use a USB on-the-go (OTG) cable.
Third-party USB cable
Type-C connector (male)
USB OTG cable
Micro-B connector (male)
Type-A connector
(male)
with a USB Type-C–to–
Mirco-B cable. Use an OTG cable.
1
Select either AUTO or POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for
USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB
setting menu.
2
3
Select USB CARD READER for CONNECTION MODE.
Connect the camera and smartphone using a USB cable.
N If the smartphone asks for permission for an app other than the
“Camera Importer” to access the camera, tap “Cancel” and move
on to the next step.
4
On your smartphone, tap the notification “Connected to USB
PTP”.
253
Network/USB Features and Settings
O • The smartphone must support USB OTG.
• The desired results cannot be achieved
Type-A connector
(female)
8
5
From the recommended apps, select “Camera Importer”.
The app will automatically start and allow you to import photos and movies to your smartphone.
N If the message “There is no MTP device connected” appears on the
app, please try again from step 3.
For Customers Using iOS
Use a camera adapter. Given that the camera is equipped with a
USB Type-C connector, you will need to supply a cable with a USB
Type-A connector for connection to the camera adapter.
Network/USB Features and Settings
8
Third-party USB cable
Type-C connector (male)
Apple Lightning to
USB Camera Adapter
Use an Apple Lightning to
USB Camera Adapter
Type-A connector (male)
1
Select POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for USB POWER
SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB setting menu.
2
3
Select USB CARD READER for CONNECTION MODE.
Connect the camera and smartphone using a USB cable.
Launch the Photos app to import photos and movies to your
smartphone.
O • A Type-C to Type-C USB cable is required for connection to iPad and
other devices equipped with USB Type-C connectors.
• The desired results cannot be achieved with a USB Type-C–to–
Lightning cable. Use a camera adapter.
254
Connecting to Smartphones (USB)
Connecting the Camera and Computer
1 Select either AUTO or POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for
USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB
setting menu.
2
3
4
5
Select USB CARD READER for CONNECTION MODE.
Turn the camera off.
Turn the computer on.
Connect a USB cable.
Network/USB Features and Settings
USB connector (Type-C)
O The USB cable must be no more than 1 m (3.3 ft.) long and be
suitable for data transfer.
6
7
Turn the camera on.
Copy pictures to your computer.
• Mac OS X/OS X/macOS: Pictures can be copied to your computer
using Image Capture (supplied with your computer) or other software. Use a card reader to copy files over 4 GB in size.
• Windows: Pictures can be copied to your computer using
apps supplied with the operating system.
255
8
Connecting to Smartphones (USB)
O • Turn the camera off before disconnecting the USB cable.
• When connecting USB cables, be sure the connectors are fully in-
Network/USB Features and Settings
8
serted in the correct orientation. Connect the camera directly to the
computer; do not use a USB hub or keyboard.
• Loss of power during transfer could result in loss of data or damage to
the memory card. Insert a fresh or fully-charged battery before connecting the camera.
• If a memory card containing a large number of images is inserted,
there may be a delay before the software starts and you may be unable to import or save images. Use a memory card reader to transfer
pictures.
• Make sure that the indicator lamp is off or lit green before turning
the camera off.
• Do not disconnect the USB cable while transfer is in progress. Failure
to observe this precaution could result in loss of data or damage to
the memory card.
• Disconnect the camera before inserting or removing memory cards.
• In some cases, it may not be possible to access pictures saved to a
network server using the software in the same way as on a standalone computer.
• Do not immediately remove the camera from the system or disconnect the USB cable once the message stating that copying is in
progress clears from the computer display. If the number of images
copied is very large, data transfer may continue after the message has
ceased to be displayed.
• The user bears all applicable fees charged by the phone company or
Internet service provider when using services that require an Internet
connection.
256
Using the Camera as a Webcam
The camera can be connected to a computer for use as a
webcam.
1
Select either AUTO or POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for
USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB
setting menu.
2
3
Select USB WEBCAM for CONNECTION MODE.
4
Select the camera in the app where it will be used as a webcam.
Connect the camera to the computer via USB and then turn
the camera on (P 255).
Network/USB Features and Settings
8
257
instax SHARE Printers
Print pictures from your digital camera to instax SHARE
printers.
Establishing a Connection
Select instax PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING in the network/USB
setting menu and enter the instax SHARE printer name (SSID) and
password.
Network/USB Features and Settings
The Printer Name (SSID) and Password
The printer name (SSID) can be found on the
bottom of the printer; the default password is
“1111”. If you have already chosen a different
password to print from a smartphone, enter
that password instead.
8
258
instax SHARE Printers
Printing Pictures
1 Turn the printer on.
2 Select C PLAY BACK MENU > instax
PRINTER PRINT. The camera will connect to the printer.
PRINTER PRINT
instax-12345678
CONNECTING
FUJIFILM-CAMERA-1234
CANCEL
3
Use the selector to display the picture you want to print, then press
MENU/OK.
PRINTER PRINT
100-0020
CANCEL
N • Pictures taken with other cameras cannot be printed.
• The area printed is smaller than the area visible in the LCD
monitor.
• The displays may vary depending on the printer connected.
4
The picture will be sent to the printer and printing will start.
Network/USB Features and Settings
SET
instax-12345678
8
259
Tethered Photography
Computers connected via USB or wireless LAN can be used
to control the camera and take photographs remotely or to
download pictures from the camera for storage.
Tethered Photography via USB
Connect the camera to a computer via USB for tethered photography.
Network/USB Features and Settings
8
1
Select either AUTO or POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for
USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB
setting menu.
2
Select USB TETHER SHOOTING AUTO or USB TETHER
SHOOTING FIXED for CONNECTION MODE.
O • If USB TETHER SHOOTING AUTO is selected, tethered pho-
tography will be enabled automatically when the computer to
which the camera is connected is turned on. When the computer is off or not connected, tethered photography will be suspended and pictures will be saved to the camera memory card.
• If the camera is disconnected from the computer while USB
TETHER SHOOTING FIXED is selected, it will continue to function in tethered mode and no pictures will be recorded.
3
Connect the camera to the computer via USB and then turn
the camera on (P 255).
260
Tethered Photography
4
Take pictures via tethered photography.
Use software such as “Adobe Lightroom Classic + FUJIFILM
Tether Shooting Plug-in”, “FUJIFILM X Acquire”, or “Capture
One”.
N • To take pictures when using X Acquire, use the shutter button on the
camera.
• For more information on tethered photography, visit the website below.
https://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/en/tether/
• Visit the website below for information on the software used.
https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/
1
Connect the camera to a wireless LAN using NETWORK
SETTING in the network/USB setting menu.
2
Select WIRELESS TETHER SHOOTING FIXED for CONNECTION
MODE.
3
Take pictures via tethered photography.
Use software such as “Adobe Lightroom Classic + FUJIFILM
Tether Shooting Plug-in” or “FUJIFILM X Acquire”.
N • To take pictures when using X Acquire, use the shutter button on the
camera.
• For more information on tethered photography, visit the website below.
https://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/en/tether/
• Visit the website below for information on the software used.
https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/
261
Network/USB Features and Settings
Tethered Photography via Wireless LAN
Connect the camera to a computer via wireless LAN for tethered
photography.
8
RAW Processing
Using X RAW STUDIO, you can harness the power of the
camera’s image processing engine when processing RAW
pictures on a computer.
Network/USB Features and Settings
1
Select either AUTO or POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for
USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB
setting menu.
2
Select USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE for CONNECTION
MODE.
3
Connect the camera to the computer via USB and then turn
the camera on (P 255).
4
Launch X RAW STUDIO.
RAW processing can be performed using X RAW STUDIO.
N Visit the website below for information on the software used.
https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/
8
262
Saving and Loading Settings
Camera settings can be saved to or loaded from computers
using FUJIFILM X Acquire.
Saving and Loading Settings Using a Computer
Select either AUTO or POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for
USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB
setting menu.
2
Select USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE for CONNECTION
MODE.
3
Connect the camera to the computer via USB and then turn
the camera on (P 255).
4
Launch FUJIFILM X Acquire.
Camera settings can be saved or loaded using FUJIFILM X
Acquire.
N Visit the website below for information on the software used.
https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/
Network/USB Features and Settings
1
8
263
Network/USB Setting Menus
Adjust camera network and USB settings.
To access network/USB settings from
the shooting or playback display, press
MENU/OK and select the I (network/USB
setting) tab.
NETWORK/USB SETTING
Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING
AIRPLANE MODE
NETWORK SETTING
PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING
CONNECTION MODE
USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING
INFORMATION
RESET WIRELESS SETTING
EXIT
Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING
Adjust Bluetooth-related settings as well as a variety of smartphone-related settings.
Network/USB Features and Settings
8
N Be sure your smartphone or tablet is running the latest version of the
smartphone app.
PAIRING REGISTRATION
Pair the camera with a smartphone or tablet to which the smartphone app has been installed.
SELECT PAIRING DESTINATION
Choose a connection from a list of devices with which the camera has been paired using PAIRING REGISTRATION. Select NO
CONNECTION to exit without connecting.
DELETE PAIRING REG.
Delete existing pairing information for a smartphone or tablet.
N The selected device will be removed from the pairing list.
264
Network/USB Setting Menus
Bluetooth DEVICE LIST
List the devices with which the camera is paired (other than the
smartphone) or end pairing with selected devices.
Bluetooth ON/OFF
If ON is selected, the camera will automatically connect with
paired smartphones or tablets running the smartphone app.
Options
ON
OFF
Options
ON
OFF
SMARTPHONE LOCATION SYNC.
Select ON to enable ongoing download of location data from
paired smartphones or tablets.
Options
ON
OFF
O Location data will only be downloaded while the smartphone app is
running. Download will be interrupted if pairing is ended. The camera
location data icon will be displayed in red if location data have not
been updated for over 30 minutes.
NAME
Choose a name (NAME) to identify the camera on the wireless
network (the camera is assigned a unique name by default).
265
Network/USB Features and Settings
AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER
Select ON to upload pictures automatically as they are taken.
8
IMAGE TRANSFER WHILE POWER OFF
If ON is selected, the camera will continue to upload pictures to
paired smartphones or tablets even while off.
Options
ON
OFF
RESIZE IMAGE FOR SMARTPHONE
Select ON (recommended) to enable compression, reducing file
size for upload.
Options
Network/USB Features and Settings
8
ON
OFF
N • The pictures on the camera memory card are not affected.
• Compression is used only for pictures taken at sizes of L and M.
WIRELESS COM. FREQUENCY SETTING
Choose the band for wireless LAN connections.
Options
2.4GHz (IEEE802.11 b/g/n)
5GHz (IEEE802.11 a/n/ac)
O • Some countries and regions prohibit outdoor use of certain channels
in the 5 GHz band. Check whether use of the 5.2 GHz (W52) band is
permitted before selecting the 5 GHz option.
• The options available vary with the country or region of sale.
SELECT FILE TYPE
Choose the format or formats used for upload. Pictures can be
uploaded in JPEG format and/or HEIF.
266
Network/USB Setting Menus
AIRPLANE MODE
Select ON to disable the camera’s wireless LAN and Bluetooth
features.
Options
ON
OFF
NETWORK SETTING
Adjust settings for connection to wireless networks.
Option
Description
• SIMPLE SETUP: Connect to an access point using simple
settings.
IP ADDRESS
SETTING
• MANUAL SETUP: Manually adjust settings for connec-
tion to a wireless network. Choose the network from a list
(SELECT FROM NETWORK LIST) or enter the name manually (ENTER SSID).
• AUTO: The IP address is assigned automatically.
• MANUAL: Assign an IP address manually. Manually choose
the IP address (IP ADDRESS), subnet mask (SUBNET
MASK), and gateway address (GATEWAY ADDRESS).
instax PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING
Adjust settings for connection to optional Fujifilm instax SHARE
printers (P 258).
267
Network/USB Features and Settings
ACCESS POINT
SETTING
8
CONNECTION MODE
Adjust settings for connection to external devices.
Option
Network/USB Features and Settings
8
Description
Connecting the camera to a computer via USB automatically
enables data transfer mode, allowing data to be copied to
USB CARD READER
the computer. The camera functions normally when not connected.
Connect the camera to a computer via USB for use as a
USB WEBCAM
webcam.
The camera can be controlled from computers, gimbals,
drones, or other devices connected via USB. The camera automatically enters “tethered shooting” (i.e., remote-control)
mode when the external device is turned on and returns to
normal operation when the external device turned off or disconnected.
• Photographs can be taken remotely and automatically
USB TETHER
downloaded to computers running Capture One, Adobe®
SHOOTING AUTO
Photoshop® Lightroom® + Tether Plugin, FUJIFILM X
Acquire, or FUJIFILM Pixel Shift Combiner. FUJIFILM X
Acquire can also be used to save and load camera settings.
• Remote photography and movie recording are available
when the camera is connected to a compatible device
such as a gimbal or drone. Use camera controls to switch
between still photography and movie recording. The features available vary with the device connected.
268
Network/USB Setting Menus
Option
O D POWER MANAGEMENT > AUTO POWER OFF settings also apply
during tethered shooting. To prevent the camera turning off automatically, select OFF for AUTO POWER OFF.
N For information on compatible computer software, see “Software for
Use with Your Camera” (P 359).
269
Network/USB Features and Settings
Description
As for USB TETHER SHOOTING AUTO, except that the
camera remains in “tethered shooting” (remote-control)
mode when the external device is off or not connected, alUSB TETHER
lowing the device to resume control when the connection
SHOOTING FIXED
is re-established after an accidental disconnection or other
disruption. At default settings, pictures are not recorded to
the memory card.
Choose this option for wireless remote photography. Select
WIRELESS TETHER
an access point using NETWORK SETTING in the network/
SHOOTING FIXED
USB setting menu.
Connecting the camera to a computer via USB automatically enables USB RAW conversion/backup restore mode. The
camera functions normally when not connected.
USB RAW CONV. (requires FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO): Use the camUSB RAW CONV./ •
era’s image processing engine to rapidly convert RAW files
BACKUP RESTORE
to other formats while maintaining image quality.
• BACKUP RESTORE (requires FUJIFILM X Acquire): Save and load
camera settings. Reconfigure the camera in an instant or
share settings with other cameras of the same type.
8
Network/USB Setting Menus
USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING
Choose whether USB connections to computers, smartphones,
or other devices are used for power delivery or data transfer.
Option
Description
The camera switches between power delivery and data transAUTO
fer automatically.
POWER SUPPLY ON/ The camera draws power from the connected device, reducing
COMM OFF
the drain on the battery. Data transfer is disabled.
POWER SUPPLY The camera can exchange data with, but not draw power from,
OFF/COMM ON the connected device.
Network/USB Features and Settings
8
O The camera cannot draw power from Lightning connections or from
devices that do not supply power. Select POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM
ON before connecting the camera to such devices. The connection
may not be available for data transfer or the like when POWER SUPPLY
ON/COMM OFF is selected.
N Regardless of the option selected, the battery will charge while the
camera is off.
INFORMATION
View the camera’s MAC, Bluetooth, and wireless network IP addresses.
RESET WIRELESS SETTING
Restore wireless settings to their default values.
270
The Setup Menus
271
USER SETTING
Adjust basic camera settings.
To access basic camera settings, press
MENU/OK, select the D (SET UP) tab, and
choose USER SETTING.
USER SETTING
FORMAT
bAREA SETTING
DATE/TIME
TIME DIFFERENCE
a
x MY MENU SETTING
F MY MENU SETTING
SENSOR CLEANING
EXIT
FORMAT
To format a memory card:
The Setup Menus
9
1
2
Select D USER SETTING > FORMAT in the D (SET UP) tab.
3
A confirmation dialog will be displayed. To format the memory card,
highlight OK and press MENU/OK.
Highlight the slot containing the card you wish to format and
press MENU/OK.
N To exit without formatting the memory
FORMAT
FORMAT CARD IN SLOT 1, OK?
ERASE ALL DATA
OK
CANCEL
card, select CANCEL or press DISP/BACK.
O • All data—including protected pictures—will be deleted from the
memory card. Be sure important files have been copied to a computer or other storage device.
• Do not open the battery-chamber cover during formatting.
N The format menu can also be displayed by pressing the center of the
rear command dial while pressing and holding the b button.
272
USER SETTING
b AREA SETTING
Adjust settings for your current time zone.
AREA SETTING
Choose your time zone from a map.
DAYLIGHT SAVINGS
Turn daylight saving time on or off.
Option
ON
OFF
Description
Daylight saving time on.
Daylight saving time off.
DATE/TIME
To set the camera clock:
Select D USER SETTING > DATE/TIME in the D (SET UP) tab.
3
Press MENU/OK to set the clock.
Press the selector left or right to highlight the year, month,
day, hour, or minute and press up or down to change. To
change the order in which the year, month, and day are displayed, highlight the date format and press the selector up
or down.
The Setup Menus
1
2
9
273
TIME DIFFERENCE
Switch the camera clock instantly from your home time zone to
the local time at your destination when traveling. To specify the
difference between your local and home time zone:
O Use b AREA SETTING to choose your home time zone before selecting a local time zone using g LOCAL.
1
2
Highlight g LOCAL and press MENU/OK.
Use the selector to choose the local time zone. Press MENU/OK
when settings are complete.
N Select ON to enable daylight saving time.
To set the camera clock to local time, highlight g LOCAL and
press MENU/OK. To set the clock to the time in your home time
zone, select h HOME.
Options
g LOCAL
h HOME
The Setup Menus
N If g LOCAL is selected, g will be displayed in yellow for about three
seconds when the camera is turned on.
9
274
USER SETTING
Qa
Choose a language.
x MY MENU SETTING
Edit the items listed in the E (MY MENU) tab, a personalized custom menu of frequently-used photo menu options (P 313).
F MY MENU SETTING
Edit the items listed in the E (MY MENU) tab, a personalized custom menu of frequently-used movie menu options (P 313).
The Setup Menus
9
275
SENSOR CLEANING
Remove dust from the camera image sensor.
Option
OK
Description
Clean the sensor immediately.
Sensor cleaning will be performed when the camera is
WHEN SWITCHED ON
turned on.
Sensor cleaning will be performed when the camera turns
WHEN SWITCHED OFF off (sensor cleaning is not however performed if the camera turns off in playback mode).
N Dust that cannot be removed using sensor cleaning can be removed
using a blower (P 374).
BATTERY AGE
Check battery age. Age is expressed as a
number between 0 and 4. The higher the
number, the older the battery.
BATTERY AGE
The Setup Menus
N The older the battery, the faster it loses its charge. We recommend that
batteries be replaced as they wear out.
9
276
USER SETTING
RESET
Reset shooting or setup menu options to default values.
1
Highlight the desired option and press MENU/OK.
Option
Description
Reset all photo menu settings other than custom white
STILL MENU RESET balance and custom settings banks created using
x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING to default values.
Reset all movie menu settings other than custom white
MOVIE MENU RESET balance and custom settings banks created using
F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING to default values.
Reset all setup menu settings other than DATE/TIME,
SET-UP RESET b AREA SETTING, TIME DIFFERENCE, and
COPYRIGHT INFO to default values.
Reset all settings other than custom white balance to
INITIALIZE
default values.
2
A confirmation dialog will be displayed; highlight OK and
press MENU/OK.
The Setup Menus
REGULATORY
To view electronic copies of the product model number, and
other certificates, select D USER SETTING > REGULATORY in the
setup menu.
9
277
SOUND SETTING
Make changes to camera sounds.
To access sound settings, press MENU/OK,
select the D (SET UP) tab, and choose
SOUND SET-UP.
SOUND SETTING
AF BEEP VOL.
SELF-TIMER BEEP VOL.
OPERATION VOL.
FREC START/STOP VOLUME
ttELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME
ttELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND
sELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME
sELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND
EXIT
AF BEEP VOL.
Choose the volume of the beep that sounds when the camera
focuses. The beep can be muted by selecting eOFF.
Options
b (high)
c (medium)
d (low)
eOFF (mute)
SELF-TIMER BEEP VOL.
Choose the volume of the beep that sounds while the self-timer
is active. The beep can be muted by selecting eOFF.
The Setup Menus
Options
b (high)
9
278
c (medium)
d (low)
eOFF (mute)
SOUND SETTING
OPERATION VOL.
Adjust the volume of the sounds produced when camera controls are operated. Choose eOFF to disable control sounds.
Options
b (high)
c (medium)
d (low)
eOFF (mute)
F REC START/STOP VOLUME
Choose the volume at the start and end of movie recording.
Options
b (high)
c (medium)
d (low)
eOFF (mute)
tt ELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME
Adjust the volume of the sounds produced by the mechanical or
electronic front-curtain shutter.
Options
b (high)
c (medium)
d (low)
eOFF (mute)
The Setup Menus
9
279
tt ELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND
Choose the sound made by the mechanical or electronic
front-curtain shutter.
i SOUND 1
Options
j SOUND 2
k SOUND 3
s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME
Adjust the volume of the sounds produced by the electronic
shutter. Choose eOFF to disable the shutter sound.
Options
b (high)
c (medium)
d (low)
eOFF (mute)
s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND
Choose the sound made by the electronic shutter.
i SOUND 1
The Setup Menus
9
280
Options
j SOUND 2
k SOUND 3
SOUND SETTING
PLAYBACK VOLUME
Adjust the volume for movie playback.
0
1
2
3
4
Options
5
6
7
8
9
10
4ch AUDIO PLAYBACK
Adjust audio settings for use when viewing 4ch movies.
Option
Description
XLR
The camera plays audio recorded via external microphones connected via the XLR microphone adapter.
CAMERA
The camera plays audio recorded via the camera’s built-in
microphone or external microphones connected via the
microphone jack.
N You can also switch sources while viewing the playback display by
pressing the center of the focus stick (focus lever).
The Setup Menus
9
281
SCREEN SETTING
Make changes to display settings.
To access display settings, press MENU/OK,
select the D (SET UP) tab, and choose
SCREEN SET-UP.
SCREEN SETTING
VIEW MODE SETTING
EVF BRIGHTNESS
EVF COLOR
EVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT
LCD BRIGHTNESS
LCD COLOR
LCD COLOR ADJUSTMENT
IMAGE DISP.
EXIT
VIEW MODE SETTING
Adjust settings for eye sensor, EVF (electronic viewfinder), or LCD
monitor view modes (P 16).
EVF BRIGHTNESS
Adjust the brightness of the display in the electronic viewfinder.
Option
AUTO
The Setup Menus
9
MANUAL
Description
The camera automatically adjusts brightness around a selected
level in response to changes in ambient lighting conditions.
Adjust brightness manually; choose from options between −7
and +5.
EVF COLOR
Adjust the saturation of the display in the electronic viewfinder.
−5
282
−4
−3
−2
−1
Options
0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
SCREEN SETTING
EVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the color of the display in the electronic viewfinder.
1
Adjust colors using the selector.
EVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT
SET
2
CANCEL
Press MENU/OK.
The Setup Menus
9
283
LCD BRIGHTNESS
Adjust monitor brightness.
−5
−4
−3
−2
−1
Options
0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
Options
0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
LCD COLOR
Adjust monitor saturation.
−5
−4
−3
−2
−1
LCD COLOR ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the color of the display in the LCD monitor.
1
2
Adjust colors using the selector.
Press MENU/OK.
The Setup Menus
9
284
SCREEN SETTING
IMAGE DISP.
Choose how long images are displayed after shooting.
Option
CONTINUOUS
1.5 SEC
0.5 SEC
OFF
Description
Pictures are displayed until the MENU/OK button is pressed or the
shutter button is pressed halfway. To zoom in on the active focus
point, press the center of the rear command dial; press again to
cancel zoom.
Pictures are displayed for the selected time or until the shutter
button is pressed halfway.
Pictures are not displayed after shooting.
N • Colors may differ slightly from those in the final image.
• “Noise” mottling may be visible at high sensitivities.
AUTOROTATE DISPLAYS
Choose whether the indicators in the viewfinder and LCD monitor
rotate to match camera orientation.
Options
ON
OFF
The Setup Menus
9
285
PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE
Choose whether to enable exposure and/or white balance preview
in manual exposure mode.
Option
Description
PREVIEW EXP./WB Enable exposure and white balance preview.
Preview white balance only. Choose this option in situations in
PREVIEW WB which exposure is likely to change during shooting, as may be
the case when you use a flash during daylight.
Disable exposure and white balance preview. Choose this option in situations in which both exposure and white balance
OFF
are likely to change during shooting, as may be the case when
you use a flash with an incandescent monitoring lamp.
NATURAL LIVE VIEW
Choose whether the effects of film simulation, white balance,
and other settings are visible in the monitor.
Option
The Setup Menus
ON
OFF
9
286
Description
The effects of camera settings are not visible in the monitor,
but shadows in low-contrast, back-lit scenes and other hardto-see subjects more visible. Colors and tone will differ from
those in the final picture. The display will however be adjusted
to show the effects of monochrome and sepia settings.
The effects of film simulation, white balance, and other settings
can be previewed in the monitor.
SCREEN SETTING
F-Log VIEW ASSIST
Select ON to display a tone-corrected preview (equivalent to
BT.709) when recording or viewing F-log movies.
Options
ON
OFF
ELECTRONIC LEVEL SETTING
Adjust settings for use when taking pictures using the virtual
horizon display (P 23).
The Setup Menus
9
287
FRAMING GUIDELINE
Choose a framing grid for shooting mode.
Option
G GRID 24
F GRID 9
Display
P
For “rule of thirds” composition.
P
H HD FRAMING
P
A six-by-four grid.
Frame HD pictures in the
crop shown by the lines at
the top and bottom of the
display.
N Framing guides are not shown at default settings but can be displayed
using D SCREEN SET-UP > DISP. CUSTOM SETTING (P 21).
The Setup Menus
9
288
SCREEN SETTING
AUTOROTATE PB
Choose ON to automatically rotate “tall” (portrait-orientation)
pictures during playback.
Options
ON
OFF
FOCUS SCALE UNITS
Choose the units used for the focus distance indicator.
Options
METERS
FEET
APERTURE UNIT FOR CINEMA LENS
Choose whether the camera displays aperture as a T-number
(used for movie camera lenses) or an f/-number (used for still
camera lenses) when an optional FUJINON MKX-series lens is
attached. For information on using cinema lenses, see the documentation provided with the lens.
Option
F NUMBER
289
The Setup Menus
T NUMBER
Description
A measure of lens aperture commonly used by cinematographers. Lens transmittance is taken into account to better calculate exposure.
A measure of lens aperture commonly used by photographers.
Lens transmittance is assumed to be 100%, meaning that the
same aperture may produce different exposures depending on
the lens.
9
DUAL DISPLAY SETTING
Choose the content of the two windows in the dual display.
Option
Description
The right (small) window shows a close-up of the focus area,
R:FOCUS L:FRAME
while the left (large) window shows the entire frame.
The right (small) window shows the entire frame, while the left
R:FRAME L:FOCUS
(large) window shows a close-up of the focus area.
DISP. CUSTOM SETTING
Choose the items shown in the standard indicator display
(P 21).
The Setup Menus
9
290
SCREEN SETTING
LARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF)
Select ON to display large indicators in the electronic viewfinder. The indicators displayed can be selected using D SCREEN
SET-UP > LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING.
OFF
ON
O Some
icons are not displayed when ON is selected for LARGE
INDICATORS MODE(EVF) (P 13).
N If LARGE INDICATORS MODE is assigned to a function button, the
button can be used to toggle LARGE INDICATORS MODE on (ON)
and off (OFF) (P 321).
The Setup Menus
LARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD)
Select ON to display large indicators in the LCD monitor. The indicators displayed can be selected using D SCREEN SET-UP >
LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING.
9
OFF
ON
O Some
icons are not displayed when ON is selected for LARGE
INDICATORS MODE(LCD) (P 15).
N If LARGE INDICATORS MODE is assigned to a function button, the
button can be used to toggle LARGE INDICATORS MODE on (ON)
and off (OFF) (P 321).
291
LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING
Choose the indicators displayed when
ON is selected for D SCREEN SET-UP >
LARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF) or
LARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD).
LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING
Expo. DISP.
Scale
L1
L2
L3
L4
R1
R2
Option
A Expo. DISP.
B d Scale
C L1, L2, L3, L4
D R1, R2, R3, R4
Description
Choose the items listed at the bottom of the display.
Selected items are indicated by check marks (R); to
deselect, highlight the check marks and press MENU/OK.
Select ON to display the exposure indicator.
Choose up to four large icons for display on the left side
of the screen.
Choose up to four large icons for display on the right
side of the screen.
INFORMATION CONTRAST ADJ.
Adjust display contrast.
The Setup Menus
Option
HIGH CONTRAST
STANDARD
LOW CONTRAST
DARK AMBIENT LIGHTING
9
292
Description
High contrast.
Normal contrast.
Low contrast.
Contrast adjusted for dim ambient lighting.
SCREEN SETTING
LOCATION INFO
Select ON to display location info downloaded from a smartphone.
Options
ON
OFF
x Q MENU BACKGROUND
Choose the background color used for the quick menu when it is
displayed during still photography.
Options
TRANSPARENT
BLACK
F Q MENU BACKGROUND
Choose the background color used for the quick menu when it is
displayed during movie recording.
Options
TRANSPARENT
BLACK
The Setup Menus
9
293
BUTTON/DIAL SETTING
Access options for camera controls.
To access control options, press MENU/OK,
select the D (SET UP) tab, and choose
BUTTON/DIAL SETTING.
BUTTON/DIAL SETTING
FOCUS LEVER SETTING
EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU
EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU
FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING
POWER ZOOM LENS FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING
SELECTOR BUTTON SETTING
COMMAND DIAL SETTING
o S.S OPERATION
EXIT
FOCUS LEVER SETTING
Choose the functions performed by pressing the center of the
focus stick (focus lever) or by pressing the stick up, down, left, or
right.
PUSH
Option
OFF
The Setup Menus
9
Description
Pressing the center of the stick has no effect.
Press the center of the stick to choose the focus area size.
If g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING or SUBJECT
EDIT FOCUS AREA
DETECTION SETTING is on, you can instead position the
focus frame over the desired face, eye, animal, or object.
Press the center of the stick to zoom in on the active focus
ZOOM
area (P 90).
RESET TO CENTER Press the center of the stick to select the center focus area.
TILT o
Option
OFF
DIRECT AF POINT
SELECTION
EDIT FOCUS AREA
294
Description
Pressing the stick up, down, left, or right has no effect.
Choose the focus area without leaving the shooting display.
Press the stick up, down, left, or right to view a focus-area
display and choose the focus area.
BUTTON/DIAL SETTING
x EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU
Choose the items displayed in the quick menu during still photography (P 315).
F EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU
Choose the items displayed in the quick menu when filming
movies (P 315).
FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING
Choose the roles played by the function buttons (P 321).
POWER ZOOM LENS FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING
Choose the roles played by the function buttons available on
some power zoom lenses (P 329).
SELECTOR BUTTON SETTING
Choose the roles played by the up, down, left, and right buttons
on the selector.
Description
The selector buttons serve as function buttons.
The selector buttons can be used to position the focus area.
N Selecting FOCUS AREA prevents you accessing the functions assigned
to the function buttons.
The Setup Menus
Option
Fn BUTTON
FOCUS AREA
9
295
COMMAND DIAL SETTING
Choose the roles played by the command dials.
Option
FRONT COMMAND
DIAL 1
FRONT COMMAND
DIAL 2
Description
Assign shutter speed (S.S. (PROGRAM SHIFT)) or aperture (APERTURE) 1 to FRONT COMMAND DIAL 1.
Assign shutter speed (S.S. (PROGRAM SHIFT)), aperture (APERTURE) 1, exposure compensation (EXP.
COMPENSATION) 2, sensitivity (ISO) 3, or no role (NONE)
FRONT COMMAND to FRONT COMMAND DIAL 2 or FRONT COMMAND
DIAL 3
DIAL 3.
Assign shutter speed (S.S. (PROGRAM SHIFT)), apREAR COMMAND erture (APERTURE) 1, exposure compensation (EXP.
DIAL
COMPENSATION) 2, sensitivity (ISO) 3, or no role (NONE)
to the rear command dial.
1 Aperture set to A (auto) and lens equipped with aperture ring or COMMAND
selected for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > APERTURE RING SETTING (A).
2 Exposure compensation dial rotated to C.
3 Sensitivity dial rotated to C.
The Setup Menus
DIAL SETTING can also be accessed by pressing and
N • COMMAND
holding the center of the front command dial.
• You can also press the center of the front command dial to cycle
through settings in the order FRONT COMMAND DIAL 1, FRONT
COMMAND DIAL 2, and FRONT COMMAND DIAL 3.
9
296
BUTTON/DIAL SETTING
o S.S OPERATION
Select OFF to disable shutter-speed fine-tuning using the command dials.
Options
ON
OFF
COMMAND DIAL DIRECTION
Choose the direction in which the command dials are rotated to
choose values. Settings for the front and rear command dials can
be adjusted separately.
Option
- ––––– +
+ ––––– -
Description
Rotate the dial right for higher values or to move to the next
item.
Rotate the dial left for higher values or to move to the next item.
The Setup Menus
9
297
SHUTTER AF
Choose whether the camera focuses when the shutter button is
pressed halfway.
Option
Description
AF-S
• ON: Focus locks when the shutter button is pressed halfway.
• OFF: No focus operation is performed when the shutter button is pressed halfway.
• ON: The camera focuses while the shutter button is pressed
AF-C
halfway.
• OFF: No focus operation is performed when the shutter button is pressed halfway.
SHUTTER AE
If ON is selected, exposure will lock while the shutter button is
pressed halfway. The setting for focus mode C (AF-C) can be adjusted separately from that for modes S (AF-S) and M (manual focus).
Options
ON
OFF
The Setup Menus
N Select OFF to allow the camera to adjust exposure before each shot
taken in burst mode.
9
298
BUTTON/DIAL SETTING
SHOOT WITHOUT LENS
Choose ON to enable the shutter release when no lens is attached.
Options
ON
OFF
SHOOT WITHOUT CARD
Choose whether the shutter can be released without a memory
card inserted in the camera.
Option
ON
OFF
Description
When no memory card is inserted, the shutter can be released to
test camera function and the shooting and setup menus can be
displayed.
The shutter is disabled if no memory card is inserted, preventing
accidental loss of pictures taken without a memory card.
The Setup Menus
9
299
LENS ZOOM/FOCUS SETTING
Adjust settings for compatible lenses with focus rings or power zoom.
FOCUS RING ROTATE
Choose the direction in which the focus ring is rotated to increase the focus distance.
Options
X CW (clockwise)
Y CCW (counterclockwise)
FOCUS RING OPERATION
Choose how the camera adjusts focus in response to the movement of the focus ring.
Option
Description
NONLINEAR Focus is adjusted at the same rate as the ring is rotated.
Focus is adjusted linearly according to the amount the ring is rotated,
LINEAR
but the focusing speed is unaffected by the speed the ring is rotated.
The Setup Menus
9
F CONSTANT SPEED FOCUS (Fn)
Choose the rate at which the focus distance changes when adjusted using function buttons during manual focus with compatible
power zoom lenses. The higher the number, the higher the rate.
Options
1(SLOW)
2
3
4
5
6
7
8(FAST)
CONSTANT SPEED ZOOM (Fn)
Choose the rate at which compatible power zoom lenses can be
zoomed in or out using function buttons. The higher the number, the
higher the rate.
Options
1(SLOW)
300
2
3
4
5
6
7
8(FAST)
BUTTON/DIAL SETTING
CONSTANT SPEED ZOOM/FOCUS (Fn) OPERATION
Choose whether the function buttons on compatible power
zoom lenses need only be pressed once to start and stop power
focus or power zoom.
Option
START/STOP
SWITCH
ACTIVE WHILE
PRESSING
Description
The operation starts when the button is pressed and stops when
it is pressed a second time.
The operation continues while the button is pressed and stops
when the button is released.
ZOOM RING ROTATE
Choose whether to reverse the rotation of the zoom ring on compatible power zoom lenses.
Options
X CW (clockwise)
Y CCW (counterclockwise)
ZOOM/FOCUS CONTROL RING
Choose role played by the zoom/focus control ring on compatible power zoom lenses.
The Setup Menus
Options
ZOOM
FOCUS
9
301
AE/AF-LOCK MODE
This option determines the behavior of the button to which
exposure and/or focus lock is assigned.
Option
Description
AE&AF ON WHEN
Exposure and/or focus will lock while the button is pressed.
PRESSING
AE&AF ON/OFF Exposure and/or focus will lock when the button is pressed and remain locked until it is pressed again.
SWITCH
AWB-LOCK MODE
Choose the behavior of function buttons assigned auto white balance
(AWB) lock. Auto white balance lock is used to lock white balance at
the value metered by the camera when WA WHITE PRIORITY, AUTO,
or AA AMBIENCE PRIORITY is selected for white balance.
Option
Description
AWB ON WHEN
Auto white balance locks while the button is pressed.
PRESSING
AWB ON/OFF Press the button once to lock auto white balance and again to end
the lock.
SWITCH
The Setup Menus
9
302
BUTTON/DIAL SETTING
APERTURE RING SETTING (A)
Choose whether the front command dial can be used to adjust
aperture when aperture is set to A (auto).
Option
AUTO
COMMAND
Description
The camera adjusts aperture automatically.
Aperture can be adjusted using the front command dial.
APERTURE SETTING
Choose the method used to adjust aperture when using lenses
with no aperture rings.
Option
AUTO +
o MANUAL
AUTO
MANUAL
Description
Rotate the front command dial to choose the aperture. Rotate past
minimum aperture to choose A (auto).
Aperture is selected automatically; camera functions in exposure
mode P (program AE) or S (shutter-priority AE).
Rotate the front command dial to choose the aperture; camera
functions in exposure mode A (aperture-priority AE) or M (manual).
Option
Description
Pressing the button displays a dialog where pictures can be
selected for upload to a smartphone with which the camera
a SMARTPHONE
is paired (P 239). If the camera is not currently paired with
TRANSFER ORDER
a smartphone, Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING options
will be displayed instead (P 264).
r WIRELESS
The button can be used for wireless connections.
COMMUNICATION
303
The Setup Menus
a Fn1 BUTTON SETTING
Choose the role performed by the Fn1 button during playback.
9
TOUCH SCREEN SETTING
Enable or disable touch-screen controls.
x TOUCH SCREEN SETTING
Option
ON
OFF
Description
The LCD monitor functions as a touch screen during shooting.
Touch controls disabled.
x DOUBLE TAP SETTING
Option
ON
OFF
Description
Tap the LCD monitor twice to zoom in on your subject during
shooting.
Touch zoom disabled.
c TOUCH FUNCTION
Option
ON
OFF
Description
Enable touch-function gestures.
Disable touch-function gestures.
The Setup Menus
TOUCH ZOOM
Option
ON
OFF
9
Description
If the lens supports touch zoom, you can zoom in and out by
touching the LCD monitor (P 30).
Touch zoom disabled.
a TOUCH SCREEN SETTING
Option
ON
OFF
304
Description
The LCD monitor functions as a touch screen during playback.
Touch controls disabled.
BUTTON/DIAL SETTING
EVF TOUCH SCREEN AREA SETTINGS
Select the area of the LCD monitor used for touch controls while
the viewfinder is active. The area used for touch controls can be
selected from:
Option
6
0
2
4
1
3
5
OFF
Description
All.
Right half.
Top right quarter.
Bottom right quarter.
Left half.
Top left quarter.
Bottom left quarter.
Touch controls disabled.
LOCK
Lock selected controls to prevent unintended operation.
Option
FUNCTION
SELECTION
Choose the controls locked when SELECTED FUNCTION is
chosen for LOCK SETTING.
N The controls selected using SELECTED FUNCTION can be locked at any
time during shooting by pressing and holding MENU/OK. To unlock the
controls, press and hold the button again.
305
The Setup Menus
Description
Choose from the following:
• UNLOCK: Reset lock options.
ALL FUNCTION: Lock all controls in the FUNCTION
LOCK SETTING •
SELECTION list.
• SELECTED FUNCTION: Lock only the controls selected in
the FUNCTION SELECTION list.
9
POWER MANAGEMENT
Adjust power management settings.
To access power management settings,
press MENU/OK, select the D (SET UP) tab,
and choose POWER MANAGEMENT.
POWER MANAGEMENT
AUTO POWER OFF
PERFORMANCE
EVF/LCD BOOST SETTING
AUTO POWER OFF TEMP.
EXIT
AUTO POWER OFF
Choose the length of time before the camera turns off automatically when no operations are performed. Shorter times increase
battery life; if OFF is selected, the camera must be turned off
manually.
Options
5 MIN
2 MIN
1 MIN
30 SEC
15 SEC
OFF
The Setup Menus
PERFORMANCE
Select BOOST to improve focus and viewfinder display performance.
Option
BOOST
NORMAL
9
ECONOMY
306
Description
Boost camera focus and viewfinder display performance.
The battery drains faster than when is NORMAL selected.
Choose for standard focus and viewfinder display performance and battery endurance.
Limit autofocus and viewfinder performance. This option
offers better battery endurance than does NORMAL.
POWER MANAGEMENT
EVF/LCD BOOST SETTING
Adjust the behavior of the EVF and LCD monitor when BOOST is
selected for PERFORMANCE.
Option
EVF/LCD LOW LIGHT
PRIORITY
EVF/LCD RESOLUTION
PRIORITY
EVF FRAME RATE
PRIORITY (100P)
Description
Display brightness is adjusted to make subjects in shadows easier to see. Motion blur may cause ghosting.
Display resolution is increased to make details easier to
see.
The refresh rate for the EVF is increased, smoothing motion.
The refresh rate for the EVF is increased beyond EVF
EVF FRAME RATE
FRAME RATE PRIORITY (100P) smoothing motion
PRIORITY (200P EQUIV.)
still further. The EVF may darken.
AUTO POWER OFF TEMP.
If its temperature rises beyond a certain point, the camera will first
display a message and then, if the temperature rise continues, automatically end shooting and power down. Choose the temperature
at which the camera turns off automatically.
STANDARD
HIGH
Description
The camera turns off automatically when its temperature
reaches the STANDARD value.
Shooting can continue at temperatures higher than
the STANDARD value, extending the time available to
record movies and the like. Because remaining in contact
with the camera at these high temperatures could result
in low-temperature burns, this option should only be
used after mounting the camera on a tripod or taking
other steps to avoid prolonged contact with the camera.
307
The Setup Menus
Option
9
SAVE DATA SETTING
Make changes to file management settings.
To access file management settings,
press MENU/OK, select the D (SET UP) tab,
and choose SAVE DATA SET-UP.
SAVE DATA SETTING
FRAME NO.
EDIT FILE NAME
xCARD SLOT SETTING
SELECT SLOT(x SEQUENTIAL)
SELECT FOLDER
COPYRIGHT INFO
GEOTAGGING
EXIT
FRAME NO.
Frame number
New pictures are stored in image files named
using a four-digit file number assigned by
adding one to the last file number used. The
File
file number is displayed during playback as Directory
number number
shown. FRAME NO. controls whether file numbering is reset to 0001 when a new memory card is inserted or
the current memory card is formatted.
Option
The Setup Menus
9
CONTINUOUS
RENEW
Description
Numbering continues from the last file number used or the first
available file number, whichever is higher. Choose this option to
reduce the number of pictures with duplicate file names.
Numbering is reset to 0001 after formatting or when a new
memory card is inserted.
N • If the frame number reaches 999-9999, the shutter release will be
disabled. Turn the camera off and insert a formatted memory card
before resuming shooting.
• Selecting D USER SETTING > RESET sets FRAME NO. to
CONTINUOUS but does not reset the file number.
• Frame numbers for pictures taken with other cameras may differ.
308
SAVE DATA SETTING
EDIT FILE NAME
Change the file name prefix. sRGB images use a four-letter prefix
(default “DSCF”), Adobe RGB images a three-letter prefix (“DSF”)
preceded by an underscore.
Option
sRGB
AdobeRGB
Default prefix
DSCF
_DSF
Sample file name
ABCD0001
_ABC0001
x CARD SLOT SETTING
Choose the role played by the card in the second slot.
Option
SEQUENTIAL
BACKUP
SEPARATE
Description
The card in the second slot is used only when the card in the
first slot is full.
Each picture is recorded twice, once to each card.
RAW pictures will be saved to the card in the first slot and JPEG
or HEIF pictures to the card in the second slot. This option only
takes effect when FINE+RAW or NORMAL+RAW is selected
for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > IMAGE QUALITY.
Options
SLOT 1
SLOT 2
The Setup Menus
SELECT SLOT(xSEQUENTIAL)
Choose the card that is recorded to first when SEQUENTIAL is
selected for x CARD SLOT SETTING.
9
309
SAVE DATA SETTING
SELECT FOLDER
Create folders and choose the folder used to store subsequent
pictures.
Option
Description
To choose the folder in which subsequent pictures will be
stored, press the selector up or down to highlight an existing folder and press MENU/OK.
Enter a five-character folder name. The new folder will be
created with the next picture you take and subsequent
pictures will be stored in that folder.
SELECT FOLDER
CREATE FOLDER
COPYRIGHT INFO
Copyright information, in the form of Exif tags, can be added to
new images as they are taken. Changes to copyright information
are reflected only in images taken after the changes are made.
The Setup Menus
9
Option
Description
DISP COPYRIGHT INFO View the current copyright information.
ENTER AUTHOR’S INFO Enter the creator’s name.
ENTER COPYRIGHT INFO Enter the name of the copyright holder.
Delete the current copyright information. This change applies
DELETE COPYRIGHT INFO only to images taken after this option is selected; copyright
information recorded with existing images is not affected.
GEOTAGGING
If ON is selected, location data downloaded from a smartphone
will be embedded in pictures as they are taken.
Options
ON
310
OFF
Shortcuts
311
Shortcut Options
Customize camera controls to suit your style or situation.
Frequently-used options can be added to the Q menu or a custom “my” menu or assigned to a function button or touch-function gesture for direct access:
Shortcut Option
Description
Add frequently-used options to this custom menu,
“My menu”
which can be viewed by pressing MENU/OK and selecting the E (“MY MENU”) tab.
The Q menu is displayed by pressing the Q button.
The Quick Menu Use the Q menu to view or change the options selected for frequently-used menu items.
Use the function buttons for direct access to selectThe function buttons
ed features.
Use touch function button flick gestures (T-Fn1,
Touch-function
T-Fn2, T-Fn3, and T-Fn4) for direct access to selected
gestures
features.
Use the function buttons on the lens (if any) for diLens function buttons
rect access to selected features.
Shortcuts
10
312
P
313
315
321
326
329
MY MENU
Access a personalized menu of frequently-used options.
To display “my menu”, press MENU/OK in the
shooting display and select the E (MY
MENU) tab.
MY MENU
SELF-TIMER
INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING
FILM SIMULATION
GRAIN EFFECT
PHOTOMETRY
SHUTTER TYPE
IS MODE
gFACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING
EXIT
O The E tab is only available if options have been assigned to
MY MENU.
MY MENU SETTING
To choose the items listed in the E (MY MENU) tab:
1
In the setup menu, select D USER
SETTING > x MY MENU SETTING or
F MY MENU SETTING.
MY MENU SETTING
ADD ITEMS
RANK ITEMS
REMOVE ITEMS
N To reorder items, select RANK ITEMS.
To delete items, select REMOVE ITEMS.
2
Press the selector up or down to
highlight ADD ITEMS and press
MENU/OK. Options that can be added
to “my menu” are highlighted in blue.
MY MENU SETTING
SELECT
CANCEL
N Items currently in “my menu” are indicated by check marks.
Shortcuts
IMAGE SIZE
IMAGE QUALITY
RAW RECORDING
SELECT JPEG/HEIF
FILM SIMULATION
MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
GRAIN EFFECT
COLOR CHROME EFFECT
10
313
MY MENU
3
Choose a position for the item and
press MENU/OK. The item will be added
to “my menu”.
SELECT ITEM LOCATION
1 IMAGE SIZE
2 IMAGE QUALITY
MOVE
4
5
SAVE
Press MENU/OK to return to the edit display.
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 until all the desired items have been
added.
N “My menu” can contain up to 16 items.
Shortcuts
10
314
The Quick Menu
Use the quick menu for quick access to selected options. To
view the quick menu, press the Q button.
The Quick Menu Display
The quick menu offers different options in photo and movie
modes. At default settings, it contains the following items:
Still photography
SELECT CUSTOM SETTING
APERTURE PRIORITY AE
SET
LONG PRESS EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM
* If no settings bank is currently selected for x SELECT CUSTOM SETTING, the shooting mode will be displayed instead.
The quick menu shows the options currently selected for items
B–P, which can be changed.
315
Shortcuts
Default
A x SELECT CUSTOM SETTING * I HIGHLIGHT TONE
B AF MODE
J SHADOW TONE
C DYNAMIC RANGE
K COLOR
D WHITE BALANCE
L SHARPNESS
E HIGH ISO NR
M SELF-TIMER
g FACE/EYE DETECTION
F IMAGE SIZE
N
SETTING
G IMAGE QUALITY
O SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING
H FILM SIMULATION
P EVF/LCD BRIGHTNESS
10
Movie recording
SELECT CUSTOM SETTING
APERTURE PRIORITY AE
SET
LONG PRESS EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM
Default
A F SELECT CUSTOM SETTING * E APERTURE (MOVIE OPTIMIZED
CONTROL oL)
B S.S. (MOVIE OPTIMIZED
F ISO (MOVIE OPTIMIZED
CONTROL oL)
CONTROL oL)
C MOVIE MODE RESOLUTION/
G MOVIE MODE FRAME RATE
ASPECT RATIO
D F WHITE BALANCE
H F WHITE BALANCE COLOR
TEMP. (WHEN k SELECTED)
Shortcuts
* If no settings bank is currently selected for F SELECT CUSTOM SETTING, the shooting mode will be displayed instead.
The quick menu shows the options currently selected for items
B–H, which can be changed.
10
316
The Quick Menu
Viewing and Changing Settings
1 Press Q to display the quick menu
during shooting.
2
Use the selector to highlight items
and rotate the rear command dial to
change.
SELECT CUSTOM SETTING
APERTURE PRIORITY AE
SET
LONG PRESS EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM
N To jump to the x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING or F EDIT/
SAVE CUSTOM SETTING menu, press and hold the Q button
when the quick menu is displayed.
3
Press Q to exit when settings are complete.
can assign the Q button roles normally reserved for the function
buttons or assign the Q button’s default role to a function button
(P 321).
• To disable the Q (quick menu) button, select NONE for D BUTTON/
DIAL SETTING > FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING > Q BUTTON SETTING.
317
Shortcuts
N • The quick menu can also be edited using touch controls.
• Using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING, you
10
Editing the Quick Menu
To choose the items displayed in the quick menu:
1
Press and hold the Q button during
shooting.
N The camera displays the photo quick menu during still photography and the movie quick menu when in movie mode.
2
The current quick menu will be displayed; use the selector
to highlight the item you wish to change and press MENU/OK.
3
Highlight the item you wish to change and press MENU/OK.
The following can be assigned to the quick menu.
N The quick menus can also be edited using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING >
x EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU or F EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU.
Shortcuts
10
318
The Quick Menu
Available Items (Still Photography)
Choose from:
• IMAGE SIZE
• IMAGE QUALITY
• FILM SIMULATION
• GRAIN EFFECT
• COLOR CHROME EFFECT
• COLOR CHROME FX BLUE
• SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT
• DYNAMIC RANGE
• D RANGE PRIORITY
• WHITE BALANCE
• WHITE BALANCE COLOR TEMP.
(WHEN k SELECTED)
• HIGHLIGHT TONE
• SHADOW TONE
• COLOR
• SHARPNESS
• CLARITY
• HIGH ISO NR
• AF MODE
• AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS
• g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING
• SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING
• MF ASSIST
• TOUCH SCREEN MODE
• SELF-TIMER
• PHOTOMETRY
• SHUTTER TYPE
• FLICKER REDUCTION
• FLASH FUNCTION SETTING
• FLASH COMPENSATION
• MOVIE MODE RESOLUTION/ASPECT
RATIO
• MOVIE MODE FRAME RATE
• BIT RATE
• HIGH SPEED REC
• F IS MODE
• F IS MODE BOOST
• INTERNAL/EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL
ADJUSTMENT
• EVF/LCD BRIGHTNESS
• EVF/LCD COLOR
• NONE
N To disable the function button, choose NONE.
Shortcuts
10
319
The Quick Menu
Available Items (Movies)
• FILM SIMULATION
• DYNAMIC RANGE
• F WHITE BALANCE
• F WHITE BALANCE COLOR TEMP.
(WHEN k SELECTED)
• HIGHLIGHT TONE
• SHADOW TONE
• COLOR
• SHARPNESS
• HIGH ISO NR
• g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING
• SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING
• MF ASSIST
• TOUCH SCREEN MODE
• PHOTOMETRY
• MOVIE MODE RESOLUTION/ASPECT
RATIO
• MOVIE MODE FRAME RATE
• BIT RATE
• HIGH SPEED REC
• F SELF-TIMER
• MOVIE AF MODE
• FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION
• F IS MODE
• F IS MODE BOOST
• S.S.
(MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL)
• APERTURE
(MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL)
• ISO
(MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL)
• INTERNAL/EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL
ADJUSTMENT
• EVF/LCD BRIGHTNESS
• EVF/LCD COLOR
• NONE
N To disable the function button, choose NONE.
Shortcuts
10
320
Function Controls
Assign a role to each function button or touch-function
gesture for quick access to the selected feature.
The Function Buttons
Assign a role to the function buttons for quick access to the selected feature.
Function Button Defaults
The default assignments are:
Back-of-Camera Function Buttons
Shortcuts
Function buttons
A AFON button
B Center of rear command dial
C Q (quick menu) button
D AEL (exposure lock) button
Default
AF-ON
FOCUS CHECK
QUICK MENU
AE LOCK ONLY
10
321
Front-of-Camera Function Buttons
Function buttons
A VIEW MODE button
B Fn1 button
C Fn2 button
Default
VIEW MODE SETTING
FACE DETECTION ON/OFF
DRIVE SETTING
The Selector
Shortcuts
10
Function buttons
A Fn3 button
B Fn5 button
C Fn6 button
D Fn4 button
322
Default
PHOTOMETRY
WHITE BALANCE
PERFORMANCE
FILM SIMULATION
Function Controls
Assigning Roles to the Function Buttons
Pressing and holding the DISP/BACK button displays a dialog where
you can choose the roles assigned to the function buttons.
1
Press and hold the DISP/BACK button
until a control selection menu is displayed.
N You can also assign roles to function buttons using D BUTTON/
DIAL SETTING > FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING.
2
3
Highlight the desired control and press MENU/OK.
Highlight any of the following options and press MENU/OK to
assign it to the selected control.
Shortcuts
10
323
Roles That Can Be Assigned to the Function Buttons
Choose from:
Shortcuts
10
• IMAGE SIZE
• IMAGE QUALITY
• RAW
• FILM SIMULATION
• GRAIN EFFECT
• COLOR CHROME EFFECT
• COLOR CHROME FX BLUE
• SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT
• DYNAMIC RANGE
• D RANGE PRIORITY
• WHITE BALANCE
• CLARITY
• SELECT CUSTOM SETTING
• RECALL CUSTOM 1 SETTING
• FOCUS AREA
• FOCUS CHECK
• AF MODE
• AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS
• FACE DETECTION ON/OFF
• RIGHT/LEFT EYE SWITCH
• SUBJECT DETECTION ON/OFF
• AF RANGE LIMITER
• FOCUS CHECK LOCK
• DRIVE SETTING
• SPORTS FINDER MODE
• PRE-SHOT sJ
• SELF-TIMER
• PHOTOMETRY
• SHUTTER TYPE
• FLICKER REDUCTION
• FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING
• ISO AUTO SETTING
• IS MODE
324
• DIGITAL TELE-CONV.
• MULTI EXPOSURE
• WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
• FLASH FUNCTION SETTING
• TTL-LOCK
• MODELING FLASH
• MOVIE RECORDING RELEASE
• HIGH SPEED REC
• F SELF-TIMER
• FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION
• F IS MODE BOOST
• ZEBRA SETTING
• INTERNAL/EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL
ADJUSTMENT
• 4ch AUDIO PLAYBACK
• MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL
• VIEW MODE SETTING
• PREVIEW DEPTH OF FIELD
• PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE
• NATURAL LIVE VIEW
• HISTOGRAM
• ELECTRONIC LEVEL SWITCH
• LARGE INDICATORS MODE
• F-Log VIEW ASSIST
• ZOOM/FOCUS CONTROL RING
• CONSTANT SPEED ZOOM (T)
• CONSTANT SPEED ZOOM (W)
• F CONSTANT SPEED FOCUS (N)
• F CONSTANT SPEED FOCUS (F)
• AE LOCK ONLY
• AF LOCK ONLY
• AE/AF LOCK
Function Controls
• AF-ON
• AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER
• AWB LOCK ONLY
• Bluetooth ON/OFF
• APERTURE SETTING
• QUICK MENU
• LOCK SETTING
• PLAYBACK
• PERFORMANCE
• NONE
N • The selector cannot be assigned more than one role at a time.
• To disable the function button, choose NONE.
AF-ON
Controls to which AF-ON is assigned can be used for autofocus.
MODELING FLASH
If MODELING FLASH is selected when a compatible shoe-mounted flash unit is attached, you can press the control to test-fire the
flash and check for shadows and the like (modeling flash).
TTL-LOCK
If TTL-LOCK is selected, you can press the control to lock flash
output according to the option selected for F FLASH SETTING >
TTL-LOCK MODE (P 181).
Shortcuts
RECALL CUSTOM 1 SETTING
Controls to which RECALL CUSTOM 1 SETTING has been assigned can be pressed to temporarily recall the settings saved to
C1 (CUSTOM 1). Pressing the button a second time restores the
previous settings.
10
325
Touch-Function Gestures
Assign roles to touch-function gestures (T-Fn1, T-Fn2, T-Fn3, or T-Fn4)
for quick access to selected features.
N Touch-function gestures are disabled by default. To enable touch-func-
tion gestures, select ON for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCH
SCREEN SETTING > c TOUCH FUNCTION.
Touch-Function Gesture Defaults
The default assignments for the different gestures are:
Shortcuts
Touch-Function Gestures
A T-Fn1 (flick up)
B T-Fn2 (flick left)
C T-Fn3 (flick right)
D T-Fn4 (flick down)
10
326
Default
HISTOGRAM
PREVIEW DEPTH OF FIELD
LARGE INDICATORS MODE
ELECTRONIC LEVEL SWITCH
Function Controls
Assigning Roles to Touch Function Gestures
Pressing and holding the DISP/BACK button displays a dialog where
you can choose the roles assigned to touch function gestures.
1
Press and hold the DISP/BACK button
until a control selection menu is displayed.
N Button assignments can also be selected using D BUTTON/DIAL
SETTING > FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING.
2
3
Highlight a touch function gesture and press MENU/OK.
Highlight any of the following options and press MENU/OK to
assign it to the selected control.
Shortcuts
10
327
Roles That Can Be Assigned to Touch Function Gestures
Choose from:
Shortcuts
10
• IMAGE SIZE
• IMAGE QUALITY
• RAW
• FILM SIMULATION
• GRAIN EFFECT
• COLOR CHROME EFFECT
• COLOR CHROME FX BLUE
• SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT
• DYNAMIC RANGE
• D RANGE PRIORITY
• WHITE BALANCE
• CLARITY
• SELECT CUSTOM SETTING
• RECALL CUSTOM 1 SETTING
• FOCUS AREA
• FOCUS CHECK
• AF MODE
• AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS
• FACE DETECTION ON/OFF
• RIGHT/LEFT EYE SWITCH
• SUBJECT DETECTION ON/OFF
• AF RANGE LIMITER
• FOCUS CHECK LOCK
• DRIVE SETTING
• SPORTS FINDER MODE
• PRE-SHOT sJ
• SELF-TIMER
• PHOTOMETRY
• SHUTTER TYPE
• FLICKER REDUCTION
• FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING
• ISO AUTO SETTING
• IS MODE
• DIGITAL TELE-CONV.
• MULTI EXPOSURE
• WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
• FLASH FUNCTION SETTING
• TTL-LOCK
• MODELING FLASH
• HIGH SPEED REC
• F SELF-TIMER
• FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION
• F IS MODE BOOST
• ZEBRA SETTING
• INTERNAL/EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL
ADJUSTMENT
• 4ch AUDIO PLAYBACK
• MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL
• VIEW MODE SETTING
• PREVIEW DEPTH OF FIELD
• PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE
• NATURAL LIVE VIEW
• HISTOGRAM
• ELECTRONIC LEVEL SWITCH
• LARGE INDICATORS MODE
• F-Log VIEW ASSIST
• ZOOM/FOCUS CONTROL RING
• APERTURE SETTING
• LOCK SETTING
• PERFORMANCE
• AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER
• Bluetooth ON/OFF
• QUICK MENU
• PLAYBACK
• NONE
N To disable touch-function gestures, choose NONE.
328
Function Controls
Lens Function Buttons
Choose the roles played by the function buttons on the lens
(where applicable).
Lens Function Button Defaults
The default assignments are:
N A XF18-120mmF4 LM PZ WR lens is used here for illustrative purposes.
Lens function button
Default
ZOOM/FOCUS CONTROL RING
A Z/F
CONSTANT SPEED ZOOM (T)
B L-Fn1 (rocker zoom button pressed up)
C L-Fn2 (rocker zoom button pressed down) CONSTANT SPEED ZOOM (W)
Shortcuts
10
329
Assigning Roles to the Lens Function Buttons
The roles played by the lens function buttons can be selected
using the D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > POWER ZOOM LENS
FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING option in the setup menu.
Shortcuts
10
• IMAGE SIZE
• IMAGE QUALITY
• RAW
• FILM SIMULATION
• GRAIN EFFECT
• COLOR CHROME EFFECT
• COLOR CHROME FX BLUE
• SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT
• DYNAMIC RANGE
• D RANGE PRIORITY
• WHITE BALANCE
• CLARITY
• SELECT CUSTOM SETTING
• RECALL CUSTOM 1 SETTING
• FOCUS AREA
• FOCUS CHECK
• AF MODE
• AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS
• FACE DETECTION ON/OFF
• RIGHT/LEFT EYE SWITCH
• SUBJECT DETECTION ON/OFF
• AF RANGE LIMITER
• FOCUS CHECK LOCK
• DRIVE SETTING
• SPORTS FINDER MODE
• PRE-SHOT sJ
• SELF-TIMER
• PHOTOMETRY
• SHUTTER TYPE
• FLICKER REDUCTION
• FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING
• ISO AUTO SETTING
330
• IS MODE
• DIGITAL TELE-CONV.
• MULTI EXPOSURE
• WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
• FLASH FUNCTION SETTING
• TTL-LOCK
• MODELING FLASH
• MOVIE RECORDING RELEASE
• HIGH SPEED REC
• F SELF-TIMER
• FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION
• F IS MODE BOOST
• ZEBRA SETTING
• INTERNAL/EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL
ADJUSTMENT
• 4ch AUDIO PLAYBACK
• MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL
• VIEW MODE SETTING
• PREVIEW DEPTH OF FIELD
• PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE
• NATURAL LIVE VIEW
• HISTOGRAM
• ELECTRONIC LEVEL SWITCH
• LARGE INDICATORS MODE
• F-Log VIEW ASSIST
• ZOOM/FOCUS CONTROL RING
• CONSTANT SPEED ZOOM (T)
• CONSTANT SPEED ZOOM (W)
• F CONSTANT SPEED FOCUS (N)
• F CONSTANT SPEED FOCUS (F)
• AE LOCK ONLY
• AF LOCK ONLY
Function Controls
• AE/AF LOCK
• AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER
• AF-ON
• Bluetooth ON/OFF
• AWB LOCK ONLY
• QUICK MENU
• APERTURE SETTING
• PLAYBACK
• LOCK SETTING
• NONE
• PERFORMANCE
N • To disable the function button, choose NONE.
• Selected function lock is not available when CONSTANT SPEED
ZOOM (T) or CONSTANT SPEED ZOOM (W) is assigned to a lens
function button (P 305).
Shortcuts
10
331
MEMO
332
Peripherals and Optional
Accessories
333
Lenses
The camera can be used with lenses for the FUJIFILM
X-mount.
Lens Parts
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
A Lens hood
B Mounting marks
C Focus ring
D Zoom ring
E Aperture ring
F O.I.S. switch
G Aperture mode switch
H Lens signal contacts
I Front lens cap
J Rear lens cap
N A XF18-55mmF2.8-4 R LM OIS lens is used here for illustrative purposes.
11
334
Lenses
Lens Care
• Use a blower to remove dust, then gently wipe with a soft, dry
cloth. Any remaining stains can be removed by wiping gently
with a piece of Fujifilm lens-cleaning paper to which a small
amount of lens-cleaning fluid has been applied.
• Replace the front and rear caps when the lens is not in use.
Removing Lens Caps
Remove lens caps as shown.
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
O Lens caps may differ from those shown.
11
335
Attaching Lens Hoods
When attached, lens hoods reduce glare
and protect the front lens element.
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
336
Lenses
Lenses with Aperture Rings
At settings other than A, you can adjust
aperture by rotating the lens aperture
ring (exposure modes A and M).
A 16 11 8 5.6 4 2.8
A 16 11 8 5.6 4
Aperture ring
N • Selecting ON for MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL disables the
aperture ring.
• If COMMAND is selected for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > APERTURE
RING SETTING (A) when the aperture ring is set to A, aperture can be
adjusted by rotating the command dials.
The Aperture Mode Switch
If the lens has an aperture mode switch, aperture can be adjusted manually by sliding the
switch to Z and rotating the aperture ring.
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
Aperture ring
Aperture mode switch
11
337
Lenses with No Aperture Rings
The method used to adjust aperture
can be selected using D BUTTON/DIAL
SETTING > APERTURE SETTING. When
an option other than AUTO is selected,
aperture can be adjusted using the front
command dial.
N Aperture control defaults to the front command dial, but can be reassigned to the rear command dial using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING >
COMMAND DIAL SETTING.
Lenses with O.I.S. Switches
If the lens supports optical image stabilization (O.I.S.), the image stabilization mode can be chosen in the camera
menus. To activate image stabilization,
slide the O.I.S. switch to ON.
O.I.S. switch
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
338
Lenses
Manual Focus Lenses
Slide the focus ring to the front for autofocus.
For manual focus, slide the focus ring to
the back and rotate it while checking the
results in the camera display. The focus
distance and depth-of-field indicators
can be used to assist manual focus.
O Note that manual focus may not be available in all shooting modes.
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
The Depth-of-Field Indicator
The depth-of-field indicator shows the approximate depth of field (the distance in front of and
behind the focus point that appears to be in
focus). The indicator is displayed in film format.
11
339
Lenses
Power Zoom Lenses
Zoom can be adjusted on power zoom lenses using the zoom/
focus control ring, zoom button, or zoom ring.
O Adjusting zoom while the lens is wet makes it easier for water to find
its way inside the lens. Wipe any water from the lens before adjusting
zoom.
N A XF18-120mmF4 LM PZ WR lens is used here for illustrative purposes.
Control
A Zoom ring
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
Description
Rotate the zoom ring to zoom in or out manually.
Rotate the zoom/focus control ring to zoom in or out
B Zoom/focus control ring using powered zoom. The zoom speed is proportional
to the speed with which the ring is rotated.
Switch the role of zoom/focus control ring from focus
C Z/F (zoom/focus) button
to zoom or vice versa.
Press a zoom button to zoom in or out at a steady
speed using powered zoom. Zoom ends when the
D Zoom buttons
button is pressed a second time.
N • The
Z/F and zoom buttons can be assigned other roles using
D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > POWER ZOOM LENS FUNCTION (Fn)
SETTING.
• The speed at which zoom can be adjusted via the zoom buttons can
be chosen using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > LENS ZOOM/FOCUS
SETTING.
340
External Flash Units
Use optional external flash units for flash photography.
Some units support high-speed sync (FP) and can be used
at shutter speeds faster than the flash sync speed, while
others can function as commanders controlling remote
units via optical wireless flash control.
O You may be unable to test-fire the flash in some circumstances, for example when a setup menu is displayed on the camera.
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
Red-Eye Removal
Red-eye removal is available when FLASH is selected for F FLASH
SETTING > RED EYE REMOVAL. Red-eye removal minimizes “red-eye”
caused when light from the flash is reflected from the subject’s retinas.
Flash Sync Speed
The flash will synchronize with the shutter at shutter speeds of ½50 s or
slower.
Optional Flash Units from Fujifilm
The camera can be used with optional Fujifilm shoe-mounted flash units.
Third-Party Flash Units
Do not use third-party flash units that apply over 300 V to the camera hot
shoe.
11
341
Flash Settings
1 Connect the unit to the camera.
2
In shooting mode, select FLASH
FUNCTION SETTING in the F (FLASH
SETTING) menu tab. The options
available vary with the flash unit.
FLASH SETTING
FLASH FUNCTION SETTING
RED EYE REMOVAL
TTL-LOCK MODE
LED LIGHT SETTING
COMMANDER SETTING
CH SETTING
EXIT
Menu
EF-X8
SYNC
TERMINAL
SHOE MOUNT
FLASH
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
COMMANDER
(OPTICAL)
3
Description
Displayed when an optional EF-X8 flash unit is mounted
on the hot shoe and raised.
Adjust settings for flash units connected via the sync
terminal. SYNC TERMINAL is displayed if the EF-X8 is
lowered and either no flash unit, or an incompatible flash
unit, is mounted on the hot shoe.
Displayed when an optional flash unit other than the
EF-X8 is mounted on the hot shoe and turned on.
Displayed if an optional flash unit functioning as a commander for Fujifilm optical wireless remote flash control is
connected and turned on.
Highlight items using the selector
and rotate the rear command dial to
change the highlighted setting.
Press DISP/BACK to put the changes into effect.
11
342
343
345
346
349
MODE
EF-X8
ADJUST
4
P
END
External Flash Units
EF-X8
The following settings are available when an optional EF-X8
shoe-mounted flash unit is attached.
MODE
EF-X8
ADJUST
END
Setting
343
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
Description
Choose from the following options:
• TTL: TTL mode. Adjust flash compensation (B) and choose
a flash mode (C).
• M: The flash fires at the selected output (B) regardless of
subject brightness or camera settings. Output is expressed
in fractions of full power, from ⁄ to ⁄. The desired results
may not be achieved at low values if they exceed the limits
of the flash control system; take a test shot and check the
A Flash control mode results.
• C (COMMANDER): Choose if the flash is being used to control remote synced flash units, for example as part of a studio flash system.
• D (OFF): The EF-X8 does not fire. Flash units connected
via the sync terminal will still fire when the shutter is released, but can be disabled by lowering the EF-X8 and turning the units off in the flash settings menu.
Adjust
flash level. The options available vary with the flash
Flash
compensation/
B
control mode (A).
output
11
Setting
C Flash mode (TTL)
D Sync
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
344
Description
Choose a flash mode for TTL flash control. The options available vary with the shooting mode (P, S, A, or M) selected.
• E (FLASH AUTO): The flash fires only as required; flash level is adjusted according to subject brightness. A p icon
displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway indicates that the flash will fire when the photo is taken.
• F (STANDARD): The flash fires with every shot if possible;
flash level is adjusted according to subject brightness. The
flash will not fire if not fully charged when the shutter is
released.
• G (SLOW SYNC.): Combine the flash with slow shutter
speeds when photographing portrait subjects against a
backdrop of night scenery. The flash will not fire if not fully
charged when the shutter is released.
Choose whether the flash is timed to fire immediately after
the shutter opens (H/1ST CURTAIN) or immediately before
it closes (I/2ND CURTAIN). 1ST CURTAIN is recommended in
most circumstances.
External Flash Units
SYNC TERMINAL
The following options are available when no compatible flash
unit is connected or if a unit is connected via the sync terminal or
uses only the X-contact on the hot shoe.
MODE
SYNC TERMINAL
ADJUST
END
Setting
The Sync Terminal
Use the sync terminal to connect flash units
that require a sync cable.
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
Description
Choose from the following options:
• M: A trigger signal is transmitted via the hot shoe X contacts
when a picture is taken. Choose a shutter speed slower than
A Flash control mode the sync speed; even slower speeds may be required if the
unit uses long flashes or has a slow response time.
• D (OFF): The trigger signal is disabled.
Choose whether the flash is timed to fire immediately after
the shutter opens (H/1ST CURTAIN) or immediately before
B Sync
it closes (I/2ND CURTAIN). 1ST CURTAIN is recommended in
most circumstances.
11
345
SHOE MOUNT FLASH
The following options are available when an optional
shoe-mounted flash unit is attached and turned on.
MODE
SHOE MOUNT FLASH
ADJUST
Setting
END
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
Description
The flash control mode selected with the flash unit. This can
in some cases be adjusted from the camera; the options available vary with the flash.
• TTL: TTL mode. Adjust flash compensation (B).
• M: The flash fires at the selected output regardless of subject
A Flash control mode brightness or camera settings. Output in some cases can be
adjusted from the camera (B).
• MULTI: Repeating flash. Compatible shoe-mounted flash
units will fire multiple times with each shot.
• D (OFF): The flash does not fire. Some flash units can be
turned off from the camera.
11
346
External Flash Units
Setting
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
Description
The options available vary with flash control mode.
• TTL: Adjust flash compensation (the full value may not be
applied if the limits of the flash control system are exceeded). In the cases of the EF-X20, EF-20, and EF-42, the selected value is added to the value selected with the flash unit.
B Flash compensation/ • M/MULTI: Adjust flash output (compatible units only).
output
Choose from values expressed as fractions of full power,
from ⁄ (mode M) or ¼ (MULTI) down to ⁄ in increments
equivalent to ⁄ EV. The desired results may not be achieved
at low values if they exceed the limits of the flash control
system; take a test shot and check the results.
Choose a flash mode for TTL flash control. The options available vary with the shooting mode (P, S, A, or M) selected.
• E (FLASH AUTO): The flash fires only as required; flash level is adjusted according to subject brightness. A p icon
displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway indicates that the flash will fire when the photo is taken.
F (STANDARD): The flash fires with every shot if possible;
•
C Flash mode (TTL) flash level is adjusted according to subject brightness. The
flash will not fire if not fully charged when the shutter is
released.
• G (SLOW SYNC.): Combine the flash with slow shutter
speeds when photographing portrait subjects against a
backdrop of night scenery. The flash will not fire if not fully
charged when the shutter is released.
11
347
Setting
D Sync
E Zoom
F Lighting
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
G LED light
G Number of flashes *
H Frequency *
Description
Control flash timing.
• H (1ST CURTAIN): The flash fires immediately after the shutter opens (generally the best choice).
• I (2ND CURTAIN): The flash fires immediately before the
shutter closes.
• R (AUTO FP(HSS)): High-speed sync (compatible units only).
The camera automatically engages front-curtain highspeed sync at shutter speeds faster than the flash sync
speed. Equivalent to 1ST CURTAIN when MULTI is selected
for flash control mode.
The angle of illumination (flash coverage) for units that support flash zoom. Some units allow the adjustment to be
made from the camera. If AUTO is selected, zoom will automatically be adjusted to match coverage to lens focal length.
If the unit supports this feature, choose from:
• J (FLASH POWER PRIORITY): Gain range by slightly reducing
coverage.
• K (STANDARD): Match coverage to picture angle.
• L (EVEN COVERAGE PRIORITY): Slightly increase coverage for
more even lighting.
Choose how the built-in LED light functions during still photography (compatible units only): as a catchlight (M/CATCHLIGHT),
as an AF-assist illuminator (N/AF ASSIST), or as both a catchlight and an AF-assist illuminator (O/AF ASSIST+CATCHLIGHT).
Choose OFF to disable the LED during photography.
Choose the number of times the flash fires each time the
shutter is released in MULTI mode.
Choose the frequency at which the flash fires in MULTI mode.
* Full value may not be applied if limits of flash control system are exceeded.
11
348
External Flash Units
COMMANDER(OPTICAL)
The options will be displayed if the unit is currently functioning
as a commander for Fujifilm optical wireless remote flash control.
MODE
COMMANDER(OPTICAL)
ADJUST
END
B
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
Fujifilm optical wireless remote flash control offers a choice of
four channels (Channels 1 through 4) for the exchange of optical
signals between the commander and remote flash units. Separate channels can be used for different flash systems or to prevent interference when multiple systems are operating in close
proximity.
The flash units can also be placed in up to
three groups (A, B, and C) and flash mode
C
and flash level adjusted separately for
A
each group.
11
349
Setting
A Flash control mode
(group A)
B Flash control mode
(group B)
C Flash control mode
(group C)
D Flash compensation/
output (group A)
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
E Flash compensation/
output (group B)
F Flash compensation/
output (group C)
11
350
Description
Choose flash control modes for groups A, B, and C. TTL%
is available for groups A and B only.
• TTL: The units in the group fire in TTL mode. Flash compensation can be adjusted separately for each group.
• TTL%: If TTL% is selected for either group A or B, you can
specify the output of the selected group as a percentage of the other and adjust overall flash compensation
for both groups.
• M: In mode M, the units in the group fire at the selected
output (expressed as a fraction of full power) regardless
of subject brightness or camera settings.
• MULTI: Choosing MULTI for any group sets all the units
in all groups to repeating flash mode. All units will fire
multiple times with each shot.
• D (OFF): If OFF is selected, the units in the group will
not fire.
Adjust flash level for the selected group according to
option selected for flash control mode. Note that the full
value may not be applied if the limits of the flash control
system are exceeded.
• TTL: Adjust flash compensation.
• M/MULTI: Adjust flash output.
• TTL%: Choose the balance between groups A and B and
adjust overall flash compensation.
External Flash Units
Setting
G Flash mode (TTL)
I Zoom
J Lighting
351
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
H Sync
Description
Choose a flash mode for TTL flash control. The options
available vary with the shooting mode (P, S, A, or M) selected.
• E (FLASH AUTO): The flash fires only as required; flash
level is adjusted according to subject brightness. A
p icon displayed when the shutter button is pressed
halfway indicates that the flash will fire when the photo
is taken.
• F (STANDARD): The flash fires with every shot if possible; flash level is adjusted according to subject brightness. The flash will not fire if not fully charged when the
shutter is released.
• G (SLOW SYNC.): Combine the flash with slow shutter
speeds when photographing portrait subjects against a
backdrop of night scenery. The flash will not fire if not
fully charged when the shutter is released.
Control flash timing.
• H (1ST CURTAIN): The flash fires immediately after the
shutter opens (generally the best choice).
• I (2ND CURTAIN): The flash fires immediately before the
shutter closes.
• R (AUTO FP(HSS)): High-speed sync (compatible units only).
The camera automatically engages front-curtain highspeed sync at shutter speeds faster than the flash sync
speed. Equivalent to 1ST CURTAIN when MULTI is selected
for flash control mode.
The angle of illumination (flash coverage) for units that support flash zoom. Some units allow the adjustment to be
made from the camera. If AUTO is selected, zoom will automatically be adjusted to match coverage to lens focal length.
If the unit supports this feature, choose from:
• J (FLASH POWER PRIORITY): Gain range by slightly reducing coverage.
• K (STANDARD): Match coverage to picture angle.
• L (EVEN COVERAGE PRIORITY): Slightly increase coverage
for more even lighting.
11
External Flash Units
Setting
K Commander
K Number of flashes
L Channel
L Frequency
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
352
Description
Choose the group for units functioning as a commander for Fujifilm optical wireless remote flash control in TTL,
TTL%, or M mode. This option is available only with clipon flash units that support Fujifilm optical wireless remote
flash control.
• Gr A: Assign the commander to group A.
• Gr B: Assign the commander to group B.
• Gr C: Assign the commander to group C.
• OFF: Output from the commander is held to a level that
does not affect the final picture.
Choose the number of times the flash fires each time the
shutter is released in MULTI mode.
Choose the channel used by the commander for communication with the remote flash units. Separate channels
can be used for different flash systems or to prevent interference when multiple systems are operating in close
proximity.
Choose the frequency at which the flash fires in MULTI
mode.
Handgrips
Using a handgrip makes the camera easier to hold.
The MHG-XT5 handgrip attaches to the tripod socket.
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
353
MEMO
354
Technical Notes
355
Accessories from Fujifilm
The following optional accessories are available from Fujifilm.
For the latest information on the accessories available in your
region, check with your local Fujifilm representative or visit
https://fujifilm-x.com/support/compatibility/cameras/.
Rechargeable Li-ion batteries
NP-W235: Additional high-capacity NP-W235 rechargeable batteries can be purchased as required.
Dual battery chargers
BC-W235: The BC-W235 can charge up to two NP-W235 batteries at a time. At
+25 °C/+77 °F, the batteries will charge in about 200 minutes. Using a device that
supplies power with an outputs of 30 W or above reduces charging times to as
little as 150 minutes.
Eye cups
EC-XH W/EC-XT L/EC-XT M/EC-XT S/EC-GFX: Attach viewfinder eyecups to prevent light
leaking into the viewfinder window.
Remote releases
RR-100: Use to reduce camera shake or keep the shutter open during a time exposure (⌀2.5 mm).
Stereo microphones
MIC-ST1: An external microphone for movie recording.
FUJINON lenses
XF-/XC-series lenses: Interchangeable lenses for use exclusively with the FUJIFILM
X-mount.
FUJINON MKX-series lenses: Cinema lenses for the FUJIFILM X-mount.
Technical Notes
Macro extension tubes
MCEX-11/16: Attach between the camera and the lens to shoot at high reproduction ratios.
Teleconverters
XF1.4X TC WR: Increases the focal length of the compatible lenses by about 1.4×.
XF2X TC WR: Increases the focal length of the compatible lenses by about 2.0×.
12
356
Accessories from Fujifilm
Mount adapters
FUJIFILM M MOUNT ADAPTER: Allows the camera to be used with a wide selection
of M-mount lenses.
Body caps
BCP-001: Cover the camera lens mount when no lens is attached.
Handgrips
MHG-XT5: Makes the camera easier to hold. Pictures can be taken and batteries
and memory cards inserted or removed with the camera still in its case.
Technical Notes
Shoe-mounted flash units
EF-X500: In addition to manual and TTL flash control, this clip-on flash unit has a
Guide Number of 50/164 (ISO 100, m/ft.) and supports FP (high-speed sync), allowing it to be used at shutter speeds that exceed the flash sync speed. Featuring
support for the optional EF-BP1 battery pack and Fujifilm optical wireless flash
control, it can be used as a commander or remote flash unit for remote wireless
flash photography.
EF-BP1: A battery pack for EF-X500 flash units. Takes up to 8 AA batteries.
EF-60: In addition to manual and TTL flash control, this clip-on flash unit has a
Guide Number of 60/197 (ISO 100, m/ft.) and supports FP (high-speed sync), allowing it to be used at shutter speeds that exceed the flash sync speed. It can also
be used as remote flash under the control of an optional EF-W1 wireless commander.
EF-W1: With support for the NAS * wireless communication standard developed
by Nissin Japan, this wireless flash commander can be used with optional EF-60
clip-on flash units and other NAS-compliant units.
* NAS is a registered trademark of Nissin Japan Ltd.
EF-X8: This compact, clip-on flash unit draws power from the camera has a Guide
Number of approximately 8/26 (ISO 100, m/ft.) and can cover the angle of view of
a 16 mm lens (equivalent to 24 mm in 35 mm format).
EF-42: This clip-on flash unit has a Guide Number of 42/137 (ISO 100, m/ft.) and
supports manual and TTL flash control.
EF-X20: This clip-on flash unit has a Guide Number of 20/65 (ISO 100, m/ft.) and
supports manual and TTL flash control.
EF-20: This clip-on flash unit has a Guide Number of 20/65 (ISO 100, m/ft.) and
supports TTL flash control (manual flash control is not supported).
12
357
Accessories from Fujifilm
Tripod grips
TG-BT1: Record movies, take photographs, or adjust zoom on compatible power
zoom lenses while holding this Bluetooth tripod grip.
Grip belts
GB-001: Improves grip. Combine with a hand grip for more secure handling.
instax SHARE printers
SP-1/SP-2/SP-3: Connect via wireless LAN to print pictures on instax film.
Technical Notes
12
358
Software for Use with Your Camera
The camera can be used with the following software. For the
latest information on software available from Fujifilm, visit
https://fujifilm-x.com/support/compatibility/cameras/.
Smartphone Apps
Establish a wireless connection between your camera and a
smartphone or tablet.
https://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/
RAW FILE CONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIX
RAW FILE CONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIX is RAW conversion software from Ichikawa Soft Laboratory Co., Ltd. View RAW
pictures on your computer and convert them into other formats.
RAW FILE CONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIX is available free of
charge from the Fujifilm website.
https://fujifilm-x.com/support/download/software/raw-file-converterex-powered-by-silkypix/
N • “RAW FILE CONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIX” is supplied by Ichikawa
Soft Laboratory Co., Ltd.
• For information on when support will be available, visit:
https://fujifilm-x.com/support/compatibility/software/raw-file-converter-expowered-by-silkypix/
Technical Notes
12
359
Capture One Express for Fujifilm
View RAW pictures on your computer and convert them into other formats. Capture One Express for Fujifilm is available free of
charge from Capture One A/S.
https://www.captureone.com/products-plans/capture-one-express/fujifilm
N Visit the website above for information on when support will be available.
Capture One for Fujifilm
Capture One for Fujifilm workflow software from Capture One
A/S supports tethered shooting and the conversion of RAW pictures into other formats.
https://www.captureone.com/explore-features/fujifilm
N Visit the website above for information on when support will be available.
FUJIFILM Tether Shooting Plug-in (Exclusively for Lightroom)
A plug-in for Adobe Lightroom Classic.
• FUJIFILM Tether Shooting Plug-in PRO/FUJIFILM Tether Shooting Plug-in
https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/adobe-photoshop-lightroomtether-plugin/
Technical Notes
12
360
Software for Use with Your Camera
FUJIFILM X Acquire
This computer application lets you connect to the camera via USB
or Wi-Fi and automatically download photos to a specified folder
as they are taken, or backup and restore the camera via USB.
https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/x-acquire/
FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO
When the camera is connected to a computer via USB, FUJIFILM
X RAW STUDIO can use the camera’s unique image processing
engine to rapidly convert RAW files to create high-quality images
in other formats.
https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/x-raw-studio/
FUJIFILM Pixel Shift Combiner
Computer software for combining pictures taken using pixel-shift
multi-shot or reducing false colors (P 177).
https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/pixel-shift-combiner/
Technical Notes
12
361
For Your Safety
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Instructions: All the safety and operating instructions
• Read Instructions
should be read before the appliance is operated.
Instructions: The safety and operating instructions
• Retain Instructions
should be retained for future reference.
Warnings: All warnings on the appliance and in the
• Heed Warnings
operating instructions should be adhered to.
Instructions: All operating and use instructions
• Follow Instructions
should be followed.
Technical Notes
12
Installation
Power Sources: This video product should be operated only
from the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your
home, consult your appliance dealer or local power company. For video products intended to operate from battery
power, or other sources, refer to the operating instructions.
Grounding or Polarization: This video product is equipped
with a polarized alternating-current line plug (a plug having
one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the
power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you are
unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing
the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety
purpose of the polarized plug.
Alternate Warnings: This video product is equipped with
a three-wire grounding-type plug, a plug having a third
(grounding) pin. This plug will only fit into a grounding-type
power outlet. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to
insert the plug into the outlet, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose
of the grounding type plug.
Overloading: Do not overload wall outlets and extension
cords as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock.
Ventilation: Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided
for ventilation, to ensure reliable operation of the video product and to protect it from overheating, and these openings
must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never
be blocked by placing the video product on a bed, sofa, rug,
or other similar surface.
This video product should not be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is
provided or the manufacturer’s instructions have been adhered to. This video product should never be placed near or
over a radiator or heat register.
Attachments: Do not use attachments not recommended by
the video product manufacturer as they may cause hazards.
Water and Moisture: Do not use this video product near water—for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink,
or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool,
and the like.
362
Power-Cord Protection: Power-supply cords should be routed
so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by
items placed upon or against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point
where they exit from the appliance.
Accessories: Do not place this video product on an unstable
cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The video product may
fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious
damage to the appliance. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod,
bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold
with the video product. Any mounting of the appliance
should follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should
use a mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer.
An appliance and cart combination
should be moved with care. Quick
stops, excessive force, and uneven
surfaces may cause the appliance and
cart combination to overturn.
Antennas
Outdoor Antenna Grounding: If an outside antenna or cable
system is connected to the video product, be sure the antenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some
protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges.
Section 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA No.
70, provides information with respect to proper grounding of
the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in
wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to
grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding
electrode.
EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING AS
PER NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
Ground Clamp
Electric Servicee Equipmentt
Antenna Lead
in Wire
AAnntenna
Discharge Unit
D
(NEC
N SECTION
8
810-20)
Ground Clamps
Power Service Grounding Electrode
System (NEC ART 250. PART H)
Grounding
Conductors (NEC
SECTION 810-21)
For Your Safety
Power Lines: An outside antenna system should not be locat- Damage Requiring Service: Unplug this video product from
ed in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personlight or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power nel under the following conditions:
lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system, • When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged
extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such • If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the
power lines or circuits as contact with them might be fatal.
video product.
• If the video product has been exposed to rain or water.
Use
If the video product has been dropped or the cabinet has
Cleaning: Unplug this video product from the wall outlet be- •
been damaged.
fore cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners.
If the video product does not operate normally follow the
Use a damp cloth for cleaning.
operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are
Object and Liquid Entry: Never push objects of any kind into covered by the operating instructions as an improper adjustthis video product through openings as they may touch dan- ment of other controls may result in damage and will often
gerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore
a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the the video product to its normal operation.
video product.
When the video product exhibits a distinct change in perforLightning: For added protection for this video product re- mance — this indicates a need for service.
ceiver during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended
Replacement Parts: When replacement parts are required, be
and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall
sure the service technician has used replacement parts specoutlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will
ified by the manufacturer or have the same characteristics as
prevent damage to the video product due to lightning and
the original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in
power-line surges.
fire, electric shock or other hazards.
Service
Safety Check: Upon completion of any service or repairs to
Servicing: Do not attempt to service this video product this video product, ask the service technician to perform
yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to safety checks to determine that the video product is in propdangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to er operating condition.
qualified service personnel.
Be sure to read these notes before use
Safety Notes
• Make sure that you use your camera correctly. Read these
The symbols on the product (including the accesories) represent the following:
safety notes and your Basic Manual carefully before use.
AC
• After reading these safety notes, store them in a safe place.
DC
About the Icons
The icons shown below are used in this document to indicate
the severity of the injury or damage that can result if the information indicated by the icon is ignored and the product is
used incorrectly as a result.
Class II equipment (The construction of the product
is double-insulated.)
WARNING
This icon indicates that death or serious inWARNING jury can result if the information is ignored.
The icons shown below are used to indicate the nature of the
instructions which are to be observed.
Triangular icons tell you that this information requires attention (“Important”).
Circular icons with a diagonal bar tell you that the
action indicated is prohibited (“Prohibited”).
Filled circles with an exclamation mark indicate an
action that must be performed (“Required”).
Unplug
from power
socket
Do not allow water or foreign objects to enter the camera or connecting cables. Do not use the camera or
connecting cables following ingress of fresh or salt
water, milk, beverages, detergents, or other liquids.
Should liquid find its way into the camera or connecting
cables, turn the camera off, remove the battery, disconnect the USB cable, and disconnect and unplug the AC
adapter. Continued use of the camera can cause a
fire or electric shock. Contact your Fujifilm dealer.
363
Technical Notes
This icon indicates that personal injury or
CAUTION material damage can result if the information is ignored.
If a problem arises, turn the camera off, remove the
battery, disconnect the USB cable, and unplug the AC
power adapter. Continued use of the camera when
it is emitting smoke, is emitting any unusual odor,
or is in any other abnormal state can cause a fire or
electric shock. Contact your Fujifilm dealer.
12
WARNING
Do not use in
the bathroom
or shower
Do not
disassemble
Do not touch
internal
parts
Do not use the camera in the bathroom or shower. This
can cause a fire or electric shock.
Never attempt to change or take apart the camera (never open the case). Failure to observe this precaution
can cause fire or electric shock.
Should the case break open as the result of a fall or other
accident, do not touch the exposed parts. Failure to observe this precaution could result in electric shock
or in injury from touching the damaged parts. Remove the battery immediately, taking care to avoid
injury or electric shock, and take the product to the
point of purchase for consultation.
Do not change, heat or unduly twist or pull the connection cord and do not place heavy objects on the connection cord. These actions could damage the cord and
cause a fire or electric shock. If the cord is damaged,
contact your Fujifilm dealer. Do not use cables with
bent connectors.
Do not place the camera on an unstable surface. This
can cause the camera to fall or tip over and cause
injury.
Never attempt to take pictures while in motion. Do
not use the camera while walking or driving. This
can result in you falling down or being involved in
a traffic accident.
Do not touch any metal parts of the camera during a
thunderstorm. This can cause an electric shock due
to induced current from the lightning discharge.
Do not use the battery except as specified. Load the
battery as shown by the indicator.
Technical Notes
Do not disassemble, modify, or heat batteries. Do not
drop, strike, or throw batteries or otherwise subject
them to strong impacts. Do not use batteries that show
signs of leaking, deformation, discoloration, or other
abnormalities. Use only designated chargers to recharge rechargeable batteries and do not attempt to recharge non-rechargeable Li-ion or alkaline batteries. Do
not short batteries or store them with metallic objects.
Failure to observe these precautions could result
in the batteries overheating, igniting, rupturing, or
leaking, causing fire, burns, or other injury.
Use only batteries or AC power adapters specified for
use with this camera. Do not use voltages other than the
power supply voltage shown. The use of other power
sources can cause a fire.
12
364
WARNING
If the battery leaks and fluid gets in contact with your
eyes, skin or clothing, flush the affected area with clean
water and seek medical attention or call an emergency
number right away.
Do not use the charger to charge batteries other than
those specified here. The supplied charger is for use
only with batteries of the type supplied with the
camera. Using the charger to charge conventional
batteries or other types of rechargeable batteries
can cause the battery to leak, overheat or burst.
Using a flash too close to a person’s eyes may cause
visual impairment. Take particular care when photographing infants and young children.
Do not remain in prolonged contact with hot surfaces.
Do not leave one part of the body in contact with the
product for prolonged periods while the product is on.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in
low-temperature burns, particularly during prolonged use, at high ambient temperatures, when
HIGH is selected for AUTO POWER OFF TEMP.,
or with users who suffer from poor circulation or
reduced sensation, in which case use of a tripod or
similar precautions are recommended.
Do not use in the presence of flammable objects, explosive gases, or dust.
When carrying the battery, install it in a digital camera
or keep it in the hard case. When storing the battery,
keep it in the hard case. When discarding, cover the
battery terminals with insulation tape. Contact with
other metallic objects or batteries could cause the
battery to ignite or burst.
Keep memory cards, hot shoes, and other small parts
out of the reach of small children. Children may
swallow small parts; keep out of reach of children.
Should a child swallow a small part, seek medical
attention or call emergency.
Keep out of reach of small children. Among the elements that could cause injury are the strap, which
could become entangled about a child’s neck,
causing strangulation, and the flash, which could
cause visual impairment.
Follow the directions of airline and hospital personnel.
This product generates radio-frequency emissions
that could interfere with navigational or medical
equipment.
For Your Safety
CAUTION
Do not use this camera in locations affected by oil
fumes, steam, humidity or dust. This can cause a fire
or electric shock.
Do not leave this camera in places subject to extremely
high temperatures. Do not leave the camera in locations such as a sealed vehicle or in direct sunlight.
This can cause a fire.
Do not place heavy objects on the camera. This can
cause the heavy object to tip over or fall and cause
injury.
Do not move the camera while the AC power adapter is
still connected. Do not pull on the connection cord to
disconnect the AC power adapter. This can damage
the power cord or cables and cause a fire or electric
shock.
Do not cover or wrap the camera or the AC power adapter in a cloth or blanket. This can cause heat to build
up and distort the casing or cause a fire.
Do not use the plug if it is damaged or if it does not fit
securely into the outlet. Failure to observe this precaution could result in fire or electric shock.
When you are cleaning the camera or you do not plan to
use the camera for an extended period, remove the battery and disconnect and unplug the AC power adapter.
Failure to do so can cause a fire or electric shock.
When charging ends, unplug the charger from the
power socket. Leaving the charger plugged into the
power socket can cause a fire.
When a memory card is removed, the card could come
out of the slot too quickly. Use your finger to hold it and
gently release the card. Injury could result to those
struck by the ejected card.
Do not handle the memory card immediately after
shooting. The memory card may be hot, resulting
in burns. Wait for the card to cool before removing
it from the camera.
Technical Notes
Request regular internal testing and cleaning for your
camera. Build-up of dust in your camera can cause
a fire or electric shock. Contact your Fujifilm dealer
to request internal cleaning every two years. Please
note that this service is not free of charge.
Dispose of the product in accord with location regulations.
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type.
Batteries (battery pack or batteries installed) shall not
be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or
the like.
12
365
The Battery and Power Supply
Note: Check the type of battery used in your camera and read ■ Cautions: Handling the Battery
the appropriate sections.
• Do not transport or store with metal objects such as neckWARNING: Battery shall not be exposed to excessive heat laces or hairpins.
• Do not expose to flame or heat.
such as sunshine, fire or the like.
Do not disassemble or modify.
The following describes the proper use of batteries and how •
Do not expose to low atmospheric pressures.
to prolong their life. Incorrect use can shorten battery life or •
• Use with designated chargers only.
cause leakage, overheating, fire, or explosion.
• Dispose of used batteries promptly.
Li-ion Batteries
• Do not drop or subject to strong physical shocks.
Read this section if your camera uses a rechargeable Li-ion • Do not expose to water.
battery.
• Keep the terminals clean.
The battery is not charged at shipment. Charge the battery • The battery and camera body may become warm to the
touch after extended use. This is normal.
before use. Keep the battery in its case when not in use.
■ Caution: Disposal
■ Notes on the Battery
The battery gradually loses its charge when not in use. Dispose of used batteries in accord with local regulations.
Attention should be drawn to the environmental aspects of
Charge the battery one or two days before use.
battery disposal. Use the apparatus under moderate climate.
Battery life can be extended by turning the camera off when
Do not mechanically crush or split batteries.
not in use.
Technical Notes
12
Battery capacity decreases at low temperatures; a depleted AC Power Adapters
battery may not function when cold. Keep a fully charged • The AC power adapter is for indoor use only.
spare battery in a warm place and exchange as necessary, • Be sure the cable is securely connected to the camera.
or keep the battery in your pocket or other warm place and • Turn the camera off before disconnecting the adapter. Disinsert it in the camera only when shooting. Do not place the connect the adapter by the plug, not the cable.
battery in direct contact with hand warmers or other heating • Do not disassemble.
devices.
• Do not expose to high heat and humidity.
• Do not subject to strong physical shocks.
■ Charging the Battery
The battery can be charged using the camera and supplied • The adapter may hum or become hot to the touch during
AC adapter or an optional BC-W235 dual battery charger. use. This is normal.
Charging times will increase at ambient temperatures below • If the adapter causes radio interference, reorient or relocate
+10 °C (+50 °F) or above +35 °C (+95 °F). Do not attempt to the receiving antenna.
charge the battery at temperatures above +40 °C (+104 °F); at
temperatures below +5 °C (+41 °F), the battery will not charge.
Do not attempt to recharge a fully charged battery. The battery
does not however need to be fully discharged before charging.
The battery may be warm to the touch immediately after
charging or use. This is normal.
■ Battery Life
A noticeable decrease in the length of time the battery will
hold a charge indicates that it has reached the end of its service life and should be replaced.
If the battery is left for long periods without charging, you
may find that its quality degrades or that it no longer holds a
charge. Charge the battery regularly.
■ Storage
If the camera will not be used for an extended period, store
it at room temperature with the battery charged to approximately one half to ⁄ capacity.
If the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove the battery and store it in a dry place with an ambient
temperature of from +15 °C to +25 °C (+59 °F to +77 °F). Do
not store in locations exposed to extremes of temperature.
366
For Your Safety
Using the Camera
Trademark Information
including artificial light sources or natural light sources Digital Split Image is a trademark or registered trademark of
such as the sun in a cloudless sky. Failure to observe this FUJIFILM Corporation. Digital Micro Prism is a trademark or
precaution could damage the camera image sensor.
registered trademark of FUJIFILM Corporation. The typefaces
• Strong sunlight focused through the viewfinder may dam- included herein are solely developed by DynaComware Taiage the panel of electronic viewfinder (EVF). Do not aim wan Inc. Apple, iPhone, iPad, Mac, Mac OS X, OS X, macOS,
the electronic viewfinder at the sun.
Lightning and Apple ProRes are registered trademarks of
Apple Inc. in the U.S.A. and other countries. Windows is a
Take Test Shots
registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A.
Before taking photographs on important occasions (such as
and other countries. Android is a trademark or registered
at weddings or before taking the camera on a trip), take a
trademark of Google LLC. Adobe, the Adobe logo, Phototest shot and view the results to ensure that the camera is
shop, and Lightroom are trademarks or registered trademarks
functioning normally. FUJIFILM Corporation cannot accept
of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the U.S.A. and other counliability for damages or lost profits incurred as a result of
tries. Wi-Fi®, the Wi-Fi CERTIFIED logo, and Wi-Fi Protected
product malfunction.
Setup® are registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance®. The
Notes on Copyright
Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks
Unless intended solely for personal use, images recorded owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any use of such marks
using your digital camera system cannot be used in ways by Fujifilm is under license. The SDHC and SDXC logos are
that infringe copyright laws without the consent of the own- trademarks of SD-3C, LLC. CFexpress is a trademark of the CFA
er. Note that some restrictions apply to the photographing (CompactFlash Association). The HDMI logo is a trademark or
of stage performances, entertainments, and exhibits, even registered trademark of HDMI Licensing LLC. All other trade
when intended purely for personal use. Users are also asked names mentioned in this manual are the trademarks or registo note that the transfer of memory cards containing images tered trademarks of their respective owners.
or data protected under copyright laws is only permissible
Electrical Interference
within the restrictions imposed by those copyright laws.
This camera may interfere with hospital or aviation equipHandling
ment. Consult with hospital or airline staff before using the
To ensure that images are recorded correctly, do not subject camera in a hospital or on an aircraft.
the camera to impact or physical shocks while images are
Color Television Systems
being recorded.
NTSC (National Television System Committee) is a color teleLiquid Crystal
vision telecasting specification adopted mainly in the U.S.A.,
In the event that the display is damaged, care should be tak- Canada, and Japan. PAL (Phase Alternation by Line) is a color
en to avoid contact with liquid crystal. Take the urgent action television system adopted mainly in European countries and
indicated should any of the following situations arise:
China.
• If liquid crystal comes in contact with your skin, clean the Exif Print (Exif Version 2.32)
area with a cloth and then wash thoroughly with soap and
Exif Print is a newly revised digital camera file format in which
running water.
information stored with photographs is used for optimal col• If liquid crystal enters your eyes, flush the affected eye with or reproduction during printing.
clean water for at least 15 minutes and then seek medical
assistance.
IMPORTANT NOTICE: Read Before Using the Software
• If liquid crystal is swallowed, rinse your mouth thoroughly Direct or indirect export, in whole or in part, of licensed softwith water. Drink large quantities of water and induce vom- ware without the permission of the applicable governing
iting, then seek medical assistance.
bodies is prohibited.
Although the display is manufactured using extremely
Lenses and Other Accessories
high-precision technology, it may contain pixels that are
always lit or that do not light. This is not a malfunction, and • Use a screw 4.5 mm or shorter when attaching a tripod.
• Fujifilm will not be held liable for performance issues or
images recorded with the product are unaffected.
damage caused by the use of third-party accessories.
• Do not aim the camera at extremely bright light sources,
Technical Notes
12
367
NOTICES
To prevent fire or shock hazard, do not expose the unit to rain or moisture.
Please read the “Safety Notes” and make sure you understand them before using the camera.
Perchlorate Material—special handling may apply. See:
http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
For Customers in the U. S. A.
Tested To Comply With FCC Standards
FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE
Technical Notes
Contains IC : 10293A-WMBACBM25
Contains FCC ID : COF-WMBACBM25
FCC Statement: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
CAUTION: This equipment has been tested and found to
comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant
to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and
can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and
used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference
to radio or television reception, which can be determined by
turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged
to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different
from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician
for help.
FCC Caution: Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate this equipment.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
12
368
Radiation Exposure Statement: This device meets the government’s requirements for exposure to radio waves. This
device is designed and manufactured not to exceed the
emission limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) energy
set by the Federal Communications Commission of the U.S.
Government.
The exposure standard for wireless device employs a unit of
measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR.
The SAR limit set by the FCC is 1.6W/kg. Tests for SAR are
conducted using standard operating positions accepted by
the FCC with the device transmitting at its highest certified
power level in all tested frequency bands.
Notes on the Grant: To comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules,
this product must be used with a Fujifilm-specified ferrite-core A/V cable, USB cable, and DC supply cord.
A lithium ion battery that is recyclable powers
the product you have purchased. Please call
1-800-8-BATTERY for information on how to
recycle this battery.
California Code of Regulations, Title 20, Division 2, Chapter 4, Article 4, Appliance Efficiency Regulations, Sections 1601 through
1609
For Your Safety
For Customers in Canada
CAN ICES-003 (B)/NMB-003(B)
CAUTION: This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Industry Canada statement: This device complies with Industry Canada’s licence-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference; and (2) This device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired operation
of the device.
This device and its antenna(s) must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter,
except tested built-in radios. The County Code Selection
feature is disabled for products marketed in the US/ Canada.
Radiation Exposure Statement: The available scientific evidence does not show that any health problems are associated with using low power wireless devices. There is no
proof, however, that these low power wireless devices are
absolutely safe. Low power Wireless devices emit low levels
of radio frequency energy (RF) in the microwave range while
being used. Whereas high levels of RF can produce health
effects (by heating tissue), exposure of low-level RF that does
not produce heating effects causes no known adverse health
effects. Many studies of low-level RF exposures have not
found any biological effects. Some studies have suggested
that some biological effects might occur, but such findings
have not been confirmed by additional research. X-T5 has
been tested and found to comply with IC radiation exposure
limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets
RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules.
Operation in the band 5150–5250 MHz is only for indoor use
to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems.
Disposal of Electrical and Electronic Equipment in Private Households
In the European Union, Norway, Iceland and
Liechtenstein: This symbol on the product, or in
the manual and in the warranty, and/or on its
packaging indicates that this product shall not
be treated as household waste. Instead it should
be taken to an applicable collection point for the recycling of
electrical and electronic equipment.
By ensuring this product is disposed of correctly, you will
help prevent potential negative consequences to the environment and human health, which could otherwise be
caused by inappropriate waste handling of this product.
This symbol on the batteries or accumulators
indicates that those batteries shall not be treated
as household waste.
If your equipment contains easy removable batteries or accumulators please dispose these separately according to your
local requirements.
The recycling of materials will help to conserve natural resources. For more detailed information about recycling this
product, please contact your local city office, your household
waste disposal service or the shop where you purchased the
product.
In Countries Outside the European Union, Norway, Iceland and
Liechtenstein: If you wish to discard this product, including
the batteries or accumulators, please contact your local authorities and ask for the correct way of disposal.
In Japan: This symbol on the batteries indicates
that they are to be disposed of separately.
Caring for the Camera
To ensure continued enjoyment of the product, observe the following precautions.
Technical Notes
Storage and Use
If the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove the battery and memory card. Do not store or use the camera
in locations that are:
• exposed to rain, steam, or smoke
• very humid or extremely dusty
• exposed to direct sunlight or very high temperatures, such as in a closed vehicle on a sunny day
• extremely cold
• subject to strong vibration
• exposed to strong magnetic fields, such as near a broadcasting antenna, power line, radar emitter, motor, transformer,
or magnet
• in contact with volatile chemicals such as pesticides
• next to rubber or vinyl products
12
369
Wireless Network and Bluetooth Devices: Cautions
This product complies with the following EU Directives:
• RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU
• RE Directive 2014/53/EU
Hereby, FUJIFILM Corporation declares that the radio equipment type FF220001 is in compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU.
The full text of the EU declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address:
https://dl.fujifilm-x.com/global/products/cameras/x-t5/pdf/x-t5_doc-ysk.pdf
The full text of the UK declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address:
https://dl.fujifilm-x.com/en-gb/products/cameras/x-t5/pdf/x-t5_doc-ysk_uk.pdf
This compliance is indicated by the following conformity marking placed on the product:
Technical Notes
12
This marking is valid for non-Telecom products and EU harmonized Telecom products (e.g. Bluetooth®).
• Maximum radio-frequency power (EIRP):
WLAN 2.4 GHz: 12.17 dBm
WLAN 5 GHz: 14.30 dBm
Bluetooth: 3.69 dBm
IMPORTANT: Read the following notices before using the camera’s built-in wireless transmitter.
Q This product, which contains encryption function developed in the United States, is controlled by the United States
Export Administration Regulations and may not be exported or re-exported to any country to which the United States
embargoes goods.
device. Fujifilm does not accept liability for damages resulting from unauthorized
• Use only a wireless network or Bluetooth device.
use. Do not use in applications requiring a high degree of reliability, for example in medical devices or other systems that
may directly or indirectly impact human life. When using the device in computer and other systems that demand a greater
degree of reliability than offered by wireless network or Bluetooth devices, be sure to take all necessary precautions to
ensure safety and prevent malfunction.
• Use only in the country in which the device was purchased. This device conforms to regulations governing wireless network
and Bluetooth devices in the country in which it was purchased. Observe all location regulations when using the device.
Fujifilm does not accept liability for problems arising from use in other jurisdictions.
• Do not use the device in locations subject to magnetic fields, static electricity, or radio interference. Do not use the transmitter in
the vicinity of microwave ovens or in other locations subject to magnetic fields, static electricity, or radio interference that
may prevent reception of wireless signals. Mutual interference may occur when the transmitter is used in the vicinity of
other wireless devices operating in the 2.4 GHz band.
• The wireless transmitter operates in the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz bands using DSSS, OFDM and GFSK modulation.
• Security: Wireless network and Bluetooth devices transmit data via radio and consequently their use requires greater attention to security than applies in the case of wired networks.
- Do not connect to unknown networks or networks to which you do not have access rights, even if they are displayed
on your device, as such access may be considered unauthorized. Connect only to networks to which you have access
rights.
- Be aware that wireless transmissions may be vulnerable to interception by third parties.
- Do not connect this device directly to telecommunications networks (including public wireless LANs) operated by
providers or mobile, landline, Internet, or other telecommunications services.
The
• following may be punishable by law:
- Disassembly or modification or this device
- Removal of device certification labels
• This device operates on the same frequency as commercial, educational, and medical devices and wireless transmitters. It also operates on the same frequency as licensed transmitters and special unlicensed low-voltage transmitters used in RFID tracking
systems for assembly lines and in other similar applications.
• To prevent interference with the above devices, observe the following precautions. Confirm that the RFID transmitter is not in
operation before using this device. Should you observe that the device causes interference in licensed transmitters used
for RFID tracking, immediately stop using the affected frequency or move the device to another location. If you notice that
this device causes interference in low-voltage RFID tracing systems, contact a Fujifilm representative.
370
For Your Safety
• Do not use this device on board an aircraft. When on an aircraft, follow the instructions of airline personnel. Note that this prod-
uct may emit radio-frequency radiation even when off. This can be prevented by selecting ON for AIRPLANE MODE in
the network/USB setting menu before boarding.
• Requirements in AT/BE/BG/CZ/DK/EE/FR/DE/IS/IE/IT/EL/ES/CY/LV/LI/LT/LU/HU/MT/NL/NO/PL/PT/RO/SI/SK/TR/FI/SE/CH/
UK/HR. 5150 MHz–5350 MHz is for indoor use only.
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Information
SAR is measured with the device at 0 mm to the body, while transmitting at the highest certified output power level in
all frequency bands of the device. The maximum SAR value is 0.093 W/kg (head/body) averaged over 10 gram of tissue.
U.K. Importer:
FUJIFILM UK Limited
Fujifilm House, Whitbread Way, Bedford, Bedfordshire, MK42 0ZE, United Kingdom
EU Importer:
FUJIFILM Electronic Imaging Europe GmbH
Fujistrasse 1 47533 Kleve, Germany
Technical Notes
12
371
For Your Safety
Be sure to read these notes before using the lens
Safety Notes
WARNING
• Make sure that you use the lens correctly. Read these safety
notes and the camera Basic Manual carefully before use.
• After reading these safety notes, store them in a safe place.
About the Icons
The icons shown below are used in this document to indicate
the severity of the injury or damage that can result if the information indicated by the icon is ignored and the product is
used incorrectly as a result.
This icon indicates that death or serious
WARNING injury can result if the information is ignored.
This icon indicates that personal injury or
CAUTION material damage can result if the information is ignored.
The icons shown below are used to indicate the nature of the
instructions which are to be observed.
Triangular icons tell you that this information requires attention (“Important”).
Circular icons with a diagonal bar tell you that the
action indicated is prohibited (“Prohibited”).
Filled circles with an exclamation mark indicate an
action that must be performed (“Required”).
Do not
immerse
Do not immerse in or expose to water. Failure to observe this precaution can cause a fire or electric
shock.
Do not
disassemble
Do not disassemble (do not open the case). Failure
to observe this precaution can cause fire, electric
shock, or injury due to product malfunction.
Do not touch
internal
parts
Should the case break open as the result of a fall or other
accident, do not touch the exposed parts. Failure to observe this precaution could result in electric shock
or in injury from touching the damaged parts. Remove the battery immediately, taking care to avoid
injury or electric shock, and take the product to the
point of purchase for consultation.
Do not place on unstable surfaces. The product may
fall, causing injury.
Do not view the sun through the lens or camera viewfinders. Failure to observe this precaution can cause
permanent visual impairment.
CAUTION
Do not use or store in locations that are exposed to
steam, or smoke or are very humid or extremely dusty.
Failure to observe this precaution can cause fire or
electric shock.
Do not leave in direct sunlight or in locations subject
to very high temperatures, such as in a closed vehicle
on a sunny day. Failure to observe this precaution
can cause fire.
Keep out of the reach of small children. This product
could cause injury in the hands of a child.
Do not handle with wet hands. Failure to observe this
precaution can cause electric shock.
Keep the sun out of the frame when shooting backlit
subjects. Sunlight focused into the camera when
the sun is in or close to the frame can cause fire
or burns.
Technical Notes
When the product is not in use, replace the lens caps and
store out of direct sunlight. Sunlight focused by the
lens can cause fire or burns.
Do not carry the camera or lens while they are attached
to a tripod. The product can fall or strike other objects, causing injury.
12
372
Product Care
To ensure continued enjoyment of the product, observe
the following precautions.
Camera body: Use a soft, dry cloth to clean the camera body after
each use. Do not use alcohol, thinner, or other volatile chemicals,
which could discolor or deform the leather on the camera body.
Any liquid on the camera should be removed immediately with
a soft, dry cloth. Use a blower to remove dust from the monitor,
taking care to avoid scratches, and then gently wipe with a soft,
dry cloth. Any remaining stains can be removed by wiping gently with a piece of Fujifilm lens-cleaning paper to which a small
amount of lens-cleaning fluid has been applied. To prevent dust
entering the camera, replace the body cap when no lens is in
place.
Image sensor: Multiple photographs marred by spots or blotches in
identical locations may indicate the presence of dust on the image sensor. Clean the sensor using D USER SETTING > SENSOR
CLEANING.
Technical Notes
12
373
Cleaning the Image Sensor
Dust that cannot be removed using D USER SETTING >
SENSOR CLEANING can be removed manually as described below.
O Note that there will be a charge to repair or replace the image sensor if
it is damaged during cleaning.
1
Use a blower (not a brush) to remove
dust from the sensor.
N Do not use a brush or blower brush.
Failure to observe this precaution
could damage the sensor.
2
Check whether the dust has been successfully removed. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 as necessary.
3
Replace the body cap or lens.
Technical Notes
12
374
Firmware Updates
Updates to product firmware may result in changes not
described in the manual. For more information, visit:
https://fujifilm-x.com/support/download/firmware/cameras/
Checking the Firmware Version
O The camera will only display the firmware version if a memory card is
inserted.
1
2
Turn the camera off and check that a memory card is inserted.
3
Turn the camera off.
Turn the camera on while pressing the DISP/BACK button. The
current firmware version will be displayed; check the firmware version.
N To view the firmware version or update firmware for optional accessories such as interchangeable lenses, shoe-mounted flash units, and
mount adapters, mount the accessories on the camera.
Technical Notes
12
375
Troubleshooting
Consult the table below should you encounter problems
using your camera. If you don’t find the solution here, contact your local Fujifilm distributor.
Power and Battery
Problem
Solution
• The battery was not charged before first use: The battery is not
The camera does not
turn on.
The monitor does not
turn on.
Technical Notes
12
376
charged at shipment. Charge the battery before first use
(P 42).
• The battery is exhausted: Charge the battery or insert a fully-charged spare battery (P 42).
• The battery is inserted incorrectly: Reinsert in the correct orientation (P 36).
• The battery-chamber cover is not latched: Latch the battery-chamber cover (P 36).
The monitor may not turn on if the camera is turned off
and then on again very quickly. Keep the shutter button
pressed halfway until the monitor activates.
Troubleshooting
Problem
Solution
• The battery is cold: Warm the battery by placing it in a pock-
et or other warm place and reinsert it in the camera immediately before taking a picture.
• There is dirt on the battery terminals: Clean the terminals
The battery runs down with a soft, dry cloth.
quickly.
• ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING > PRE-AF: Turn
PRE-AF off (P 149).
• The battery has been charged many times: Select BATTERY
AGE to view the battery age; if the battery is old, replace
it with a new battery (P 276).
The battery is exhausted: Charge the battery or insert a
The camera turns off
fully-charged spare battery (P 42).
suddenly.
The camera does not The camera may be busy. Check the indicator lamp
turn off.
(P 9).
Technical Notes
12
377
Problem
Solution
• Make sure that the AC power adapter is correctly plugged
in (P 42).
• Ensure that the plug adapter is correctly connected to the
Charging does not start.
AC power adapter (P 42).
• The battery has not been recharged for an extended period: If
the battery has not been charged for an extended period,
charging will be disabled to ensure safety. Replace it with
a new battery.
• Insert the camera battery (P 36).
• Reinsert the camera battery in the correct orientation
(P 36).
Charging does not start • Confirm that the camera is connected to the computer
(USB).
(P 45).
• If the computer is off or in sleep mode, turn on or wake
the computer and disconnect and reconnect the USB cable (P 45).
• Insert the battery.
Charging does not start • Reinsert the battery in the correct orientation.
(battery charger).
• The AC adapter is not correctly connected to the charger: Check
that adapter is correctly connected to the charger.
Charging is slow.
Charge the battery at room temperature.
Technical Notes
12
378
Troubleshooting
Problem
Solution
• There is dirt on the battery terminals: Clean the terminals
The indicator lamp
blinks, but the battery
does not charge.
with a soft, dry cloth (P 36).
• The battery has been charged many times: Select BATTERY
AGE to view the battery age; if the battery is old, replace
it with a new battery (P 276). If the battery still fails to
charge, contact your Fujifilm dealer (P 356).
The power supply icon is Confirm that POWER SUPPLY ON/COMM OFF is senot displayed.
lected for USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING
(P 270).
Menus and Displays
Problem
Solution
Select ENGLISH for D USER SETTING > Qa
Display is not in English.
(P 50, 275).
Technical Notes
12
379
Shooting
Problem
Solution
• The memory card is full: Insert a new memory card or delete
pictures (P 38, 230).
• The memory card is not formatted: Format the memory card
in the camera (P 272).
• There is dirt on the memory card contacts: Clean the contacts
with a soft, dry cloth.
No picture is taken when
The memory card is damaged: Insert a new memory card
•
the shutter button is
(P 38).
pressed.
• The battery is exhausted: Charge the battery or insert a fully-charged spare battery (P 42).
• The camera has turned off automatically: Turn the camera on
(P 46).
• You are using a third-party mount adapter: Select ON for
SHOOT WITHOUT LENS (P 299).
Mottling (“noise”)
Gain is increased to aid composition when the subject is
appears in the monitor
poorly lit and aperture is stopped down, which may result
or viewfinder when
in noticeable mottling when images are previewed in the
the shutter button is
displays. Images taken with the camera are unaffected.
pressed halfway.
• The subject is not suited to autofocus: Use focus lock or manual focus (P 101).
The camera does not
focus.
• The focus area is too small for the intended subject: Increase
the size of the focus area by a couple of steps (P 88).
Technical Notes
12
380
Troubleshooting
Problem
No panorama is
recorded when the
shutter button is
pressed.
Solution
The indicator lamp was orange when you attempted to record a
panorama: Wait until the indicator lamps turns off (P 9).
• The subject’s face is obscured by sunglasses, a hat, long hair, or
other objects: Remove the obstructions (P 151).
• The subject’s face occupies only a small area of the frame:
Change the composition so that the subject’s face occupies a larger area of the frame (P 151).
No face is detected.
• The subject’s face is turned away from the camera: Ask the subject to face the camera (P 151).
• g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING is off: Turn g FACE/EYE
DETECTION SETTING on (P 151).
• The camera is tilted: Keep the camera level.
• The subject’s face is poorly lit: Shoot in better light.
• The subject is partially hidden: Choose a vantage point
where you can see as much of the subject as possible
(P 153).
• The subject occupies only a small portion of the frame: Get
No subject is detected. closer to your subject so it occupies more of the frame
(P 153).
• OFF is selected for SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING: Select
SUBJECT DETECTION ON (P 153).
• The subject is poorly lit: Shoot in better light.
Technical Notes
12
381
Problem
Solution
• The flash is disabled: Adjust settings (P 180).
• The electronic shutter is enabled: Choose a SHUTTER TYPE
that does not use the electronic shutter (P 170).
The flash does not fire.
• The battery is exhausted: Charge the battery or insert a fully-charged spare battery (P 42).
• The camera is in bracketing or continuous mode: Select single
frame mode (P 6).
• The subject is not in range of the flash: Position the subject in
The flash does not fully
light the subject.
range of the flash.
• The flash window is obstructed: Hold the camera correctly.
• Shutter speed is faster than the sync speed: Choose a slower
shutter speed (P 74, 80, 398).
Technical Notes
12
382
Troubleshooting
Problem
Pictures are blurred.
Pictures are mottled.
Solution
• The lens is dirty: Clean the lens.
• The lens is blocked: Keep objects
away from the lens
(P 54).
• s is displayed during shooting and the focus frame is displayed in red: Check focus before shooting (P 55).
• Shutter speed is slow and the ambient temperature is* high: This
is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. Use pixel
mapping (P 133).
* X-rays, cosmic rays, and other forms of radiation interacting
with the image sensor may cause bright spots of various colors such as white, red, and blue. Pixel mapping helps reduce
the occurrence of such bright spots.
• The camera has been used continuously at high temperatures:
Turn the camera off and wait for it to cool down (P 46,
393).
• A temperature warning is displayed: Turn the camera off and
wait for it to cool down (P 46, 393).
Technical Notes
12
383
Playback
Problem
Pictures are grainy.
Playback zoom is
unavailable.
No sound in movie
playback.
Solution
The pictures were taken with a different make or model of
camera.
The pictures were created using RESIZE or with a different
make or model of camera.
• Playback volume is too low: Adjust playback volume
(P 281).
• The microphone was obstructed: Hold the camera correctly
during recording.
• The speaker is obstructed: Hold the camera correctly during
playback.
Selected pictures are not
deleted.
Some of the pictures selected for deletion are protected.
Pictures remain after Remove protection using the device with which it was
ERASE > ALL FRAMES is originally applied (P 234).
selected.
The battery-chamber cover was opened while the camFile numbering is
era was on. Turn the camera off before opening the batunexpectedly reset.
tery-chamber cover (P 308).
Technical Notes
12
384
Troubleshooting
Connections
Problem
Solution
The camera is connected to a TV: Pictures will be displayed on
The monitor is blank.
the TV instead of in the camera monitor (P 57).
The display mode selected with the VIEW MODE button is
Both the TV and camera EVF ONLY + E: Put your eye to the viewfinder. Use
the VIEW MODE button to choose another display mode
monitor are blank.
(P 16).
• The camera is not properly connected: Connect the camera
properly (P 57).
No picture or sound
• Input on the television is set to “TV”: Set input to “HDMI”
on TV.
(P 57).
• The volume on the TV is too low: Use the controls on the television to adjust the volume (P 57).
The computer does not Be sure the camera and computer are correctly connected
recognize the camera. (P 255).
FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO
Check the option selected for CONNECTION MODE
or FUJIFILM X Acquire
on the camera. Select USB RAW CONV./BACKUP
fails to correctly detect
RESTORE before connecting the USB cable (P 263).
the camera.
Technical Notes
12
385
Problem
Cannot connect to
iPhones or iPads.
Cannot connect to
smartphone.
Technical Notes
12
386
Solution
POWER SUPPLY ON/COMM OFF is selected for USB
POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING. Select POWER
SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON when the camera is connected
via a Lightning connection to a device that do not supply
power (P 270).
Confirm that the camera is correctly connected: The procedure
for connecting the camera varies with the type of connector with which the smartphone is equipped (P 252).
Troubleshooting
Wireless Transfer
For additional information on troubleshooting wireless connections, visit:
https://digitalcamera-support-en.fujifilm.com/
Problem
Cannot connect to
smartphone.
The camera is slow
to connect or upload
pictures to the
smartphone.
Upload fails or is
interrupted.
Solution
• The smartphone is too far away: Move the devices closer
(P 249).
• Nearby devices are causing radio interference: Move the cam-
era and smartphone away from microwave ovens or cordless phones (P 249).
• The smartphone is connected to another device: The smart-
Technical Notes
phone and camera can connect to only one device at a
time. End the connection and try again (P 249).
• There are several smartphones in the vicinity: Try connecting
again. The presence of multiple smartphones can make
Cannot upload images. connection difficult (P 249).
• The image was created on another device: The camera may
not be able to upload images created on other devices.
• The image is a movie: Uploading movies takes some time. In
addition, smartphones may not accept upload of movies in
formats they do not support.
Select ON for Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING >
RESIZE IMAGE FOR SMARTPHONE. Selecting OFF
Smartphone will not
increases upload times for larger images; in addition,
display pictures.
some phones may not display images over a certain size
(P 266).
12
387
Troubleshooting
Miscellaneous
Problem
Solution
• Temporary camera malfunction: Remove and reinsert the
battery (P 36).
The camera is unresponsive.
• The battery is exhausted: Charge the battery or insert a fully-charged spare battery (P 42).
• The camera is connected to a wireless LAN: End the connection.
• The controls are locked: Press and hold the MENU/OK button
The camera does not
function as expected.
No sound.
Pressing the Q button
does not display the
quick menu.
Technical Notes
12
388
to unlock the controls (P 13, 15).
Remove and reinsert the battery (P 36). If the problem
persists, contact your Fujifilm dealer.
Adjust the volume (P 278).
TTL-LOCK is active: End TTL-LOCK (P 181).
Warning Messages and Displays
The following warnings appear in the display.
Warning
Description
Low battery. Charge the battery or insert a fully-charged
i (red)
spare battery.
Battery exhausted. Charge the battery or insert a fulj (blinks red)
ly-charged spare battery.
The camera cannot focus. Use focus lock to focus on ans (displayed in red with
other subject at the same distance, then recompose the
red focus frame)
picture.
The subject is too bright or too dark and the picture will be
Aperture or shutter
over- or under-exposed. Use the flash for additional lightspeed displayed in red
ing when taking photographs of poorly-lit subject.
FOCUS ERROR
Camera malfunction. Turn the camera off, remove the lens,
LENS CONTROL ERROR and check for foreign matter between the lens and the
TURN OFF THE CAMERA camera body, then replace the lens and turn the camera
AND TURN ON AGAIN on. If the problem persists, contact a Fujifilm dealer.
• The memory card is not formatted or the memory card has been
formatted in a computer or other device: Format the memory
card using D USER SETTING > FORMAT.
CARD NOT INITIALIZED • The memory card contacts require cleaning: Clean the contacts with a soft, dry cloth. If the message is repeated,
format the card. If the message persists, replace the card.
• Camera malfunction: Contact a Fujifilm dealer.
Technical Notes
12
389
Warning
LENS ERROR
CARD ERROR
PROTECTED CARD
BUSY
b MEMORY FULL
Technical Notes
12
390
Description
Turn the camera off, remove the lens, and check for foreign matter between the lens and the camera body, then
replace the lens and turn the camera on. If the problem
persists, contact a Fujifilm dealer.
• The memory card is not formatted for use in the camera: Format the card.
• The memory card contacts require cleaning or the memory card
is damaged: Clean the contacts with a soft, dry cloth. If the
message is repeated, format the card. If the message persists, replace the card.
• Incompatible memory card: Use a compatible card.
• Camera malfunction: Contact a Fujifilm dealer.
The memory card is locked. Unlock the card.
The memory card is incorrectly formatted. Use the camera
to format the card.
The memory card is full and pictures cannot be recorded.
Delete pictures or insert a memory card with more free
space.
Warning Messages and Displays
Warning
Description
• Memory card error or connection error: Reinsert the card or
WRITE ERROR
FRAME NO. FULL
turn the camera off and then on again. If the message
persists, contact a Fujifilm dealer.
• Not enough memory remaining to record additional pictures:
Delete pictures or insert a memory card with more free
space.
• The memory card is not formatted: Format the memory card.
• The memory card was removed while data were being recorded:
Do not remove the memory card during recording.
• The memory card write speed is slow: When recording movies, be sure the memory card write speed is fast enough.
The camera has run out of frame numbers (current frame
number is 999-9999). Insert a formatted memory card and
select RENEW for D SAVE DATA SET-UP > FRAME NO..
Take a picture to reset frame numbering to 100-0001, then
select CONTINUOUS for FRAME NO..
Technical Notes
12
391
Warning
Description
• The file is corrupt or was not created with the camera: The file
cannot be viewed.
READ ERROR
• The memory card contacts require cleaning: Clean the con-
tacts with a soft, dry cloth. If the message is repeated,
format the card. If the message persists, replace the card.
• Camera malfunction: Contact a Fujifilm dealer.
An attempt was made to delete or rotate to a protected picPROTECTED FRAME
ture. Remove protection and try again.
The picture is damaged or was not created with the camera.
CAN NOT CROP
Print orders can contain no more than 999 pictures. Copy
any additional pictures you wish to print to another memoDPOF FILE ERROR
ry card and create a second print order.
The picture cannot be printed using DPOF.
CAN NOT SET DPOF
F CAN NOT SET DPOF Movies cannot be printed using DPOF.
The selected picture cannot be rotated.
CAN NOT ROTATE
F CAN NOT ROTATE Movies cannot be rotated.
Technical Notes
12
392
Warning Messages and Displays
Warning
Description
F CANNOT EXECUTE The selected operation is not supported: Check whether the
m CANNOT EXECUTE picture was recorded with a different model of camera.
The camera is approaching the maximum temperature alp (yellow)
CAMERA IS APPROACHING lowed when STANDARD is selected for AUTO POWER
OFF TEMP. and will shortly turn off automatically. Turn the
STANDARD
camera off and wait for it to cool.
TEMPERATURE LIMIT
The camera is approaching the maximum temperature
allowed when HIGH is selected for AUTO POWER OFF
p (yellow)
TEMP. and will shortly turn off automatically. Remaining
CAMERA IS APPROACHING
in contact with the camera could result in low-temperature
HIGH TEMPERburns; mount the camera on a tripod or take other steps to
ATURE LIMIT.DO NOT
avoid prolonged contact with the camera. The camera will
HOLD CAMERA FOR
shortly turn off automatically. Turn the camera off and wait
LONG PERIODS OF TIME
for it to cool. Mottling may increase in pictures taken when
this warning is displayed.
The camera temperature has reached the cutoff point and
p (red)
the camera is about to turn off automatically. Turn the camHIGH TEMPERATURE
era off and wait for it to cool. Mottling may increase in picLIMIT REACHED
tures taken when this warning is displayed.
SHUTTING DOWN
Technical Notes
12
393
Memory Card Capacity
The following table shows the recording time or number
of pictures available at different image sizes. All figures are
approximate; file size varies with the scene recorded, producing wide variations in the number of files that can be
stored. The number of exposures or length remaining may
not diminish at an even rate.
SD memory cards
64 GB
Capacity
T
FINE
O 3∶2
RAW (UNCOMPRESSED)
Photos
RAW (LOSSLESS COMPRESSED)
RAW (COMPRESSED)
Movies *
V2160
W1080
NORMAL
2660
3980
730
1380
1950
79 minutes
79 minutes
* Assumes default bit rate.
O • The types of memory cards suitable for movie recording vary with the
settings selected (P 68).
• Shots over an hour in length may be recorded across multiple files
without interruption. In addition, movies over 4 GB in size will be recorded uninterrupted across multiple files to SD memory cards with
capacities 32 GB or less.
Technical Notes
12
394
Specifications
System
Model
Product Number
Effective pixels
Image sensor
Storage media
Memory card slots
File system
FUJIFILM X-T5
FF220001
Approx. 40.2 million
23.5 mm × 15.7 mm (APS-C), X-Trans CMOS 5 HR sensor with
primary color filter
Fujifilm-recommended SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards
Two SD memory card slots (UHS-II compliant)
• Still pictures: Compliant with DCF 2.0
• Compressed: Exif 2.32 JPEG-baseline compliant; DPOF compliant; HEIF compliant (4 : 2 : 2, 10-bit)
• Uncompressed or compressed using a reversible or non-reversible
algorithm: RAW (original RAF format; special-purpose software
required); RAW+JPEG available; TIFF (RGB)
• Movies: Compliant with HEVC/H.265, and H.264
• Audio (including voice memos):
- LPCM (two channels: 24-bit, 48 kHz sampling)
- AAC (MP4 recordings only)
• Audio (via XLR microphone adapter):
- LPCM (two channels: 24-bit, 48 kHz sampling; four channels: 24-bit, 48 kHz sampling)
- AAC (MP4 recordings only; two channels: 16-bit, 48 kHz
sampling)
Technical Notes
12
395
System
Image size
O 3∶2 (7728 × 5152)
O 4∶3 (6864 × 5152)
O 16∶9 (7728 × 4344)
O 5∶4 (6432 × 5152)
O 1∶1 (5152 × 5152)
P 3∶2 (5472 × 3648)
P 4∶3 (4864 × 3648)
P 16∶9 (5472 × 3080)
P 5∶4 (4560 × 3648)
P 1∶1 (3648 × 3648)
Q 3∶2 (3888 × 2592)
Q 4∶3 (3456 × 2592)
Q 16∶9 (3888 × 2184)
Q 5∶4 (3264 × 2592)
Q 1∶1 (2592 × 2592)
RAW (7872 × 5196)
TIFF (7728 × 5152)
O panorama: vertical (2160 × 9600)/horizontal (9600 × 1440)
P panorama: vertical (2160 × 6400)/horizontal (6400 × 1440)
Lens mount
FUJIFILM X mount
Sensitivity
• Still pictures: Standard output sensitivity equivalent to
ISO 125–12800 in increments of ⁄ EV; AUTO 1–3; extended
output sensitivity equivalent to ISO 64, 80, 100, 25600, or 51200
• Movies: Standard output sensitivity equivalent to ISO 125–12800
in increments of ⁄ EV; AUTO; extended output sensitivity equivalent to ISO 25600
Metering
256-segment through-the-lens (TTL) metering;
MULTI, SPOT, AVERAGE, CENTER WEIGHTED
Exposure control
Programmed AE (with program shift); shutter-priority AE;
aperture-priority AE; manual exposure
Exposure compensation • Still pictures: −5 EV – +5 EV in increments of ⁄ EV
• Movies: −2 EV–+2 EV in increments of ⁄ EV
Technical Notes
12
396
Specifications
System
Shutter speed
• MECHANICAL SHUTTER, E-FRONT CURTAIN SHUTTER, E-FRONT +
MECHANICAL
⁃ Modes P and A: 30 s to ⁄ s
⁃ Modes S and M: 15 min. to ⁄ s
⁃ Bulb: Max. 60 min.
• ELECTRONIC SHUTTER
⁃ Modes P and A: 30 s to ⁄ s
⁃ Modes S and M: 15 min. to ⁄ s
⁃ Bulb: Fixed at 1 s
• MECHANICAL + ELECTRONIC, E-FRONT + MECHANICAL + ELECTRONIC
⁃ Modes P and A: 30 s to ⁄ s
⁃ Modes S and M: 15 min. to ⁄ s
⁃ Bulb: Max. 60 min.
Continuous
CONTINUOUS MODE
20fps(1.29X CROP) 1
13fps(1.29X CROP) 1
10fps(1.29X CROP) 1
15fps 2
10fps 3
7.0fps 4
5.0fps
3.0fps
Available frame advance rates
(JPEG)
20
13
10
15
10
7.0
5.0
3.0
1 Available with electronic shutter only.
2 13 fps with electronic shutter.
3 8.9 fps with electronic shutter.
4 6.7 fps with electronic shutter.
O The frame rate and number of frames per burst varFocus
• Mode: Single or continuous AF; manual focus with focus ring
• Autofocus system: Intelligent hybrid AF (TTL contrast-detect/
phase-detection AF)
• Focus-area selection: SINGLE POINT, ZONE, WIDE/TRACKING, ALL
397
Technical Notes
ies with shooting conditions and type of memory
card used.
12
System
White balance
Technical Notes
Auto (WHITE PRIORITY, AUTO, AMBIENCE PRIORITY), Custom 1,
Custom 2, Custom 3, color temperature selection, direct sunlight, shade, daylight fluorescent, warm white fluorescent,
cool white fluorescent, incandescent, underwater
Self-timer
• Still pictures: Off, 2 sec., 10 sec.
• Movies: Off, 3 sec., 5 sec., 10 sec.
Flash mode
• MODE: TTL MODE (FLASH AUTO, STANDARD, SLOW SYNC.),
MANUAL, MULTI, OFF
• SYNC. MODE: 1ST CURTAIN, 2ND CURTAIN, AUTO FP (highspeed sync)
• RED EYE REMOVAL: L FLASH, OFF
Hot shoe
Provided (supports TTL flash control); supports sync speeds
as fast as ½ s
Sync contact
X contact; supports sync speeds as fast as ½ s
Sync terminal
Provided
Electronic viewfinder 0.5-in., 3690k-dot OLED viewfinder; magnification 0.80×
with 50 mm lens (35 mm format equivalent) at infinity and
(EVF)
diopter set to −1.0 m−1; diagonal angle of view approximately
39° (horizontal angle of view approximately 32°)
• Diopter adjustment: −5 to +3 m−1
• Eyepoint: Approximately 24 mm
LCD monitor
3.0-in/7.6 cm, 1840k-dot color LCD touch screen with 3-way
tilt
Movies
• Movie size: J 16:9, T 16∶9, W 17∶9, V 16∶9, d 17∶9,
(with stereo sound) W 16∶9, W 17∶9
• Frame rate: 59.94P, 50P, 29.97P, 25P, 24P, 23.98P
• Recording/output format:
- H.265 (10-bit MOV 4 : 2 : 2/4 : 2 : 0; 360, 200, 100, or 50 Mbps)
- H.264 (8-bit MOV/MP4 4 : 2 : 0; 360, 200, 100, or 50Mbps)
- HDMI output supported (RAW output supported with
Atomos and Blackmagic Design external recorders; 8-bit
4 : 2 : 2/10-bit 4 : 2 : 2)
12
398
Specifications
System
High-speed movies
• Movie size: W 16∶9, W 17∶9
• Frame advance rate: 240P, 200P, 120P, 100P
Input/output terminals
Microphone connector ⌀3.5 mm mini-stereo jack
Headphone jack socket The USB connector can be converted to a headphone jack
using the supplied headphone adapter
Remote release connector ⌀2.5 mm 3-pole mini jack
Digital input/output USB connector (Type-C) USB3.2 Gen2x1
HDMI output
HDMI Micro connector (type D)
Technical Notes
12
399
Power supply/other
Power supply
NP-W235 rechargeable battery (supplied with camera)
Battery life
• Battery type: NP-W235
• Lens: XF35mmF1.4 R
• External flash units: Disabled
• Shooting mode: Mode P
Number of shots
PERFORMANCE
LCD
EVF
Approx. 570
Approx. 500
BOOST 1
NORMAL
Approx. 580
Approx. 590
ECONOMY
Approx. 740
Approx. 670
Total length of footage that can be recorded on
a single charge
Continuance
Actual battery life
battery life of
Mode
of movie capture
movie capture
Approx. 90 minutes
Approx. 130 minutes
J2
Approx. 80 minutes
Approx. 130 minutes
V3
Approx. 90 minutes
Approx. 150 minutes
W3
High-speed movies 4 Approx. 100 minutes
–
1 EVF FRAME RATE PRIORITY (100P) selected EVF/LCD
BOOST SETTING.
2 At a frame rate of 29.97 fps.
3 At a frame rate of 59.94 fps.
4 At a frame rate of 120 fps.
Technical Notes
CIPA standard. Measured using battery supplied with camera
and SD memory card.
Note: Battery endurance varies with battery charge level and
the figures given above are not guaranteed. Battery endurance will decline at low temperatures.
12
400
Specifications
Power supply/other
Camera size
129.5 mm × 91 mm × 63.8 mm (37.9 mm excluding projections,
(W × H × D)
measured at thinnest part)/5.1 in. × 3.58 in. × 2.51 in. (1.49 in.)
Camera weight
Approx. 476 g/16.8 oz., excluding battery, accessories, and
memory card
Shooting weight
Approx. 557 g/19.6 oz., including battery and memory card
Operating conditions • Temperature: −10 °C to +40 °C/+14 °F to +104 °F (+5 °C to
+40 °C/+41 °F to +104 °F when battery is charging)
• Humidity: 10% to 80% (no condensation)
Technical Notes
Wireless transmitter
Wireless LAN
Standards
IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n/ac (standard wireless protocol)
Operating frequency • Israel, Indonesia
: 2,412 MHz–2,462 MHz (11 channels)
(center frequency)
• USA, Canada, Brazil, China, India, Korea, Malaysia
: 2,412 MHz–2,462 MHz (11 channels)
: 5,180 MHz–5,320 MHz (W52, W53)
: 5,745 MHz–5,825 MHz (UNII-3)
• European Union, Japan, United Kingdom, Australia, Norway, New
zealand, Turkey, Hong Kong, Philippines, Vietnam, Singapore,
Thailand, UAE, Russia, Taiwan, Saudi Arabia, Qatar, Bahrain,
Oman, Egypt, Iran, Kuwait, Lebanon, Uzbekistan
: 2,412 MHz–2,462 MHz (11 channels)
: 5,180 MHz–5,320 MHz (W52, W53)
: 5,500 MHz–5,700 MHz (W56)
Access protocols
Infrastructure
Bluetooth®
Standards
Bluetooth version 4.2 (Bluetooth Low Energy)
Operating frequency 2,402 MHz–2,480 MHz
(center frequency)
12
401
Specifications
NP-W235 rechargeable battery
Nominal voltage
7.2 V
Nominal capacity
2350 mAh
Rating capacity
2200 mAh
Operating
0 °C to +40 °C/+32 °F to +104 °F
temperature
38.92 mm × 22.8 mm × 52.26 mm/
Dimensions
1.5 in. × 0.9 in. × 2.1 in.
(W × H × D)
Weight
Approx. 79 g/2.8 oz.
AC-5VJ AC power adapter
Manufacturer
Address
Model name
Rated input
Input capacity
Rated output
Average active efficiency
Efficiency at load 10%
No-load power consumption
Operating temperature
Weight
Dongguan Yingiu Power Co.,Ltd.
No.6 Yongxing Road, Shayao Village, Shijie Town,
523292 Dongguan City, Guangdong Province,
PEOPLE'S REPUBLIC OF CHINA
AC-5VJ
100 V – 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
Max. 50 VA
DC5.0V 3.0A 15.0W
84.8 %
84.2 %
0.02 W
0 °C to +40 °C/+32 °F to +104 °F
Approx. 45 g ± 2 g/1.6 oz. ± 0.1 oz.
O Specifications and performance are subject to change without notice.
Fujifilm will not be held liable for any errors this manual may contain.
The appearance of the product may differ from that described in this
manual.
Technical Notes
12
402
MEMO
403
MEMO
404
MEMO
405
7-3, AKASAKA 9-CHOME, MINATO-KU, TOKYO 107-0052, JAPAN
https://fujifilm-x.com

advertisement

Key Features

  • 40.2MP X-Trans CMOS 5 HR sensor for exceptional image quality
  • X-Processor 5 for fast performance and advanced image processing
  • 15fps continuous shooting speed to capture fast-moving subjects
  • Advanced autofocus system for sharp and accurate focus
  • Variety of creative shooting modes and film simulations for artistic expression
  • Weather-resistant construction and durable magnesium alloy body

Related manuals

Frequently Answers and Questions

What is the resolution of the Fujifilm X-T5?
The Fujifilm X-T5 has a resolution of 40.2 megapixels.
What is the maximum continuous shooting speed of the Fujifilm X-T5?
The Fujifilm X-T5 has a maximum continuous shooting speed of 15 frames per second.
Is the Fujifilm X-T5 weather-resistant?
Yes, the Fujifilm X-T5 is weather-resistant.
What type of sensor does the Fujifilm X-T5 have?
The Fujifilm X-T5 has a 40.2MP X-Trans CMOS 5 HR sensor.
What is the ISO range of the Fujifilm X-T5?
The Fujifilm X-T5 has an ISO range of 160-12800, expandable to 80-51200.
Download PDF

advertisement